TDR94 94D Instruction Book

Collins TDR-94/94D
ATC/Mode S
Transponder System
instruction book
Collins General Aviation Division

June 15, 1995
TO: HOLDERS OF THE TDR-94/94D ATC/MODE S TRANSPONDER SYSTEM INSTRUCTION

BOOK (523-0775652)
7TH EDITION HIGHLIGHTS
The attached pages complete replace the existing instruction book. All changes are identified by black
bars in the margin of the page.
This new material incorporates changes and new material previously published via Addendums and
various material found necessary during the review effort. Principle among these changes are the
Acceptance Test Procedures in tables 5-11, 5-12, and 5-13.
PUBLICATIONS DEPARTMENT
1/2
523-0775652-00711A
7th Edition, 15 June 1995
Collins TDR-94/94D
ATC/Mode S
Transponder System
instruction book
This publication includes:
General Information 523-0775653

Operation 523-0775655
Theory of Operation 523-0775656
Maintenance 523-0775657

Rockwell International Corporation
Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52498
Printed in the United States of America
Rockwell International 1995
WARNING
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information subject to the International Traffic in Arms
Regulation (ITAR) or the Export Administration Regulation (EAR) of 1979 which
may not be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside of
the United States without first obtaining an export license. A violation of the ITAR
or EAR may be subject to a penalty of up to 10 years imprisonment and a fine of
up to $1,000,000 under 22 U.S.C.2778 of the Arms Export Control Act of 1976 or
section 2410 of the Export Administration Act of 1979. Include this notice with any
reproduced portion of this document.
Caution
The material in this publication is subject to change. Before attempt-

ing any maintenance operation on the equipment covered in this
publication, verify that you have complete and up-to-date publications
by referring to the applicable Publications and Service Bulletin
Indexes.
SOFTWARE COPYRIGHT NOTICE
Copyright, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995

All software resident in this equipment is protected by copyright.
We welcome your comments concerning this publication. Although every effort

has been made to keep it free of errors, some may occur. When reporting a
specific problem, please describe it briefly and include the publication part
number, the paragraph or figure number, and the page number.
Send your comments to: Publications Department MS 106-124

Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52498
or by Internet E-Mail to:
GENAVPUB@THOR.CCA.ROCKWELL.COM
SPECIFIC ADVISORIES FOR THE <EQ TYPE>
Warning
Rockwell International does not take the responsibility for certification of the TDR-94/94D when used with
equipment other than those covered by the Rockwell International Collins Avionics safety analysis.
Warning
Electronic control systems, such as autopilots, engine controls, fuel controls, temperature sensors, etc, used
for aircraft control can be susceptible to transmissions from communications transceivers, DMEs, transpond-
ers, etc, that can interfere with aircraft operations. If such a situation occurs, discontinue transmission or
select a different frequency. If necessary, turn off the radio.
Warning
Service personnel are to obey standard safety precautions, such as wearing safety glasses, to prevent personal
injury while installing or doing maintenance on this unit.
Warning
Use care when using sealants, solvents, and other chemical compounds. Do not expose to excessive heat or
open flame. Use adequate ventilation. Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors and avoid prolonged contact with
skin. Observe all cautions and warnings given by the manufacturer.
Warning
Remove all power to the unit before disassembling it. Disassembling the unit with power connected is
dangerous to life and may cause voltage transients that can damage the unit.
Warning
This unit may have components that contain materials (such as beryllium oxide, acids, lithium, radioactive
material, mercury, etc) that can be hazardous to your health. If the component enclosure is broken, handle
the component in accordance with OSHA requirements 29CFR 1910.1000 or superseding documents to prevent
personal contact with or inhalation of hazardous materials. Since it is virtually impossible to determine which
components do or do not contain such hazardous materials, do not open or disassemble components for any
reason.
Warning
This unit exhibits a high degree of functional reliability. Nevertheless, users must know that it is not
practical to monitor for all conceivable system failures and, however unlikely, it is possible that erroneous
operation could occur without a fault indication. The pilot has the responsibility to find such an occurrence
by means of cross-checks with redundant or correlated data available in the cockpit.
Caution
Turn off power before disconnecting any unit from wiring. Disconnecting the unit without turning power off
may cause voltage transients that can damage the unit.
i
Caution
This unit contains electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) components and ESDS assemblies that can be
damaged by static voltages. Although most ESDS components contain internal protection circuits, good
procedures dictate careful handling of all ESDS components and ESDS assemblies.
Obey the precautions given below when moving, touching, or repairing all ESDS components and units
containing ESDS components.
a. Deenergize or remove all power, signal sources, and loads used with the unit.
b. Place the unit on a work surface that can conduct electricity (is grounded).
c. Ground the repair operator through a conductive wrist strap or other device using a 470-k or 1-M series
resistor to prevent operator injury.
d. Ground any tools (and soldering equipment) that will contact the unit. Contact with the operators hand
is a sufficient ground for hand tools that are electrically isolated.
e. All ESDS replacement components are shipped in conductive foam or tubes and must be stored in their
shipping containers until installed.
f. ESDS devices and assemblies, that are removed from a unit, must immediately be put on the conductive
work surface or in conductive containers.
g. Place repaired or disconnected circuit cards in aluminum foil or in plastic bags that have a layer of, or are
made with, conductive material.
h. Do not touch ESDS devices/assemblies or remove them from their containers until they are needed.
Failure to handle ESDS devices as described above can permanently damage them. This damage can cause
immediate or premature device failure.
ii
ROCKWELL COLLINS
INSTRUCTION BOOK
TDR-94/94D, PART NO 622-9352/622-9210
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

Note: Insert this page following Specific Advisories page ii.
TEMPORARY DATE DATE
PAGE NUMBER BY BY
REV NO ISSUED REMOVED
1 1-11 Aug 15/00 Rockwell Collins
2 1-2 Nov 22/02 Rockwell Collins
NOTICE
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document contains technical data that may be restricted for export under the International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR) or the Export Administration Regulations
(EAR). Violations of these export laws may be subject to fines and penalties under the Arms Export Control Act (22 U.S. C. 2778).
Temporary Revision 2 RTR-1/RTR-2

523-0775652-02711A Nov 25/02
523-0775653-006118
TDR-94/94D
ATC/Mode S
Transponder System
General Information
table of contents
Paragraph Page
1.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.4 RELATED PUBLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.5 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.6 RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
NOTICE: This section replaces fifth edition dated 5 May 1993.

List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.
Page Issue
*Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Jun 95
*List of Effective pages . . . . . 15 Jun 95
1-1 thru 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 May 93
1-6 thru 1-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Jun 95
1-10 thru 1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 May 93
1-14 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 May 93
RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF

Record of Revisions REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL, AND ENTER DATE
INSERTED AND INITIALS.
REV / REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV / REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

ED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED ED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED
0/1 4 Apr 89 None
0/2 4 Apr 90 None
0/3 29 Apr 91 None
0/4 6 Jan 92 None
0/5 5 May 93 See Table 1-6
0/6 15 Jun 95 See Table 1-6

section I
general information
1.1 INTRODUCTION Comm/Nav/Pulse System Installation Manual for

a listing of the various CTL-92/92A, RTU-870A/T
This publication provides all the specifications, and other controls available for use with the TDR-
principles of operation, and information necessary 94/94D. The TDR-94D Transponder is a Diversity
to test and troubleshoot the TDR-94 and TDR-94D version; i.e., it is capable of transmitting and re-
Mode S Transponder System in the airplane. The ceiving on either of two antennas. The TDR-94 is
information includes a bench testing procedure to a non-diversity model. The TDR-94D is fully
verify the performance capability before installa- compatible with TCAS II system installations re-
tion of a new or newly repaired transponder. quiring antenna diversity. Either of two antenna
Refer to table 1-1 for a list of equipment covered types can be used with the TDR-94/94D as shown
in this manual and table 1-2 for the TDR-94/94D in table 1-1.
1.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT
The TDR-94/94D is an integral part of the Air

Traffic Control Radar Beacon System (ATCRBS).
The TDR-94/94D operates in mode A by respond-
ing to normal beacon radar interrogations. This
mode provides identification of transponder-
equipped airplanes on the ground controllers plan
position indication (PPI). If the installation is
equipped with a compatible altitude encoder, it
can operate in mode C and provide altitude data
long with the normal reply. In the mode S
scheme, each airplane is assigned a unique identi-
fication code which allows automatic and unique
TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder interrogation and display of a specific airplane.
Figure 1-1 The airplane identification is assigned at installa-
specifications. Table 1-3 is a listing of environ- tion and is based on the identification (tail) num-
mental requirements for DO-160B. Table 1-4 is a ber. The unique identifier is required in TCAS
listing of publications related to the TDR-94/94D. operation. In addition, the TDR-94/94D can re-
Table 1-6 is a listing of Service Bulletins and Ser- ceive and send data link messages that are re-
vice Information Letters that have been released quired for ATC automation. The added data link
up to the date of this manual edition. Figure 1-1 capability allows the transponder to perform addi-
is an overall view of the TDR-94/94D. tional air traffic control and airplane separation
assurance (ASA) functions.
1.1.1 General Description
1.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BUT NOT SUP-
The TDR-94/94D Transponder is a solid-state, PLIED
airborne, air traffic control (ATC) transponder.
The TDR-94 or TDR-94D Transponder is normally Table 1-4 lists the equipment required for proper
mounted in a MMT-150 Modular Mounting Tray operation of the TDR-94/94D but is not supplied
and controlled by an ATC control like the the with the unit. Equivalent equipment may be sub-
CTL-92/92A Control. Refer to the Pro Line II stituted.
5/5/1993 1-1
general information 523-0775653
1.4 RELATED PUBLICATIONS
Table 1-5 lists publications related to TDR-94/94D

operation.
Table 1-1. Equipment Covered.
COLLINS DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER

EQUIPMENT
TDR-94 Mode A, C, and S ATC Transponder 622-9352-003
ANT-42 L-band antenna for transponder or DME. Uses ac signal coupling to radiating. 622-6591-001
element.
MMT-150 Mounting Tray for TDR-94/94D 622-9672-003
FOR INSTALLATIONS USING CSDB TUNING
CTL-92 Pro Line II, ATC Control (uses CSDB data format). Refer to Pro Line II 622-6523-XXX
Comm/NAV/Pulse Installation Manual for available options.
CTL-92T Transponder and TCAS Control, used in conjunction with CTL-92/92A to add TCAS 622-9614-XXX
control functions. Refer to TCAS-94 Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System
Installation Manual for available options.
FOR INSTALLATIONS USING ARINC 429 TUNING
RTU-870A Remote Tuning Unit, gives centralized control and display of the frequency/ATC 622-9346-XXX
code and modes of the Collins -4XX series of General Aviation equipment. Refer to
Pro Line II Comm/NAV/Pulse Installation Manual for available options.
RTU-870T Remote Tuning Unit, same as RTU-870A except includes TCAS control capability. 622-9856-XXX
Refer to Pro Line II Comm/NAV/Pulse Installation Manual for available options.
ALTERNATE MODELS AVAILABLE
TDR-94D Same as TDR-94 except with diversity capability 622-9210-003
TDR-94 Same as TDR-94 -003 except without TCAS compatibility features. Can be used in 622-9352-002
installations without TCAS and where diversity is not required.
TDR-94D Same as TDR-94D -003 except without TCAS compatibility features. Can be used 622-9210-002
in installations without TCAS and where diversity is needed.
TDR-94/94D This model is no longer supported. All existing -001 units should be upgraded to at 622-9352-001
least -002. 622-9210-001
CTL-92A Same as CTL-92 except with enhanced display capability Refer to Pro Line II 622-8740-XXX
Comm/NAV/Pulse Installation Manual for available options.
237Z-1 Similar to ANT-42 except uses dc coupling to radiating element. 522-2632-001
TTC-920G Transponder/TCAS Control. Dedicated control for TCAS and Mode S Transponder. 822-0078-XXX
Refer to TCAS-94 Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System Installation Manual
for available options.
5/5/1993 1-2
ROCKWELL COLLINS
INSTRUCTION BOOK
TDR-94/94D, PART NO 622-9352/622-9210
TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S Transponder System

INSTRUCTION BOOK (523-0775652, 7TH EDITION, DATED JUN 15/95)
TEMPORARY REVISION NO. 02

Insert facing page 1-2.
Subject: Elementary Surveillance (Flight ID) Installation Guidelines
Flight ID capability is one of the functions required by Elementary (Basic) Surveillance. Elementary
Surveillance is a subset of Enhanced Surveillance. The -007 version of the TDR-95/94D supports
both Elementary and Enhanced Surveillance requirements. Details of the requirements for
Enhanced Surveillance will be covered in a future Service Information Letter. Existing versions of
the TDR-94/94D can be updated to Elementary/Enhanced Surveillance functionality as shown
below.
SERVIE BULLETINS
UNIT PRIOR PART NUMBER NEW PART NUMBER*
REQUIRED
TDR-94 622-9352-003 13, 501 622-9352-007
TDR-94D 622-9210-003 13, 501 622-9352-007
*The new TDR-94/94D part numbers (-007 status) are covered in associated TDR-94/94D component
maintenance manual (523-0778502). Refer to the Pro Line II Installation Manual (523-0772719) for TDR-
94/94D installation requirements, and to TDR-94/94D SIL 1-02 for additional system operation and
aircraft installation information.
If converting a TDR-94/94D -003 status, additional wiring changes will be required. Refer to SIL
1-96 on the TDR-94/94D for additional information on the applicable changes.
Temporary Revision 2 Page 1 of 1

523-0775652-02711A Nov 25/02
Table 1-2. Equipment Specifications.
CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION
Certification
TSO
FAA TSO-C112, class 2A
RTCA D0-181, D0-144
Software DO-178A, level 2
EUROCAE ED-12A
Deutsche Bundespost A44652010

FTZ
ICAO Annex 10
Environmental
FAA DO-160B, refer to table 1-3 for additional information
EUROCAE ED-12A
Physical
Size
Height 84.6 mm (3.33 in)
Width 124.5 mm (4.90 in)
Length 317.5 mm (12.50 in)
Weight 3.6 kg (8.5 lb)
Mounting MMT-150; 1/2 ATR, short, dwarf ( Refer to Pro Line II Comm/NAV/Pulse Installation
Manual for additional information.)
Mating Connector Thinline II, qty 2, 60-pin (Kits: CPN: 628-8661-001/002 or 628-8660-001/002) ( Refer to Pro
Line II Comm/NAV/Pulse Installation Manual for additional information.)
Time between overhaul On condition of failure or as required by Federal Regulations (see below)
Regulatory requirement for FAR 91.413 ATC TRANSPONDER TESTS AND INSPECTIONS.
flightline test "(a) No person may use an ATC transponder that is specified in Part 125 91.24 (a),
121.345, 127.123 (b), or 135.143 (c) of this chapter unless, within the preceding 24
calendar months, that ATC transponder has been tested and inspected and found to comply
with Appendix F of Part 43 of this chapter; and following any installation or maintenance on
an ATC transponder where data correspondence error could be introduced, the integrated
system has been tested, inspected, and found to comply with paragraph Appendix E of Part
43 of this chapter."
Power requirements 27.5 2.5 V dc at 28 watts nominal, 30 watts maximum
Transmitter
Frequency 1090 MHz, 1 MHz
Power output 250 watts min, 625 watts maximum
Load impedance 50 nominal
VSWR 1.5:1 service max., 3:1 survival
5/5/1993 1-3
Table 1-2. Equipment Specifications. (contd)
Receiver
Frequency 1030 MHz nominal
IF 60 MHz
Sensitivity -77 dBm 3 dBm
Reply modes ATCRBS mode A

ATCRBS mode C
ATCRBS mode A/Mode S All Call
ATCRBS mode C/Mode S All Call
ATCRBS mode A only All Call
ATCRBS mode C only All Call
Mode S, short (56-bit)
Mode S, long (112-bit)
Reply rate
ATCRBS 500 15-pulse replies/sec

1200 15-pulse replies in 100 ms
Mode S 34 short and 16 long replies in 1 sec

12 short and 6 long replies in 100 ms
4 short and 4 long replies in 25 ms
2 short and 2 long in 1.6 ms
ATCRBS side lobe suppression
Max of 10%l replies and sls P1 pulse is MTL + 3 dB to -21 dBm and
initiated P2 equal to or greater than P1
Max of 10% replies and sls P1 pulse is MTL to MTL + 3 dB and

may be initiated P2 equal to or greater than P1
Minimum of 90% replies P1 pulse is MTL +3 dB to -21 dBm, and

and no sls P1 pulse is min 9 dB greater than P2
No P2 pulse occurs at 2.0 0.7 s after leading edge of P1, or

P2 pulse duration is less than 0.3 s
Mode S side lobe suppression Max of 10%
Electrical
Primary power (P1-58) 27.5, 2.5, V dc (+), 28 watts nominal, 100 watts peak
Primary power common 27.5 V dc (-)

(P1-60)
5/5/1993 1-4
Data bus:
CSDB
Structure 8-bits/byte, 6-bytes/block
Rate 12.5 Baud, 10-block/sec nominal, 18 max
Data blocks (all labels are in hexadecimal form)

A5: sync; input
A0: altitude data; input
1E: ATC code/altitude; input or output
1F: ATC data; output
F3: diagnostic data; output
ARINC 429
Structure 8-bits/byte, 4-bytes/word
Rate 5-words/sec min
Data labels (all labels are in octal form)

*013: TDR and TCAS control; input/output
*015: Altitude select limits, input/output
*016: Mode S control; input/output
*031: ATC Transponder Control, input/output
*200: Gillham altitude encoder data; input/output
*203: TDR altitude data to TCAS; input/output
204: TDR corrected barometric altitude to TCAS; output
272: TCAS coordination data, part 1; output
273: TCAS data for downlink message formats 16, 20, 21; input
274: TCAS coordination data, part 2; output
274: TCAS data for downlink message formats 0 and 16; input
275: TCAS control, part 1; output
275: TCAS acknowledge; input
276: TCAS control, part 2; output
277: TCAS acknowledge; input
277: Diagnostic data request; input
350: Maintenance data; output
371: Equipment ident; output
* These labels are normally echoed, and/or passed through to the TCAS, as received
except for the SSM which may be different depending on the state of the transponder.
Tuning inputs Monitored only if Burst Mode (P2-59) is not selected; i.e., P2-59 is open
P2-31 CSDB, A
P2-32 CSDB, B
P2-17 ARINC 429, A (tune input port A)

P2-18 ARINC 429, B (tune input port A)
P2-13 ARINC 429, A (tune input port B)

P2-14 ARINC 429, B (tune input port B)
P2-21 ARINC 429, A (tune input port C)

P2-22 ARINC 429, B (tune input port C)
Altitude inputs
P2-33 CSDB, A (altitude input port A)

P2-34 CSDB, B (altitude input port A)
P2-35 CSDB, A (altitude input port B)

P3-36 CSDB, B (altitude input port B)
5/5/1993 1-5
Input/Output
Altitude inputs (contd)
P2-25 ARINC 429/575, A (altitude input port A)

P2-26 ARINC 429/575, B (altitude input port A)
P2-29 ARINC 429/575, A (altitude input port B)

P2-30 ARINC 429/575, B (altitude input port B)
Data outputs
P2-23 CSDB, A (Bus 1)

P2-24 CSDB, B (Bus 1)
P2-27 CSDB, A (Bus 2)

P2-28 CSDB, B (Bus 2)
P2-15 ARINC 429, A (Port A)

P2-16 ARINC 429, B (Port A)
P2-19 ARINC 429, A (Port B)

P2-20 ARINC 429, B (Port B)
Peripheral data
P2-1 ARINC 429, A (Comm A/B input)

P2-2 ARINC 429, B (Comm A/B input)
P2-3 ARINC 429, A (Comm A/B output)

P2-4 ARINC 429, B (Comm A/B output)
P2-5 ARINC 429, A (Comm C/D input)

P2-6 ARINC 429, B (Comm C/D input)
P2-7 ARINC 429, A (Comm C/D output)

P2-8 ARINC 429, B (Comm C/D output)
P2-9 ARINC 429, A (TCAS coord data input)

P2-10 ARINC 429, B (TCAS coord data input)
P2-11 ARINC 429, A (TCAS coord data output)

P2-12 ARINC 429, B (TCAS coord data output)
Discrete inputs
P1-1 B4, ARINC 572 altitude input

P1-4 A4, ARINC 572 altitude input
P1-7 D4, ARINC 572 altitude input
P1-8 D2, ARINC 572 altitude input
P1-9 C4, ARINC 572 altitude input
P1-12 Common, ARINC 572 altitude input
Mode S address discretes
P1-32 Common
P1-33 B1
P1-34 B2
6/15/1995 1-6
Input/Output (continued)
Mode S address discretes

(contd)
P1-35 B3
P1-36 B4
P1-37 B5
P1-38 B6
P1-39 B7
P1-40 B8
P1-41 B9
P1-42 B10
P1-43 B11
P1-44 B12
P1-45 B13
P1-46 B14
P1-47 B15
P1-48 B16
P1-49 B17
P1-50 B18
P1-51 B19
P1-52 B20
P1-53 B21
P1-54 B22
P1-55 B23
P1-56 B24
Single discrete straps
P2-51 Antenna, dual/single select (gnd = single)
P2-56 CSDB/ARINC 429 control select (gnd = CSDB)
P2-60 ADLP installed (gnd = ADLP included in installation)
P1-13 TCAS installed (gnd = TCAS included in installation)

Note: There is no provision for TCAS control in CSDB. Therefore, the TDR-94D will
not report TCAS capability in its replies to interrogations when CSDB is enabled (P2-56
grounded) even if TCAS is selected (P1-13 grounded) and dual antenna enabled (P2-51
open).
Discrete I/O
P2-55 Standby discrete (gnd = in standby)
P1-28 (-003) Automatic altitude select (gnd = auto alt select enabled)
P1-14 Control Altitude Select (See Combination Discretes below) (gnd = port A altitude data
supplied on control port, port B same as open), (open = ports A and B altitude selectable via
altitude type select discretes, P2-41/42)
P2-53 Air/ground discrete (gnd = WOW)
P2-48 Reporting altitude port select (gnd = port B)
P2-59 Burst tune enable (gnd = burst)

Note: In Burst Tune mode the control port strapping (P2-57/58) is ignored. Burst tune
data is accepted on ports A, B, and C as 30 ARINC-429 words spaced over an interval
of 1.5 seconds with 500 msec dwell time on each port and the dwell time suspended
when data is present. Continuous data is always accepted if available.
6/15/1995 1-7
Discrete I/O (continued)
P1-15 Cross-side input (connected to opposite TDR P1-30, gnd input = command to standby)
P1-30 Cross-side output (connected to opposite TDR P1-15, gnd output = active mode)
(These connections are used in dual burst-tune TDR installations to ensure that only one
transponder is operating at a time)
P1-31 Fault monitor output (28 V dc = valid, 200 mA max)
P1-29 Suppression input/output (connected to all other L-band equipment)
P1-16 (-003) SPI (remote ident) input
Maintenance specific:
P2-38 Self-test inhibit (gnd = inhibited) (for maintenance purposes only)
P2-54 Self-test discrete (gnd = self-test on) (for bench test/maintenance purposes only)
Combination discrete
straps
P2-41, P2-42, and P1-14 P2-41 P2-42 Altitude Type Selected

P1-14
open gnd gnd ARINC 429 on ARINC ports A and B
open open gnd CSDB on CSDB ports A and B
open gnd open ARINC 575 on ARINC ports A and B
open open open ARINC 572 (Gillham) on the Gillham parallel port
gnd gnd gnd Port A altitude on the selected control bus (either ARINC 429 or
CSDB) and port B altitude type ARINC 429 on ARINC port B.
gnd open gnd Port A altitude on the selected control bus (either ARINC 429 or
CSBB) and port B altitude type CSDB on CSDB port B.
gnd gnd open Port A altitude on the selected control bus (either ARINC 429 or
CSDB) and port B altitude type ARINC 575 on ARINC port B.
gnd open open Port A altitude on the selected control bus (either ARINC 429
or CSDB) and port B altitude type Gillham on the Gillham
parallel port.
P2-43, P2-44, P2-45 Max airspeed programming (gnd to P2-49)

P2-43 P2-44 P2-45 Definition
open open open none selected
gnd open open 0 to 75 knots
open gnd open 75 to 150 knots
gnd gnd open 150 to 300 knots
open open gnd 300 to 600 knots
gnd open gnd 600 to 1200 knots
open gnd gnd more than 1200 knots
gnd gnd gnd (not defined)
P2-46, P2-47 SDI input (gnd to P2-50)

P2-46 P2-47 Definition
open open (not used)
open gnd side 1
gnd open side 2
gnd gnd (not used)
6/15/1995 1-8
Discrete I/O (continued)
Combination discrete
straps (continued)
P2-57, P2-58 Control port select (gnd to P2-52)

P2-57 P2-58 Definition
gnd open Port A selected
open open Port B selected
open gnd Port C selected
gnd gnd (not defined)
Table 1-3. DO-160B Environmental Qualifications.
DO-160B
CHARACTERISTIC PARA NO QUALIFICATION LEVEL
Temperature and Altitude 4.0 Category F2:
Low Operating Temp 4.5.1 -55 C (-67 F)

High Operating Temp 4.5.3 +70 C (+158 F)
Low Storage Temp 4.5.1 -55 C (-67 F)
High Storage Temp 4.5.2 +85 C (+185 F)
Altitude 4.6.1 Category A2: Certified for installation in a controlled temperature locations where
pressures are no lower than an altitudes equivalent to 4600 m
(15 000 ft) msl.
Category E1: Certified for installation in a nonpressurized and noncontrolled tem-
perature locations in an airplane that is operated at altitudes up to 21
300 m (70 000 ft) msl.
Temperature Variation 5.0 Category B: Certified for installation in a controlled or noncontrolled temperature
location in the airplane.
Humidity 6.0 Category B: Certified for a Severe Humidity Environment - Level I.
Shock 7.0
Operational 7.2 Tested at 6 g peak
Crash Safety 7.3 Tested at 15 g (11 ms duration)
Vibration 8.0 Category J: Certified for fuselage mounting in a fixed wing turbojet or turbofan
airplane.
Category Y: Certified for fuselage mounting in a piston or turbojet rotary wing
airplane.
Explosion Proofness 9.0 Category E1: Certified for installation in a location where an explosive atmosphere
may occur as a result of leakage or spillage.
Waterproofness 10.0 Category X: No test required. Certified for installation in locations not subject to
falling water (including condensation), rain water, or sprayed water.
Fluids Susceptibility 11.0 Category X: No test required. Certified for installation in locations not exposed to
fluid contamination from fuel, hydraulic fluids, oil, solvents, etc.
Sand and Dust 12.0 Category X: No test required. Certified for installation in locations not subject to
blowing sand and dust.
Fungus Resistance 13.0 Category X: Fungus resistance test not performed.
Salt Spray 14.0 Category X: Salt spray test not performed.
6/15/1995 1-9
Table 1-3. DO-160B Environmental Qualifications.
DO-160B
CHARACTERISTIC PARA NO QUALIFICATION LEVEL
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Category Z: Unit causes a 1 deflection of an uncompensated compass at a dis-
tance less than 0.3 m (1.0 ft).
Power Input 16.0 Category Z: Certified for use on airplane electrical systems not applicable to any
other category. For example, a dc system from a variable range
generator where a small capacity or no battery is floating on the dc
bus.
Voltage Spike 17.0 Category A: Certified for installation in systems where a high degree of voltage
spike protection is required.
Audio Frequency 18.0 Category Z: Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems not applicable to any
Susceptibility other category. For example, a dc system from a variable range
generator where a small capacity or no battery is floating on the dc
bus.
Induced Signal 19.0 Category Z: Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation is
Susceptibility required.
RF Susceptibility 20.0 Category Z: Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation is
required.
Emission of RF Energy 21.0 Category Z: Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation is
required.
Lightning 22.0 Category L: Long and short wave (750 volts)

Damped sinusoidal wave (600 volts)
5/5/1993 1-10
BUSINESS AND REGIONAL SYSTEMS
INSTRUCTION BOOK
TDR-94/94D, PART NO 622-9352/622-9210
TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S Transponder System

INSTRUCTION BOOK (523-0775652, 7TH EDITION, DATED JUN 15/95)
TEMPORARY REVISION NO. 01

Insert facing page 1-11
Subject:Add BA609 Connector Kit and Mount
A new version of the MMT-150 Modular Mounting Tray and TDR-94/94D Connector Kit has been
created for BA609 aircraft installations.
MMT-150 622-9672-004 and Connector Kit 628-8660-003 are added to Table 1-4.
P/O Table 1-4. Equipment Required But Not Supplied.

EQUIPMENT TYPE OR DESCRIPTION QTY
**
MMT-150 ATR, short, dwarf mount (CPN: 622-9672-004) for BA609 installations 1
Mount
**
Connector Kit 60-pin, Thinline II connector, qty 2 each, (Kit CPN 628-8661-001/002 or 628-8660-001/002 or 628-8660-003 1-kit
for BA609 installations) (Refer to Pro Line II Installation Manual, for additional details.)
**
Refer to TDR-94/94D installation section in Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse System Installation Manual for additional mount and mating
connector information.
Temporary Revision 1 Page 1 of 1

523-0775652-01711A Aug 15/00
Table 1-4. Equipment Required But Not Supplied.
EQUIPMENT TYPE OR DESCRIPTION QTY
**MMT-150 Mount 1/2 ATR, short, dwarf mount (CPN: 622-9672-003) 1
**Connector Kit 60-pin, Thinline II connector, qty 2 each, (Kit CPN: 628-8661-001/002, or 628- 1-kit
8660-001/002) (Refer to Pro Line II Installation Manual, for additional details)
**Crimp contacts For wires with: * 105 used,

up to 0.050 in. insulation dia (372-2514-110), or 15 spares
0.050 to 0.080 in. insul dia (372-2514-180)
L-band antenna Collins ANT-42, CPN: 622-6591-001, or AR

Collins 237Z-1, CPN: 522-2632-001; qty 1 for TDR-94, qty 2 for TDR-94D
ATC Control CSDB data format:

Collins CTL-92/92A ATC Control, with Collins CTL-92T if TCAS is used,
ARINC 429 data format:
Collins RTU-870A Radio Tuning Unit, or
Collins RTU-870T TCAS/ATC Radio Tuning Unit, or
Collins TTC-920G TCAS/ATC Control, or
Gables model 816
Altitude data source Collins ADS-85 Air Data System (Refer to ADS-85 Air Data System Installation
Manual)
Air Data Link Message Processor TBA (not available at time of this publication)
Traffic Alert and Collision Avoid- Collins TCAS-94 System (Refer to TCAS-94 Installation Manual)
ance System
*Quantity required for typical installation

**Refer to installation section for additional mount and mating connector information
Table 1-5. Related Publications.
PUBLICATION ATA NUMBER COLLINS

PART NUMBER
Collins Avionics Standard Shop Practices, Instruction Manual none 523-0768039
TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S Transponder, Component Maintenance 34-50-91 523-0775997

Manual
Collins Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse System, Installation Manual none 523-0772719
TCAS-94 Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System, Installation none 523-0775833
Manual
CTL-92T TCAS Control 34-40-84 523-0776595
RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit, Component Maintenance Manual 23-80-80 523-0774068
CTL-X2/X2A Controls, Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 23-80-10 523-0772495
Collins TDR-94 Mode S Transponder, Pilots Guide none 523-0776370
5/5/1993 1-11
1.5 STORAGE 1.6 RELATED

RELATED SERVICE
SERVICE BULLETINS AND
SERVICE
SERVICE INFORMATION
INFORMATION LETTERS
The TDR-94/94D should be stored in its original
packing materials and shipping container. If the Table 1-6 is a listing of the Service Bulletins and
unit is to be stored for a long period of time, put Service Informtion Letters issued and applicable
the unit in an airtight plastic bag with sufficient to the TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder as of the
desiccant to absorb moisture. At no time should date of this manual. You will notice that many of
the ambient temperature of the storage area fall these have direct application to unit performance
below -55 C (-67 F) or rise above +85 C (+185 in the airplane. It may be helpful to review this
F). The relative humidity should never exceed 95 listing whenever there is a failure report to deter-
percent. If the unit is stored for an extended peri- mine whether a particular modification may have
od of time, retest the unit prior to returning it to application to the reported symptom. This im-
service to ensure that possible component degrada- plies, of course, that you must determine the mod-
tion has not affected performance. ification status of the unit in question.
5/5/1993 1-12
Table 1-6. Related Service Bulletins.
SERVICE BULLETIN NUMBER, TITLE AND DESCRIPTION PUBLICATION DATE
SB 1: Convert TDR-94s and TDR-94Ds to -002 status (Converts -001 to -002 status). The Rev 1: May 23, 1991
modifications in this service bulletin upgrade the TCAS interface performance. This service bulletin
adds altitude input via the control bus and improves the burst control interface.
SB 2: Improve Burst Tuning Interface, Self-Test Performance, and EMI Compatibility. Jan 18, 1991
Installation of this service bulletin protects transmitter power output transistor during self-test, corrects
burst tuning cross-side standby operation, and improves EMI compatibility.
SB 3: Prevent Corruption of Mode A/C Replies. ATC may report loss of reply or incorrect reply Jan 18, 1991
code. Several minutes to several hours may elapse before this malfunction occurs. Once precipitated,
the condition will persist until primary power is cycled.
SB 4: Prevent Occasional Loss of Transponder Function. Reception of certain combinations of Mar 5, 1991
transponder interrogations can cause the TDR-94 and TDR-94D not to reply to subsequent interroga-
tions. Once this occurs power must be cycled to restart transponder operation.
SB 5: A7U301 or A7U304 Replacement. In some units, when A7U301 or A7U304 are replaced, one Rev 1: Jun 10, 1993
or both channels may fail the DPSK related test. This service bulletin should be installed when
replacing IC A7U301 or A7U304.
SB 6: Convert TDR-94s and TDR-94Ds to -003 Status (Converts -002 status to -003 status). Rev 2: Sep 22, 1992
Installation of this service bulletin updates the TDR-94/94D to include changes to the Mode S tran-
sponder requirements by RTCA. Installation configuration options are expanded and enhancements to
its diagnostic and maintenance performance is implemented.
SB 7: A6U105 or A6U120 PROM Replacement. If A6U105, on the -002/102 Video Processor Card or Rev 1: Sep 17, 1992
A6U120 on the -003/103 Video Processor Card, requires replacement, the new PROM may exhibit
different parameters which affect the performance of the transponder. If this service is not installed
when changing A6U105 or A6U120, the transponder may not reply to interrogations. This service
bulletin compensates for the parameter changes.
SB 8: Replacement of A7U500 or A7U502. The current IC U500 (circuit card assembly A7, CPN Rev 1: Sep 22, 1992
687-0727-002/102) or U502 (circuit card assembly A7, CPN 687-0727-001/101) has exhibited some cold
start problems. The new U500 or U502 performs better over temperature but requires some changes to
accommodate the new IC. This service bulletin should be installed only if U500 or U502 requires
replacement.
SB 9: Prevent Possible Intermittent Operation. A rare combination of events can cause the TDR- Rev 3: Apr 22, 1993
94/94D to be intermittent. If a specific memory location is corrupted and the unit tries to report a
diagnostic, intermittent operation can occur.
SB 10: Improve Operation of Remote Ident Input. In aircraft which utilize the remote ident input Oct 2, 1992
(P1-16), the active transponder may squawk ident if power is removed from the inactive transponder.
SB 11: Improve Power-On Initialization. To ensure that the TDR-94/94D powers up in less than Feb 5, 1993
two seconds and initializes the air/ground Mode S status to the correct reporting position.
SB 12: Add Diode Isolation to Strap Inputs. In aircraft which parallel the CSDB and ARINC 429 Aug 2, 1993
Control select and Burst Enable inputs to other systems, removal of transponder power may cause
unrequested activation of the function in another system.
SB A: Same as SB 3. Dec 11, 1990
SB B: Improve Start-Up Compatibility With The Gulfstream G-IV Gables 6969 TCAS Control Sep 29, 1992
Adapter. Installations utilizing the Gables 6969 TCAS control adapter may power up in the standby
mode regardless of the mode the system was powered down in.
SIL A-90: Connector Plate Inspection (CPN 629-8657-001/002. Some connector plates used with Oct 22, 1990
the TDR-94/94D mounting rack may exhibit one or more discrepancies. This connector plate is available
individually and is included as part of connector kits, CPN 628-8660-001/002 and CPN 628-8661-
001/002. All connector plates "REV A" through "REV C" that do not have "A-90" marked on them
should be inspected and adjusted if found discrepant. Connector plates "REV D" or later are inspected
during manufacture.
5/5/1993 1-13
523-0775655-103118
3rd Edition, 29 April 1991
1st Revision, 15 June 1995
TDR-94/94D
ATC/Mode S
Transponder System
Operation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
3.1 TDR-94/94D TRANSPONDER OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.2 CTL-92/92A Control, Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2.1 Operating Instructions for Installations Using a CTL-92/92A Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.2 Equipment Turn On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.3 Code Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.4 Code Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.5 Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.6 Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.6.1 CTL-92/92A ATC Control, Diagnostic Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
NOTICE: This section replaces third edition dated 29 April 1991. Only the Title Page has changed in this revision.
Page Issue
*Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Jun 95
3-1 thru 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Apr 90
3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Apr 91
3-6 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Apr 89


ED NO DATE DATE / BY INCLUDED ED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED
0/1 4 Apr 89 None
0/2 4 Apr 90 None
0/3 29 Apr 91 None

VHFWLRQ ,,
RSHUDWLRQ
7'5'75$16321'(523(5$7,1* 23(5$7,1*,16758&7,21
,16758&7,216
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQVIRU,QVWDOODWLRQV8V
,QWURGXFWLRQ
LQJD&7/$&RQWURO
7KH 7'5' LV DQ LQWHJUDO SDUW RI WKH $LU 7UDIILF
&RQWURO 5DGDU %HDFRQ 6\VWHP ,W SURYLGHV LGHQWLILFD &DXWLRQ
WLRQ RI WKH WUDQVSRQGHU HTXLSSHG DLUFUDIW RQ WKH $7&
JURXQGFRQWUROOHUVSODQSRVLWLRQLQGLFDWRU,QLQVWDOOD 7KH 7'5' DQG WKH &7/$ KDYH
WLRQV HTXLSSHG ZLWK DQ DOWLWXGH HQFRGHU WKH 7'5 EHHQGHVLJQHGWRH[KLELWDYHU\KLJKGHJUHHRI
'SURYLGHVWKHFRQWUROOHUZLWKDLUFUDIWSUHVVXUHDO IXQFWLRQDO LQWHJULW\ 1HYHUWKHOHVV WKH XVHU
WLWXGH PXVWUHFRJQL]HWKDWLWLVQRWSUDFWLFDOWRSURYLGH
PRQLWRULQJ IRU DOO FRQFHLYDEOH V\VWHP IDLOXUHV
7KH7'5'FDQRSHUDWHLQPRGH6DQGSURYLGHD DQGKRZHYHUXQOLNHO\LWLVSRVVLEOHWKDW HUUR
XQLTXH DLUFUDIW LGHQWLILFDWLRQ FRGH DV ZHOO DV DLUWRDLU QHRXVRSHUDWLRQFRXOGRFFXUZLWKRXWDIDXOWLQ
DQG DLUWRJURXQG LQWHUURJDWLRQ UHSOLHV 7KH XQLW DOVR GLFDWLRQ,WLVWKHUHVSRQVLELOLW\RIWKHSLORWWR
KDVGDWDOLQNFDSDELOLW\ZKLFKDOORZVLWWRSHUIRUPDGGL GHWHFW VXFK DQ RFFXUUHQFH E\ PRQLWRULQJ DLU
WLRQDO DLU WUDIILF FRQWURO DQG DLU VHSDUDWLRQ DVVXUDQFH WUDIILFFRQWUROUHVSRQVHVWRVHOHFWHGFRGHV
IXQFWLRQV
7KH RSHUDWLQJ LQVWUXFWLRQV IRU V\VWHP XVLQJ D &7/
7KH7'5'LVFRQWUROOHGYLDHLWKHU&6'%DVIURP $FRQWURODUHJLYHQLQWKHIROORZLQJSDUDJUDSKV
D&7/$FRQWUROILJXUHRU$5,1&DVIURP
(TXLSPHQW7XUQ2Q
DFRPSDWLEOH$5,1*FRQWUROXQLW7KLVSDUDJUDSK
GRHV QRW SURYLGH RSHUDWLQJ LQVWUXFWLRQ IRU DQ $5,1&
FRQWUROXQLW 7KH7'5'WUDQVSRQGHUDQGWKH&7/$FRQ
WURO DUH WXUQHG RQ HLWKHU E\ URWDWLQJ WKH SRZHU DQG
,Q QRUPDO PRGH $ RU PRGH & RSHUDWLRQ WKH 7'5 PRGH VZLWFK RQ WKH IURQW RI WKH FRQWURO WR WKH 67%<
' LV LQWHUURJDWHG E\ UDGDU SXOVHV IURP D JURXQG 21RU$/7SRVLWLRQRQWKRVHFRQWUROVWKDWKDYHWKHRS
VWDWLRQDQGUHSOLHVDXWRPDWLFDOO\ZLWKDVHULHVRISXOVHV WLRQDO2))SRVLWLRQRUE\WXUQLQJRQWKHDYLRQLFVPDV
7KHVHUHSO\SXOVHJURXSLQJVDUHGHFRGHGWRVXSSO\LGHQ WHUVZLWFKIRUWKRVHFRQWUROVWKDWGRQRWKDYHDQ2))
WLILFDWLRQDQDOWLWXGHGDWD SRVLWLRQ
,QPRGH6RSHUDWLRQWKHXQLWLVLQWHUURJDWHGE\UDGDU $IWHU SRZHU LV DSSOLHG WKH &7/$ GLVSOD\V WKH

SXOVHVHLWKHUIURPDJURXQGUDGDURUIURPDQRWKHUDLU VDPHDFWLYHFRGHWKDWZDVSUHVHQWZKHQWKHHTXLSPHQW
FUDIW ,W UHSOLHV WR WKHVH LQWHUURJDWLRQV ZLWK VLPLODU ZDVODVWWXUQHGRII
SXOVHUHSO\FRGHVZKLFKJLYHDOWLWXGHDQGDLUFUDIWLGHQWL
&RGH6HOHFWLRQ
ILFDWLRQ
&7/$&RQWURO&RQWUROVDQG,QGLFD &RGH VHOHFWLRQ LV PDGH XVLQJ HLWKHU WKH FRGH VHOHFW

WRUV NQREV RU D UHPRWH WXQLQJ LQSXW IURP DQRWKHU V\VWHP
1&6 )06 HWF 2Q WKRVH FRQWUROV ZLWK D VHOHFW
5HIHUWRILJXUHIRUDYLHZRIWKH&7/$FRQWUROV VZLWFKVHWWKHVZLWFKWRHLWKHUQXPEHURUQXPEHU
DQG LQGLFDWRUV 7DEOH JLYHV D GHVFULSWLRQ RI HDFK WUDQVSRQGHUWRVHOHFWWKHDFWLYHWUDQVSRQGHU7KHRWKHU
FRQWURO3DUDJUDSKJLYHVWKHRSHUDWLQJ WUDQVSRQGHUUHPDLQVLQVWDQGE\XQWLOLWLVVHOHFWHGZLWK
SURFHGXUHVIRUWKH&7/$ WKH VHOHFW VZLWFK
5HYLVHG$SULO
RSHUDWLRQ
&7/$&RQWURO&RQWUROVDQG,QGLFDWRUV
)LJXUH
5HYLVHG$SULO
RSHUDWLRQ
7DEOH&7/$&RQWURO&RQWUROVDQG,QGLFDWRUV
&21752/25 )81&7,21'(6&5,37,21
,1',&$725
8SSHUGLVSOD\ZLQGRZ 7KH$7&FRGHWKHUHSO\FRGHRIWKHDFWLYH7'5'DQGGLDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHVDUHGLVSOD\HG
LQ WKH XSSHU GLVSOD\ ZLQGRZ 'XULQJ QRUPDO RSHUDWLRQ RQO\ WKH XSSHU ZLQGRZ LV XVHG 7KLV
ZLQGRZGLVSOD\VWKHWUDQVSRQGHUFRGH6HHVHOIWHVWGLVSOD\
/RZHUGLVSOD\ZLQGRZ 7KH ORZHU GLVSOD\ ZLQGRZ LV QRUPDOO\ EODQN DQG LV DFWLYH RQO\ GXULQJ VHOIWHVW 6HH VHOIWHVW
GLVSOD\V
&RPSDUHDQQXQFLDWRU $&7 PRPHQWDULO\ LOOXPLQDWHV ZKHQ FRGHV DUH EHLQJ FKDQJHG ,I $&7 IODVKHV WKH DFWXDO UHSO\
FRGHLVQRWLGHQWLFDOWRWKHFRGHVKRZQLQWKHDFWLYHFRGHGLVSOD\
$QQXQFLDWRUV 7KH $7& FRQWURO FRQWDLQV DQ 507 UHPRWH DQQXQFLDWRU DQG D 7; WUDQVPLW DQQXQFLDWRU
7KH507DQQXQFLDWRUPD\RUPD\QRWLOOXPLQDWHGHSHQGLQJRQWKHLQVWDOODWLRQ,IVWUDSSHG
IRU LOOXPLQDWLRQ LW ZLOO LOOXPLQDWH ZKHQ DQ H[WHUQDO VZLWFK /2&$/5(027( RU VLPLODU LV
LQWKH5(027(SRVLWLRQ7KLVLQGLFDWHVWKDWWKHWUDQVSRQGHULVEHLQJFRQWUROOHGE\DQRWKHU
FRQWUROXQLWJUD\FRGHIRUPDWIRUH[DPSOH'DVKHVZLOODSSHDULQWKHORZHUZLQGRZDQGDOO
RI WKH FRQWUROV RQ WKH &7/$ DUH GLVDEOHG 7KH FRGH GLVSOD\HG LQ WKH XSSHU ZLQGRZ LV
WKHFXUUHQWDFWLYHFRGHEHLQJVHQWE\WKHUHPRWHVRXUFHWRWKH&7/$FRQWURO7KH507
DQQXQFLDWRU ZLOO QRW LOOXPLQDWH ZKHQ WKH WUDQVSRQGHU LV EHLQJ FRQWUROOHG E\ DQ )06 RU
VLPLODU IOLJKW PDQDJHPHQW V\VWHP $Q )06 VLPSO\ FRQWUROV WKH &7/$ MXVW OLNH WKH
&2'(VHOHFWNQREVGRDQGWKH&7/$WKHQFRQWUROVWKHWUDQVSRQGHU$OOFRQWUROVRQWKH
&7/$UHPDLQRSHUDWLRQDOZKHQDQ)06LVEHLQJXVHGWRFRQWUROWKHWUDQVSRQGHU7KH
7;DQQXQFLDWRULOOXPLQDWHVZKHQWKH7'5'UHSOLHVWRDQLQWHUURJDWLRQ
3RZHUDQGPRGHVZLWFK 7KH$7&FRQWUROSRZHURSWLRQDODQGPRGHVZLWFKPD\FRQWDLQWKUHHRUIRXUGHWHQWHGSRVLWLRQV
GHSHQGLQJRQWKHFRQWURO7KHDYDLODEOHSRVLWLRQVDUH67%<21$/7DQG2))67%<21$/7
&RGHVHOHFWNQREV 7ZRFRQFHQWULFNQREVFRQWUROWKHDFWLYHFRGHGLVSOD\7KHODUJHUNQREFKDQJHVWKHWZR VLJQLIL

FDQWGLJLWVDQGWKHVPDOOHUNQREFKDQJHVWKHWZROHDVWVLJQLILFDQWGLJLWV7KHOHDVWVLJQLILFDQW
GLJLW LV LQFUHPHQWHG RU GHFUHPHQWHG IRU HDFK GHWHQW RI WKH VPDOOHU NQRZ LI WKH NQRE LV WXUQHG
VORZO\ 5DSLG URWDWLRQ RI HLWKHU NQRE ZLOO FDXVH FKDQJHV SURSRUWLRQDO WR WKH UDWH RI URWDWLRQ
5ROORYHURIWKHOHDVWVLJQLILFDQWGLJLWVZLOORFFXUDWDQGDQGZLOOFDXVHWKHPRVWVLJQLILFDQW
GLJLWVWREHLQFUHPHQWHGRUGHFUHPHQWHG7KHOHIWWZRGLJLWVDQGWKHULJKWWZRGLJLWV DUH LQGH
SHQGHQWRIHDFKRWKHU7KHYDULRXVFRGHVXVHGIRU QRUPDO RSHUDWLRQ DUH OLVWHG LQ WKH $LUPDQV
,QIRUPDWLRQ0DQXDO&RGHVRUDUHVHOHFWHGIRULQIOLJKWHPHUJHQF\RSHUDWLRQDQGZLOO
EH DQQXQFLDWHG E\ WKH FRGHV IODVKLQJ LQ WKH DFWLYH FRGH GLVSOD\ IRU D IHZ VHFRQGV EHIRUH WUDQV
PLVVLRQEHJLQVFRGHVDQGZLOOQRWIODVKLIWKHWUDQVSRQGHULVEHLQJUHPRWHO\FRQWUROOHG
E\DQ)06
35(EXWWRQ 3XVK DQG KROG WKH 35( EXWWRQ ZKLOH WXUQLQJ WKH FRGH VHOHFW NQREV WR VHOHFW D SUHVHW FRGH IRU
VWRUDJH7KHSUHVHWFRGHZLOOEHVWRUHGLQQRQYRODWLOHPHPRU\DQGFDQEHUHFDOOHGE\PRPHQWDU
LO\SUHVVLQJWKH35(EXWWRQDJDLQ
,'(17EXWWRQ 7KH ,'(17 EXWWRQ FDXVHV WKH WUDQVSRQGHU WR WUDQVPLW D VSHFLDO LGHQWLILFDWLRQ SDWWHUQ WKDW LV
GLVSOD\HGRQWKHJURXQG FRQWUROOHUV UDGDU VFRSH 7KLV EXWWRQ VKRXOG EH SUHVVHG RQO\ ZKHQ UH
TXHVWHGWRVTXDZNLGHQWE\WKHJURXQGFRQWUROOHU6RPHLQVWDOODWLRQVXVHDUHPRWHVZLWFKIRU
,'(17VHOHFWLRQ
7(67EXWWRQ 3UHVVWKH7(67EXWWRQWRLQLWLDWHWKHWUDQVSRQGHUVHOIWHVWURXWLQH,QGXDOYHUVLRQXQLWVWKH
VZLWFKGHWHUPLQHVZKLFKWUDQVSRQGHUUHVSRQGVWRWKHWHVWFRPPDQG
5HYLVHG$SULO
RSHUDWLRQ
7DEOH&7/$&RQWURO&RQWUROVDQG,QGLFDWRUV&RQW
&21752/25 )81&7,21'(6&5,37,21
,1',&$725
6HOIWHVWGLVSOD\
6LQJOHFRQWUROV
1RIDLOXUH 'XULQJVHOIWHVWWKHDFWLYHFRGHGLVSOD\LQWHQVLW\PRGXODWHVIURPPLQLPXPWRPD[LPXP,IWKH
7'5'LVIXQFWLRQLQJSURSHUO\DQGDQDOWLWXGHHQFRGHULVFRQQHFWHGDQGRSHUDWLQJ$/LV
GLVSOD\HG LQ WKH XSSHU ZLQGRZ DQG WKH DOWLWXGH LQ WKRXVDQGV RI IHHW LQ IRRW LQFUHPHQWV LV
GLVSOD\HGLQWKHORZHUZLQGRZ
)DLOXUH ,IDQRXWRIWROHUDQFHFRQGLWLRQLVGHWHFWHGWKHXSSHUZLQGRZVKRZVWKHZRUGG,$*ZKLOHWKH
ORZHUZLQGRZVKRZVDGLJLWGLDJQRVWLFFRGH
'XDOFRQWUROV
1RIDLOXUH (LWKHUWKHXSSHURUORZHUZLQGRZVZLOOUHVSRQGWKHVDPHDVWKHVLQJOHXQLWXSSHUZLQGRZGH
SHQGLQJRQZKLFKXQLWLVEHLQJWHVWHGVZLWFK
)DLOXUH 6DPHDVVLQJOHXQLWV
7KH &7/$ FRGH VHOHFW UDQJH LV IURP WR ZKHQWKHWUDQVSRQGHULVEHLQJFRQWUROOHGE\DQ)06

5RWDWLRQRIHLWKHUFRGHVHOHFWNQRZLQFUHDVHVRU RUVLPLODUV\VWHP$Q)06VLPSO\FRQWUROVWKH&7/
GHFUHDVHV WKH FRGH LQ WKH DFWLYH FRGH GLVSOD\ 7KH $LQWKHVDPHZD\DVWKHFRGHVHOHFWNQREVGR
ODUJHU RXWHU NQRE FKDQJHV WKH WZR OHIWKDQG GLJLWV DQG WKH &7/$ FRQWUROV WKH WUDQVSRQGHU $OO
7KH VPDOOHU LQQHU NQRE FKDQJHV WKH WZR ULJKWKDQG FRQWUROVRQWKH&7/$UHPDLQRSHUDWLRQDOZKHQ
GLJLWV7KH$&7DQQXQFLDWLRURQWKHFRQWUROPRPHQ DQ)06LVFRQWUROOLQJWKHWUDQVSRQGHU
WDULO\LOOXPLQDWHVZKLOHWKHWUDQVSRQGHULVUHVSRQGLQJ
WRWKHQHZFRGH &RGH6WRUDJH
$ VLQJOH SUHVHW FRGH FDQ EH VWRUHG LQ WKH QRQYRODWLOH

1RWH PHPRU\LQWKH&7/$7KLVFRGHFDQEHLQYRNHG
DWDODWHUWLPH0RVWRSHUDWRUVDUHOLNHO\WRVWRUHWKH
,IWKH$&7DQQXQFLDWRUVWDUWVIODVKLQJLWLQ 9)5FRGH7RVWRUHDFRGHLQPHPRU\SUHVVDQG
GLFDWHVWKDWWKHWUDQVSRQGHULVQRW WUDQVPLW KROGWKH35(EXWWRQZKHQVHOHFWLQJWKHFRGHXVLQJWKH
WLQJWKHFRGHGLVSOD\HGLQWKHDFWLYHFRGHGLV FRGH VHOHFW NQREV 7KH SUHVHW FRGH FDQ EH UHFDOOHG
SOD\ IURP PHPRU\ DQG PDGH DFWLYH E\ PRPHQWDULO\
SUHVVLQJWKH35(EXWWRQDJDLQ
:KHQWKH7'5'LVEHLQJUHPRWHO\FRQWUROOHG
WKH 507 DQQXQFLDWRU PD\ RU PD\ QRW LOOXPLQDWH $IWHUDFRGHKDVEHHQVWRUHGLQPHPRU\LWZLOOUHPDLQ
GHSHQGLQJRQWKHLQVWDOODWLRQ,IZLUHGLWZLOOLOOXPL WKHUHXQWLOFKDQJHGE\XVLQJWKH35(EXWWRQ
QDWHZKHQDQH[WHUQDOVZLWFK/2&$/5(027(RU
VLPLODULVLQWKH5(027(SRVLWLRQ7KLVLQGLFDWHV 0HPRU\LVUHWDLQHGHYHQZKHQWKHXQLWLVWXUQHGRII
WKDW WKH WUDQVSRQGHU LV EHLQJ FRQWUROOHG E\ DQRWKHU IRUDQH[WHQGHGSHULRGRIWLPH
FRQWURO XQLW GLVFUHWH $5,1& IRU H[DPSOH
'DVKHV DSSHDU LQ WKH ORZHU ZLQGRZ DQG DOO RI WKH 1RUPDO2SHUDWLRQ
FRQWUROV RQ WKH &7/$ DUH LQRSHUDWLYH XQWLO
/2&$/FRQWUROLVUHVHOHFWHG7KHFRGHGLVSOD\HGLQ 1RUPDORSHUDWLRQRIWKHWUDQVSRQGHULQYROYHVWKHIRO
WKHXSSHUZLQGRZLVWKHFXUUHQWO\VHOHFWHGUHSO\FRGH ORZLQJSURFHGXUHV
IRU WKH 7'5' DQG LW LV VWRUHG LQ QRQYRODWLOH
PHPRU\7KH507DQQXQFLDWRUZLOOQRWLOOXPLQDWH
5HYLVHG$SULO
RSHUDWLRQ
D (QVXUHWKDWDOODSSOLFDEOHFLUFXLWEUHDNHUVDUH WUDQVPLVVLRQ EHJLQV 7KLV IODVKLQJ ZLOO

HQJDJHGDQGWKHDYLRQLFVPDVWHUVZLWFKLVRQ QRW RFFXU LI WKH WUDQVSRQGHU LV EHLQJ FRQ
E 6HWWKHPRGHVZLWFKWR67%<67%<VKRXOGEH WUROOHG E\ D UHPRWH VRXUFH VXFK DV DQ
XVHGRQO\GXULQJJURXQGPRYHPHQWDQGZKHQ )06 $Q\ VHOHFWHG FRGH LV LPPHGLDWHO\
UHTXHVWHGE\$7& DSSOLHG WR WKH WUDQVSRQGHU ZKHQ WKH
F ,IWKH&7/$KDVDVHOHFWVZLWFKGXDO ,'(17EXWWRQLVSUHVVHG
WUDQVSRQGHULQVWDOODWLRQVSRVLWLRQLWWRVHOHFW
WKHGHVLUHGWUDQVSRQGHU I ,I UHTXHVWHG WR VTXDZN LGHQW SUHVV DQG UH
G 8VHWKHFRGHVHOHFWNQREVWRVHOHFWWKHGHVLUHG OHDVH WKH ,'(17 EXWWRQ 7KH OHWWHUV LG DS
FRGH SHDU LQ WKH ORZHU ZLQGRZ IRU DSSUR[LPDWHO\
H 3RVLWLRQ WKH PRGH VZLWFK WR WKH $/7 RU 21 VHFRQGV
SRVLWLRQMXVWEHIRUHEHJLQQLQJWDNHRII7KH7;
DQQXQFLDWRU LOOXPLQDWHV HDFK WLPH WKH 6HOI7HVW
WUDQVSRQGHUUHSOLHVWRDQ$7&LQWHUURJDWLRQ
3RVLWLRQWKHPRGHVZLWFKWR21DQGVHWWKHVZLWFK
WR 6HW WKH GHVLUHG FRGH XVLQJ WKH FRGH VHOHFW
1RWH NQREV 3UHVV WKH 7(67 EXWWRQ RQ WKH &7/$
5HIHUWRVHOIWHVWGLVSOD\GHVFULSWLRQLQWDEOH
7KH&7/$SURYLGHVDWRVHFRQG
GHOD\IURPWKHWLPHDFRGHLVFKDQJHGXQ &7/$$7&&RQWURO'LDJQRVWLF
WLOWKHQHZFRGHLVVHQWWRWKHWUDQVSRQGHU &RGHV
7KLV JLYHV WKH RSHUDWRU WLPH WR FKHFN WKH
FRGH DQG WKXV SUHYHQW WUDQVPLVVLRQ RI D &HUWDLQGLDJQRVWLFFRGHVDUHGLVSOD\HGLQWKHVHOI
SDUWLDOO\ FKDQJHG RU LQFRUUHFW FRGH ,Q WHVWPRGH,IDGLDJQRVWLFFRQGLWLRQLVGHWHFWHGLQWKH
DGGLWLRQZKHQHPHUJHQF\FRGHVDQG 7'5'GXULQJVHOIWHVWWKHXSSHUZLQGRZGLV
DUHILUVWVHOHFWHGRQWKH&7/$ SOD\V WKH ZRUG G,$* ZKLOH WKH ORZHU ZLQGRZ GLV
WKH FRGHV IODVK IRU D IHZ VHFRQGV EHIRUH SOD\V WKH GLJLW GLDJQRVWLF FRGH
5HYLVHG$SULO EODQN
523-0775656-102118
2nd Edition, 4 April 1990
1st Revision, 15 June 1995
TDR-94/94D
ATC/Mode S
Transponder System
Theory of Operation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
4.1 TDR-94/94D Transponder System theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Purpose of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3 Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3.2 Radar Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3.3 ATCRBS Interrogation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.3.4 SSR Radiation Patterns and SLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.3.5 ATC Transponder 4096 Replies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.4 ATCRBS and Mode S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

4.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.4.2 Mode S Interrogation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.4.3 Mode S SSR Radiation Pattern and SLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.4.4 Mode S Transponder Replies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.5 TDR-94/94D Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

4.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.5.2 Installation Strapping Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.5.3 Typical Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.5.4 TDR-94/94D Block Diagram Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
NOTICE: This section replaces second edition dated 4 April 1990. Only the Title Page has changed in this revision.
Page Issue
*Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Jun 95
List of Effective pages . . . . . . . 4 Apr 90
4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Apr 90
4-2 thru 4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Apr 90
4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Apr 89
4-6 thru 4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Apr 90
4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Apr 89
4-10 thur 4-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Apr 90
4-19 thru 4-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Apr 90


0/1 4 Apr 89 None
0/2 4 Apr 90 None

section IV
theory of operation
4.1 TDR-94/94D TRANSPONDER SYSTEM data link messages. Diversity-equipped mode S

THEORY OF OPERATION transponders are also capable of receiving and trans-
mitting on two antennas. These are usually mounted
4.1.1 General
one on top and the other on the bottom of the fuselage.
This provides for more reliable air-to-air surveillance
The TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder is a solid-state,
and communications.
airborne, air traffic control (ATC) transponder that re-
sponds to ATCRBS (air traffic control radar beacon sys-
4.1.2 Physical Description
tem) mode A and mode C interrogations and mode se-
lect (mode S) interrogations. The mode S transponder
Figure 4-1 is a view of the TDR-94/94D Mode S
differs from earlier ATCRBS transponders in operation
Transponder. The unit dimensions are 5 inches wide, by
in that it is capable of discrete addressing. That is, in
3 inches high, by 14 inches long. It weighs about 7.5
mode S each transponder acquires a unique identity
pounds. All electrical connectors are at the rear of the
and responds when interrogated according to that iden-
unit. These include two 60-pin Thinline connectors and
tity. In addition, mode S includes the capability of
either one (for TDR-94) or two (for TDR-94D) antenna
sending and receiving
connectors. The unit is normally mounted in a MMT-150
Modular Mounting Tray.
CTL-92/92A Control, Controls and Indicators

Figure 3-1
Revised 4 April 1990 4-1

operation 523-0775656
4.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT consisting mainly of a large rotating radar an-

tenna that can be seen at or near most air termi-
The TDR-94/94D transponder is the airborne nals. This system uses conventional radar to lo-
transponder for the ATCRBS. The TDR-94/94D pro- cate all aircraft within its range in terms of range
vides mode A, mode C, and special identification re- and azimuth. It transmits a burst of energy and
plies to ATCRBS interrogators for tracking, identifica- then measures the time to an echo.* The direction
tion, and altitude reporting. In addition, the TDR- in which the antenna is pointing at the time the
94/94D is capable of receiving and sending mode S echo is detected establishes the azimuth to the re-
messages that will be required by TCAS II and TCAS flecting target. This target information is dis-
III (Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System), It played on the air traffic controllers PPI (plan po-
also includes the data link capability necessary for air- sition indicator) (see figure 4-3).
craft separation assurance (ASA) function.
4.3 BACKGROUND
4.3.3 ATCRBS Interrogation Modes
4.3.1 Introduction
The air traffic control radar beacon system (ZTCRBS)

is a surveillance system in wide use that locates and The SSR system interrogates the aircraft
identifies aircraft within an airspace. However, be- transponder for aircraft identity and altitude. The
cause of increasing air traffic, this system is being ex- interrogations are in the form of either of two
panded to include additional facilities for airborne col- modes: mode A for aircraft identity and mode C,
lision avoidance. To gain a good understanding of which is used to request altitude information.**
mode S transponder operation, it is necessary to un-
derstand the operation of the existing air traffic con-
trol (ATC) system.
All pulses are 0.8 us wide. The interrogations
If this is your first contact with the ATCRBS and from the ground station are at a frequency of 1030
related equipment, this paragraph will give you MHz. The transponder replies at a frequency of
an overall description of the present ATCRBS and 1090 MHz. The signal received from the airborne
then expand that understanding into the new transponder is decoded by the round system so
mode S operation. that it can be displayed on the ATC radar screen
(see figure 4-3). The replies produce either a sin-
4.3.2 Radar Systems gle or double slash target display on the controller
screen. The controller can also elect to display the
Refer to figure 4-2. The ATCRBS consists of a primary aircraft identification number (as selected by the
surveillance radar (PSR) and a secondary surveillance aircrew) and the aircraft altitude.
radar (SSR). The PSR can be visualized as
*The time is easily converted into range. The propagation velocity of radio energy is known. The mathe-
matical formula for distance is: D = velocity x (multiplied by) time. However, radio propagation velocity is
usually expressed as 12.359 us per radar mile. Notice that this is the inverse of what is necessary for the dis-
tance formula, which must have velocity expressed as a measure of distance per unit of time (eg, miles per
hour). Therefore, the distance formula must be modified slightly: D = time / (divided by) propagation velocity.
**In the original definition of ATC modes, two other modes were defined: mode B and mode D. These also
differ only in terms of pulse spacing, with mode B pulses spaced 17 us and mode D pulses spaced 25 us. For a
time, mode D was widely used in Great Britain, but in recent years most of the aviation industry has settled
on mode A for ATCRBS operation and mode C for altitude reporting, and modes B and D have been largely
abandoned.
In US military applications, a system similar to ATCRBS is used; it is known as IFF (identification friend or
foe). As this name implies, it has to do with mission security. Three modes are defined: modes 1, 2, and 3.
Mode 3 is common to the civil mod A, with a pulse spacing of 8 us. This allows air traffic control visibility of
all aircraft, both civil and military.
4 April 1989 4-2

ATC, PSR and SSR System

Figure 4-2
4 April 1989 4-3

Air Traffic Presentation on the ATC Radarscope

Figure 4-3
4 April 1989 4-4

4.3.4 SSR Radiation Patterns and SLS transponder suppresses replies to all interroga-
tions for an additional 25 to 45 ms. In addition,
Refer to figures 4-4 and 4-5. The SSR uses a ro- the receiver is desensitized for reception of P1, P3
tating directional antenna to transmit two pulses, pulses. The rationale here is that if the sidelobes
which are identified as P1 and P3. The spacing of are detectable, then the main lobe must be much
these pulses determines the mode. In mode a the greater, increasing the likelihood of echo recep-
pulses are spaced 8 us, while in mode C the pulses tion.
are spaced 21 us. The SSR also uses an omnidirec-
tional antenna to transmit a third pulse, desig- 4.3.5 ATC Transponder 4096 Replies
nated P2. This pulse is transmitted 2 us after the
P1 pulse and provides a reference for side-lobe The ATCRBS transponder 4096 reply signal is shown
suppression (sls). The amplitude of the P2 pulse is in figure 4-6. Notice that the signal can consist of
about the same as the peak sidelobe of the direc- from 2 to 15 pulses (the X pulse is not used). The two
tional antenna. Typically, this is about 18 dB be- framing pulses, F1 and F2, are always present and
low the peak of the directional (main) beam. spaced 20.3 us. An identification pulse may be trans-
mitted 4.35 us after the last framing pulse, F2. The in-
Refer to figure 4-4. Notice the two aircraft on the tervening pulses, C1 through D4 on the figure, make
drawing. Aircraft A is shown as being within the up the coded reply.
main lobe of the directional antenna. The ampli-
tude of the P1 and P3 pulses will be substantially The coded reply consists of four digits ranging
greater here than that of the P2 pulse radiated from 0 through 7. The digits are formed by the
from the omnidirectional antenna. Therefore, this sum of the suffix numbers ranging from 0 through
aircraft transponder will interpret this interroga- 7. The A group (A1, A2, and A4) makes up the
tion as valid. first digit, the B group makes up the second digit,
etc. (On the figure, a pulse outlined with a solid
Aircraft B, however, is outside the main lobe and line indicates that the pulse is present. A pulse
within one of the sidelobes. The P1 and P3 pulses outlined with dashed lines indicates the position
detected here will be the result of side-lobe radia- for that pulse when it is present.) The pulse con-
tion. Recall that the P2 pulse is transmitted by an figuration on the figure indicates a reply code of
omnidirectional antenna and is about equal in 1324. The first digit, 1, is formed y the presence of
amplitude to that of the peak sidelobe. Therefore, only the A1 pulse. The second digit, 3, is formed
the P2 pulse detected by aircraft B will be at least by the presence of B1 and B2 (1 + 2 = 3). A digit 7
as great in amplitude as the P1, P3 pulses. The is formed when all three pulses of the group are
transponder in aircraft B will detect this relation- present (1 + 2 + 4 = 7). Therefore, a reply sequence
ship in pulses and discard the interrogation as in- with all pulses present constitutes a code 7777.
valid, because the P2 pulse is not substantially The X pulse is not defined in ATCRBS replies.
less than the P1, P3 pulses. As a further safeguard This combination of four digits, each ranging from
against replies to possible late-arriving echoes to 0 through 7, makes possible 4096 different codes,
this invalid interrogation, the which explains the reason for calling it the 4096
code.

ATCRBS, SSR Antenna Radiation Pattern

Figure 4-3
4 April 1989 4-6

ATCRBS, Interrogator Pulse Spacing

Figure 4-5
ATCRBS and Mode S, Transponder 4096 Reply Code, Signal Format

Figure 4-6
4 April 1989 4-7

4.4 ATCRBS AND MODE S (Refer to figure c. Designator Identification (DI) Field: The 3-bit
4-7) DI field identifies the coding contained in the
special designator (SD) field in IF numbers 4,
4.4.1 Introduction 5, 20, and 21. The codes are defined as follows:
Mode S substantially enhances the capability of the DI DEFINITION

ATCRBS by adding data link and discrete interro-
gation features. The data link capability includes 0 Not used
air-to-air information exchange, ground-to-air (data 1 SD contains multisite information
uplink or comm A), air-to-ground (data downlink or 2-6 Not assigned
comm B), and multiple ground stations message pro- 7 SD contains extended data readout
tocol. The mode S transponder can also function as request
part of an airborne separation assurance (ASA) sys-
tem when interfaced with a Traffic Alert and Colli-
d. Interrogator Identification (II) Field: The 4-bit
sion Avoidance System (TCAS).
II field identifies the interrogator and appears
in UF number 11 (mode S only all-call).
4.4.2 Mode S Interrogation Modes (Refer to
e. Message, Comm A (MA) Field: The 56-bit MA
figures 4-8, 4-9, and 4-10)
field contains messages directed to the aircraft
(UF numbers 20 and 21). This field also con-
There are eight different formats of interrogation
tains the 8-bit comm A definition subfield
used in mode S. These eight formats can be summa-
(ADS). ADS defines the content of the MA
rized in terms of three basic types. These are shown
message field, of which it is a part.
in figures 4-8 and 4-9. Figure 4-10 is a summary of
f. Message, Comm C (MC) Field: The 80-bit MC
all eight.
field contains one segment of a sequence of
segments transmitted to the transponder in
This variety of interrogation capability gives the
the extended length message (ELM) (112 bits)
ground controller the flexibility of addressing only
mode. The field contains an 8-bit comm C
those aircraft of immediate interest, as opposed to
definition subfield (CDS) that defines the
processing replies from all aircraft.
message to be sent to the transponder and is
included in segment zero of the ELM uplink
All eight of the interrogation modes are summa-
sequence.
rized in figure 4-10. The various fields are de-
g. Message, Comm U (MU) Field: The 80-bit MU
scribed in the following paragraphs. These de-
field contains information used in air-to-air
scriptions are largely as provided in Document
message exchanges.
RTCA/DO-181, with minor changes to clarify the
h. Number of C-Segment (NC) Field: The 4-bit
text.
NC field provides the number of a segment
transmitted in an uplink ELM message and is
a. Address/Parity (AP) Field: The 24-bit* AP
part of the comm C interrogation, UF number
field contains the parity overlaid on the ad-
24.
dress and appears at the end of all transmis-
i. Protocol (PC) Field: The 3-bit PC field contains
sions for uplink interrogations and downlink
the operating commands to the transponder.
replies, except for downlink format (DF) num-
The code description is as follow:
ber 11.
DI DEFINITION
b. Acquisition Special (AQ) Field: The 1-bit AQ
field designates uplink format (UF) numbers 0
0 No changes in transponder state
and 16 as acquisition transmissions and is re-
1 Nonselective all-call lockout
peated as received by the transponder in DF
2-3 Not assigned
numbers 0 and 16.
4 Cancel B
5 Cancel C
*In the RTCA document, some graphic material
6 Cancel D
refers to these as chips. For this description, the
7 Not assigned
terms are regarded as synonymous.

Mode S, PSR and SSR System

Figure 4-7

Mode S, All-Call and Discrete Addressing, Interrogation Format

Figure 4-8
Mode S, Discrete Addressing, Pulse P6 Definition

Figure 4-9

ATCRBS, SSR Antenna Radiation Pattern

Figure 4-10

j. Probability of Reply (PR) Field: The 4-bit PR k. Reply Control (RC) Field: The 2-bit RC field
field contains commands to the transponder to designates the transmitted segment as initial
specify the reply probability to the mode S (0), intermediate (1), or final (3). An RC field
only all-call interrogation, IF number 11. The (3) is used to request a comm d downlink by
code description is as follows: the transponder. RC is part of the comm C in-
terrogation, UF number 24.
PR DEFINITION
l. Reply Length (RL) Field: The 1-bit RL field
0 Reply with probability = 1 commands a reply (DFO) if the bit is 0 and a
1 Reply with probability = 1/2 reply in DF number 16 if the bit is 1.
2 Reply with probability =
3 Reply with probability = 1/8 m. Reply Request (RR) Field: The 5-bit RR field
4 Reply with probability = 1/16 describes the length and content of the infor-
5-7 No reply mation requested (MB - see reply field de-
8 Disregard lockout, reply with prob- scriptions below ) by the interrogator. The
ability = 1 code description is as follow.:
9 Disregard lockout, reply with prob-
ability = RR REPLY
10 Disregard lockout, reply with prob- LENGTH MB CONTENT
ability =
11 Disregard lockout, reply with prob- 0-15 Short
ability = 1/8 16 Long Air initiated comm B
12 Disregard lockout, reply with prob- 17 Long Extended capability
ability = 1/16 18 Long Flight identification
13-15 Do not reply 19-31 Long Not assigned
After receiving a mode S only all-call containing a If the first bit of the RR code is logic 1, then the
PR code other that 0 through 8, the transponder decimal equivalent of the last four bits designates
will execute a random process and make a reply the requested source.
decision for this interrogation in accordance with n. Special Designator (SD) Field: The 16-bit SD
the command probability. Random occurrence of field contains control codes affecting the
replies enables the interrogator to acquire closely transponder protocol. The content is specified by
spaced aircraft that might otherwise synchro- the DI field. A subfield, IIS, is contained within
nously garble the transponder replies. the SD field and specifies the interrogator identi-
fier.

4.4.3 Mode S SSR Radiation Pattern and

SLS (Refer to figure 4-11)
The mode S discrete addressing interrogation takes
The mode S interrogation is transmitted through a yet another form. For this interrogation, the rotat-
technique known as binary differential phase-shift ing beam antenna transmits pulses P1, P2, and P6.
keying (DPSK). This technique is described graphi- P6 is in reality a series of either 56 or 112 bits identi-
cally in figure 4-9. A chip is an unmodulated interval fied as chips that define the data. At 1.25 s after the
of 0.25 us that may be preceded by a phase reversal start of P6, the spr occurs. This spr must be detected
(pr). If a chip is preceded by a pr, it represents a logic in order to enable a reply response. The final chip is
1. If it is not preceded by a pr, it represents a logic 0. followed by a 0.5-s guard interval. This prevents the
trailing edge of P6 from interfering with the de-
In mode S, the omnidirectional antenna transmits modulation process. The P2 pulse follows the P1
pulse P5 as the sls reference pulse. The P5 pulse oc- pulse by 2 s. P6 begins about 1.5 s after P2.
curs within the P6 pulse and is timed 0.4 us before
the spr (sync phase reversal). Thus, if the amplitude The ground mode S interrogator system uses a mo-
of P5 is sufficient to blank the spr of P6, the interro- nopulse processing scheme to determine the azi-
gation is most likely from a sidelobe and not from muth bearing to the aircraft., This scheme requires
the main love. In this case, the spr is hidden from only a single reply from an airborne transponder,
the transponder, so the reply is suppressed. as opposed to the two replies necessary in the ear-
lier ATCRBS system, to establish the azimuth to
The SSR mode S interrogation pulse spacing and the aircraft.* The address (derived from the reply)
identification is different from that of the earlier and location (azimuth and range) of the mode S air-
ATCRBS. Figures 4-8, 4-9, and 4-10 show these con- craft is entered into a roll-call file. This file can be
figurations. Notice that the rotating beam transmits visualized as a list of the mode S transponder
two different pulse combination. For all-call interro- equipped aircraft within its assigned airspace. On a
gations, the transmitted pulses are P1, P3 , and P4. later scan, the mode S aircraft is discretely ad-
In these interrogations the sls reference pulse, P2, is dressed. This discrete address contains a command
transmitted by the omnidirectional antenna as in field that is used to desensitize the mode S
conventional ATCRBS. The P1-to-P3 pulse spacing is transponder to further mode S all-call interroga-
either 8 s (for mode A) or 21 s (for mode C), also as tions. This desensitization is called mode S lockout.
in ATCRBS. The P4 pulse follows the P3 pulse by 2 s The ATCRBS-only transponders are not affected by
and can be either 0.8 s (the same as P1 and P3) or 1.6 this lockout technique and mode S transponders
s. The pulse width of P4 determines the all-call ob- continue to reply to ATCRBS interrogations.
jective as follow (all times are in microseconds):
When a mode S transponder equipped aircraft
INTERROGATION TYPE PULSE SPACING moves from one assigned airspace into another,
P1-P2 P1-P3 P3-P4 P4
the first ground interrogator can communicate
ATCRBS Mode A 20.15 80.2 None with the next interrogator and pass aircraft in-
ATCRBS Mode C 20.15 210.2 None formation to that second interrogator. This com-
ATCRBS Mode A/Mode S 20.15 80.2 2 0.05 Long
all-call munication link can be via ground lines or radio
ATCRBS Mode C/Mode S 20.15 210.2 2 0.05 Long link. If this method is used, the mode S lockout is
all-call
ATCRBS Mode A-only 20.15 80.2 2 0.05 Short
not disabled on the affected aircraft and the sec-
all-call ond interrogator will schedule discrete roll-call in-
ATCRBS Mode C-only 20.15 210.2 2 0.05 Short terrogations for that aircraft as needed. This
all-call
technique makes it possible to increase the air-
Where P4 long pulse width is 1.6 0.1 s and P4 short pulse width is 0.8
0.1 s.
craft handling capacity of the ground interrogator.
A 0.8-s pulse is only for non-mode S transpon- *In this scheme, the monopulse system generates
ders, while the 1.6-s pulse is for both ATCRBS two separate patterns: a single (sum) pattern and a
and mode S transponders. dual lobe (difference) pattern. The ratio of the energy
received by the sum pattern to the energy received
by the difference pattern determines the bearing of
the aircraft from the antenna beam center line.

In regions where mode S interrogators are not con- CA DESCRIPTION

nected via ground or radio link, the protocol for the
transponder allows it to be in mode S lockout only for 0 No communications capability
those interrogators that have the aircraft on the roll- (surveillance only)
call list. This enables a second ground interrogator to 1 Comm A and comm B capability
acquire an aircraft into its assigned airspace using the 2 Comm A, comm B, and downlink ELM ca-
all-call technique as previously described. pability
3 Comm A, comm B, uplink ELM, and
4.4.4 Mode S Transponder Replies downlink ELM capability
4-7 Not assigned
Typically, the ground-based interrogator tracks an
If the transponder CA code is 1, 2, or 3, the data
aircraft throughout its assigned airspace. The mode
link capability report is used to indicate the spe-
S transponder equipped aircraft responds to mode S
cific data link capabilities of the overall airborne
interrogations with the ATCRBS 4096 code and the
installation.
mode S reply format. During each scan, the SSR in-
terrogations are in both mode A and mode C. The
e. Downlink Request (DR) Field: The 5-bit DR
mode S transponder reply uses a technique known as
field is used to request extraction of downlink
pulse-position modulation (PPM). This is described
messages from the transponder by the inter-
graphically in figure 4-12. A pulse transmitted in the
rogator. The code description is as follow:
first half of the interval represents a logic 1, while a
pulse transmitted in the second half represents a
DR DESCRIPTION
logic 0. The mode S reply format is described in the
following paragraphs.
0 No downlink request
1 Request to send comm B message
4.4.5 Mode S Reply Description
2-15 Not assigned
16-31 Request permission to send extended
The reply waveform is shown in figure 4-12. The re-
length message (ELMs) of n-segments.
ply data block is formed by PPM encoding of the re-
The code inserted into the DR field corre-
ply data, as previously described. The first preamble
sponds to 15 + n. Downlink ELMs are
pulse occurs 128 s after the start of the P4 inter-
transmitted only after authorization by
rogation pulse or the spr. The ATCRBS reply to an
the interrogator. The segments are
ATCRBS interrogation is identical to the reply trans-
transmitted on comm D replies. On receipt
mitted by an non-mode S transponder (see figure 4-6).
of the authorization, the transponder
All reply formats are summarized in figure 4-13. The
sends a segment every 136 Ts. After re-
fields are described in the following paragraphs.
ceipt of all segments, the interrogator re-
a. Address, Announced (AA) Field: The 24-bit AA plies with a closeout transmission to indi-
field contains the aircraft address (uncoded) and is cate that all segments have been received
used in the all-call reply. and allow the DR field to be reset. The
b. Altitude Code (AC) Field: The 13-bit AC field con- closeout transmission is contained in a
tains the altitude code. The encoded altitude is surveillance or comm A interrogation.
coded as shown in figure 4-6. The M bit has been f. Flight Status (FS) Field: The 3-bit FS field
redefined for mode S; it was the X bit shown in reports the flight status of the aircraft. The
figure 4-6. In mode S the M bit may be used in the code description is as follows:
future for encoding the altitude in metric units.
Zero is transmitted in each of the 13 bits if alti- AIRBORNE/ON
tude information is not available. FS ALERT SPI THE GROUND
c. Address/Parity (AP) Field: The 24-bit AP field con-
tains the parity overlaid on the address and ap- 0 No No Airborne
pears at the end of all transmissions on both 1 No No On the ground
uplink and downlink, except for DF number 11. 2 Yes No Airborne
d. Capability, Transponder (CA) Field: The 3-bit CA 3 Yes No On the ground
field reports transponder capability. The code de- 4 Yes Yes Either
scription is as follows: 5 No Yes Either

g. Identification (ID) Field: The 13-bit ID field

contains the 4096 identification code as se- n. Reply Information (RI) Field: The 4-bit RI
lected by the pilot. field reports the airspeed capability and type
h. ELM Control (KE) Field: The 1-bit KE field of reply to the interrogating aircraft. The code
defines the content of the ND and MD fields in description is as follows:
comm D replies. The transponder acknowl-
edges receipt of a final segment with a comm RI DESCRIPTION
D transmission with KE = 1. The MD field
contains a transmission acknowledgement 0-7 Indicates that downlink is the reply to an
subfield (TAS). The information contained in air-to-air acquisition interrogation
the TAS subfield is continuously updated as 8-15 Indicates that downlink is an acquisition
segments are received and is cleared when a reply as follows:
closeout occurs or a new initializing segment 8 No maximum airspeed data is available
is received. 9 Airspeed is up to 75 knots
i. Message Comm B (MF) Field: The 56-bit MD 10 Airspeed is between 75 and 150 knots
field contains the message transmitted to the 11 Airspeed is between 150 and 300 knots
interrogator. The field contains an 8-bit sub- 12 Airspeed is between 300 and 600 knots
field (BDS) that defines the contents of the 13 Airspeed is between 600 and 1200 knots
comm B message. 14 Airspeed is more than 1200 knots
j. Message Comm D (MD) Field: The 80-bit MD 15 Not assigned
field contains one segment of a sequence of
o. Utility Message (UM) Field: The 6-bit UM
segments transmitted by the transponder in
field contains transponder status readouts.
the ELM mode. It also may contain a sum-
p. Vertical Status (VS) Field: The 1-bit VS field
mary of the received MC segments of an
indicates that the aircraft is airborne (VS = 0)
uplink ELM. An 8-bit subfield (DDS) defines
or on the ground (VS = 1).
the message to be transmitted and is included
q. Free and Unassigned Coding Space Fields:
in segment 0 of the ELM downlink.
Free coding space contains all logic level 0, as
k. Message Comm V (MV) Field: The 56-bit MV
transmitted by the interrogator or transpon-
field contains information used in the air-to-
der. Unassigned coding space that exists
air exchanges between mode S transponders.
within fields is reserved for possible future
l. Number of D-Segment (ND) Field: The 4-bit
use.
ND field provides the number of the segment
transmitted in a downlink ELM and is part of
the comm D reply.
m. Parity/Interrogator Identity (PI) Field: The 24-
bit PI field contains the parity overlaid on the
interrogator identity code.

Mode S, SSR Antenna Radiation Pattern

Figure 4-11

Mode S, Transponder Reply Code Pulse Spacing

Figure 4-12
Mode S, Transponder Reply Code Summary

Figure 4-13

4.5 TDR-94/94D THEORY OF OPERATION antenna installations, while the TDR-94D is for
antenna diversity (dual antenna) installations.
4.5.1 Introduction You are likely to find the TDR-94D in most TCAS
installations because dual antennas are required
This paragraph gives you an overview of the TDR- in TCAS. Both transponders can accept control
94/94D operating environment. If you are familiar data in CSDB or ARINC 429 format; this is set at
with the various installation configurations and installation by means of special external straps.
options, you can skip over this paragraph.
The following paragraphs and accompanying dia-
4.5.2 Installation Strapping Options grams describe the various installation configura-
tions. Figure 4-14 shows the various strapping op-
The TDR-94 and TDR-94D ATC/Mode S tions that must be considered for all installations.
Transponders offer a wide range of installation You should understand that these strapping op-
options. First you should recognize the difference tions can apply to all installations.
between the TDR-94 and the TDR-94D; the TDR-
94 is for single
TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S Transponder

Strapping Options
Figure 4-14

4.5.3 Typical Configurations format. The encoded data can be supplied to the
CTL-92/92A or directly to the TDR-4. Installers
Figure 4-15 shows a TDR-94 installation with a should choose the connection that involves the
CTL-92/92A CSDB transponder control unit and shortest wire run.
an encoding altimeter. This type of encoder typi-
cally supplies altitude data in Gillham code
(ARINC 572)
TDR-94 ATC/Mode S Transponder With

CTL-92/92A Transponder Control
Unit and Altitude Encoder,
Typical
Figure 4-14

Figure 4-16 shows a similar installation except it possible using ARINC 429 code selection. In this
uses a central air data computer (CADC) for alti- case, an ARINC 429 source, such as an FMS,
tude data. In each of these cases, external strap- would be shown in place of the CTL-92/92A, with
ping is required according to the type of altitude appropriate strapping as shown in figure 4-14.
data that is being used. An alternate Installation
configuration is
TDR-94 ATC/Mode S Transponder With

CTL-92/92A Transponder Control Unit
and CADC Altitude Source,
Typical Installation Diagram
Figure 4-16

Figure 4-17 shows a TDR-94D in a TCAS installa- strapping is required. The CTL-92T is required for
tion with a CSDB control and dual antennas. If TCAS control and is connected between the TDR-
the transponder is operated with only a single an- 94D and CTL-92/92A. In this installation,
tenna, a special strap is required. The diagram transponder control data is entered on the CTL-
also shows a CADC for altitude data. This can be 92/92A and the TCAS control data is added to the
an encoder as shown in figure 4-15. Either way, data word in the CTL-92T.
appropriate
TDR-94D ATC/Mode S Transponder, Data Link, and TCAS Installation

With CSDB Control and CADC Altitude Data Source,
Figure 4-17

Figure 4-18 shows an installation similar to that data link installation using an ARINC 429 control
of figure 4-17. This can be seen as a typical TCAS for code selection and transponder/TCAS control.
and
TDR-94D ATC/Mode S Transponder, Data Link, and TCAS Installation

With ARINC 429 Transponder Control and
CADC Altitude Data Source,
Figure 4-18

4.5.4 TDR-94/94D Block Diagram Theory of processor also determines whether a response is
Operation appropriate. Depending on certain criteria, the
processor also determines which antenna should
4.5.4.1 Introduction be used for reply, top or bottom. This data is sup-
plied to modulator A3, where the proper diode
The TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S Transponder is the drive signals are generated. These diode drive
airborne portion of the SSR system. It is capable signals control the diversity switch in module A2.
of operating with ATCRBS and mode S interroga-
tors. The TDR-94D can operate with two antennas The video processor also supplied the proper reply
for improved air-to-air surveillance. This capabil- data to the modulator. The modulator controls the
ity is required in TCAS installations. The TDR- bracket drive signals which drive the power am-
94/94D also provides data link message capability. plifer. The response pulse train is formed in the
power amplifier. This pulse train is switched
4.5.4.2 Overall Functional Block Diagram through the diversity switch and low-pass filter
Theory of Operation (Refer to figure 4-19) and is radiated by the appropriately selected an-
tenna.
The TDR-94/94D consists of seven major subas-
semblies numbered A1 through A7. These are de- The CPU and I/O module contains most of the cir-
scribed in the following paragraphs. cuits involved in the digital input and output sig-
nals. The discrete inputs include a number of
The transponder interrogations and uplink mes- strapping options, like TCAS select and control
sages are received by either one or both of the an- format select (CSDB or ARINC 429). The digital
tennas. This received signal is routed through the inputs include altitude and communications data.
receive signal detector in module A2 to the IF am- The digital outputs include communication, TCAS,
plifier in module A7. If the transponder is a diver- and altitude data. A few of the discrete inputs,
sity (dual antenna) unit, the IF amplifier operates like TCAS select, the altitude digitizer inputs, and
on both the top and bottom signals independently. the mode S identification strapping inputs, enter
The IF amplifier ensures that the interrogation is the unit on the A6 module.
a valid signal and processses that signal into the
level required by the video processor in module 6. The synthesizer generates the 1090-MHz CW sig-
Module A7 also contains the DPSK detector, nal that is used to drive the power amplifier. The
which detects the presence of a differential phase modulator effectively switches the power amplifier
reversal in a mode S interrogation. on and off to create the output pulse train that be-
comes the reply or downlink transmission. The di-
The video processor evaluates the video data from versity switch directs the power amplifier output
the IF amplifier to determine whether the inter- to the top or bottom antenna. The modulator con-
rogation is an ATCRBS or mode S interrogation. trols the diversity switch in response to control
The signals from the video processor.

TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder

Overall Block Diagram
Figure 4-19

523-0775657-005118
TDR-94/94D
ATC/Mode S
Transponder System
Maintenance
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
5.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.3 TEST EQUIPMENT AND POWER REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.4 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.5 MAINTENANCE DIANOSTIC DATA TREIEVAL AND ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
5.6 NUMBER SYSTEM CONVERSION AND DATA WORD DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
5.7 GILLHAM CODE DESCRIPTION WITH ENCODING AND DECODING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . 5-155
5.8 ACCEPTANCE TEST, TEST PANEL ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158
5.9 FLIGHTLINE TEST, TEST PANEL ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175
NOTICE: This section replaces fourth edition dated 5 May 1993.

Page Issue
*Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Jun 95
5-1 thru 5-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 May 93
*5-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Jun 95
5-10 thru 5-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 May 93
*5-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Jun 95
5-38 thru 5-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 May 93
*5-43 thru 5-132 . . . . . . . . . . 15 Jun 95
5-133 thru 5-152 . . . . . . . . . . . 5 May 93
*5-153 thru 5-154.1 . . . . . . . 15 Jun 95
*5-154.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blank
*5-155 thru 5-158 . . . . . . . . . 15 Jun 95
5-159 thru 5-162 . . . . . . . . . . . 5 May 93
*5-163 thru 5-169 . . . . . . . . . 15 Jun 95
5-170 thru 5-187 . . . . . . . . . . . 5 May 93
*5-188 thru 5-189 (deleted) . . . 5 May 93
*5-200 thru 5-201 (deleted) . . . 5 May 93
*5-188 thru 5-197 (page numbers15only) Jun 95


1st Ed 4 Apr 90 None
2nd Ed 29 Apr 91 None
3rd Ed 6 Jan 92 None
4th Ed 5 May 93 See Table 1-6
5th Ed 15 Jun 95 See Table 1-6

section V
maintenance
5.1 GENERAL 5.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
This section provides on board maintenance proce- Collins has no requirement for periodic mainte-
dures and limited bench checkout procedures for nance of the TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder.
the TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S Transponder. The
test procedures are for use in: 5.3 TEST EQUIPMENT AND POWER
REQUIREMENTS
a. Checking a transponder system on the bench
before installation to ensure that it is function- 5.3.1 Test Equipment
ing properly, or
b. Exercising the transponder system on board Table 5-1 lists the test equipment required to per-
the airplane through a systematic routine for form the test procedures found in this section.
fault isolation to a defective LRU. Equivalent test equipment can be substituted in
place of the listed items.
The bench procedures use a special test panel
described in paragraph 5.9. The Flightline Fault 5.3.2 Power Requirements
Isolation procedures use a similar, but less com-
plex, test panel which is described in paragraph All power required to perform the flightline sys-
5.9. In both cases, data is provided to allow local tem tests and LRU fault isolation procedures is
fabrication, or purchase from a supplier such as provided by the airplane in which the system is
Avionics Specialists Inc, or JcAIR. installed.
Fault isolation procedures should include a check A bench 28-V dc supply, with at least 5-A peak
of the airplane installation and wiring with special current output, is needed for the bench procedure.
attention to conditions that can contribute to a
failure of the transponder system. 5.4 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
On board airplane fault isolation most often as- Note

sumes that a self-test can be performed. A system
that is totally non-responsive is usually best eval-
uated on the bench. The following test procedures assume that
the airplane interconnect wiring has been
The TDR-94/94D performs a full self-test automat- verified and is correct.
ically upon unit power-up. It then performs exten-
sive background testing to verify bus status and Test procedures in table 5-2 provide an operation-
the condition of critical functions for diagnostic al test of the TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder. If
purposes. Use the TEST button on the control any of these tests fail, or if there is reason to sus-
head to initiate a self-test. pect a failure, then the Fault Isolation Procedures
in Table 5-5 and can be used to help isolate a de-
fective unit.
5/5/1993 5-1
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-1. Test Equipment Required.
EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER CHARACTERISTIC FUNCTION
Fluke 8010A, Dvm John Fluke Mfg. Co., Inc. Portable, 3-1/2 digit accu- Measure ac and dc voltages; for
Suite 113 racy use on ramp for wiring checkout
1380 Corporate Center Curve and with Flightline Test Panel or
Eagan, MN 55121-1200 on bench for Acceptance Testing
(612) 452-4264
Tektronix 455, 2235, Tektronix Portable, dc to 10 MHz Measure serial logic levels; for
2236, Oscilloscope 5350 Keystone Court use with Flightline Test Panel or
Rolling Meadows, IL 60008 on bench for Acceptance Testing
(708) 259-7580
ATC-601 Ramp Test Set IFR. Inc., Portable ATCRBS tran- For ATCRBS and Mode S ground
4053 Navajo Lane sponder Ramp Test Set. station simulation in flightline or
Wichita, KS 67210 Capable of broadcast and bench testing procedures.
(316) 522-4981 direct-connection testing
of normal transponder
operation in modes A, C,
and Mode S, as well as all
defined and applicable
uplink / downlink for-
mats.
RF load M/A-COM Omni Spectra, Inc. 50- at 1090 MHz TNC RF termination of unused anten-
21 Continental Blvd or BNC with adapter na output (TDR-94D only). Need-
Merrimac, NH 03054-9979 ed on flightline only when using
direction connection method.
Diversity Boot Locally fabricated (included Rf opaque for diversity To isolate antenna ports for broa-
with ATC-601) testing. Ideally, it should dcast diversity testing on the
have an adhesive base. flightline.
DataTrac 400H * Atlantic Instruments, Inc. Portable, battery opera- Control head simulation and data
DataTrac 400 * P.O. Box 021466 ble, bus analysis; for use on ramp
DataTrac 200 ** Melbourne, FL 32902 *ARINC 429 bus simula- with Flightline Test Panel or on
(407) 951-2542 tion and analysis, bench for Acceptance Testing
** ARINC 429 and CSDB
bus simulation and analy-
sis
JcAIR 429E JcAIR ARINC 429 bus simula- Control head simulation and data
400 Industrial Parkway tion and analysis bus analysis; for use on ramp
Industrial Airport, KS 66031 with Flightline Test Panel or on
(913) 764-2452 bench for Acceptance Testing
Acceptance Test, Test Locally fabricated according to Bench test panel To provide input/output control
Panel data in paragraph 5.8 at the and unit/test equipment interface
end of this section. This para- for bench testing.
graph also lists the various
cables needed.
Flightline Test Panel Locally fabricated according to Portable test device To provide access to signals be-
data in paragraph 5.9 at the tween control and transponder
end of this section. This para- unit
graph also lists the various
cables needed.
5/5/1993 5-2
5.4.1 Diagnostic Information
The procedures in table 5-6 provide for the retriev- Most transponder ramp testers can be used in
al of diagnostic data that is stored in non-volatile direct-connect or broadcast operating modes. At
memory in the TRD-94/94D transponder. This times both methods are useful in isolating a tran-
data can be helpful in diagnosing certain type of sponder malfunction between the antenna / anten-
failures especially those of a more transient na- na cables and the transponder unit. For example,
ture. Refer to table 5-3 for a description of the if in the broadcast method the test shows a low
diagnostic codes and the recommended trouble- power output or low sensitivity. Switching to the
shooting procedure. Table 5-4 provides additional direct-connection method can effectively isolate the
information for proper interpretation of the diag- problem to the transmitter/receiver or the anten-
nostic codes. na system.
5.4.2 Test Equipment Installation and Power If you use the direct connection method and you
Application For Flightline Testing Using A are using a test set other than the IFR ATC-601,
Ramp Tester be sure it has the proper attenuation in the RF
link to prevent damage to the transponder receiv-
5.4.2.1 Preliminary Instructions er. The IFR ATC-601 has the proper attenuation
built into its rf port. If another type of tester is
Refer to table 5-2 for the transponder system flig- being used, check the manual to be sure it pro-
htline testing and fault isolation procedures. These vides adequate protection. Be sure that the inject-
procedures use the test setup shown in figure 5-1 ed signal level is not greater than -20 dBm.
and provide for a quick initial check to determine
whether or not the transponder system is function- Most transponder ramp test sets allow operation
al. If this check shows that a fault exists, refer to inside a hanger. Be aware, however, that the
the procedures in table 5-5 for more detailed fault glossy (and often painted) floor surfaces found in
isolation. A test panel and data bus reader are most hangers can result in substantial signal re-
needed for these procedures. flection. This can have an effect on power output
and receiver sensitivity tests. Moving the sense
5.4.2.2 Bus Reader Selection antenna above or below the transponder antenna
usually produces different results and demonstrat-
Any one of the four bus readers listed in table 5-1 es the effect of signal reflection. It is for this rea-
can be used. However, of those listed only the son that you should try a few different sense an-
Atlantic Instruments DataTrac 200 is capable of tenna heights, distances, and airplane parking
receiving and transmitting either the CSDB or the locations to gain a basis for test result interpreta-
ARINC 429 bus format. The others are ARINC tion and evaluation. Be guided by the antenna
429 only. Therefore, if the installation includes a placement requirements of the test set manufac-
CTL-92/92A control, only the DataTrac 200 can be turer.
used to simulate that control.
Locate the ramp tester sense antenna at the prop-
5.4.2.3 Ramp Tester Selection and Use er distance from the airplane transponder anten-
na. The best distance and height may be specified
The IFR ATC-601 was used in the development of by the manufacturer.
the procedures in this manual. It is possible that
other instruments, i.e., instruments provided by Mode s diversity transponder installations may
other manuafacturers, have comparably and ac- require shielding of one antenna for diversity test-
ceptable features. You should feel free to use your ing. An RF opaque boot of nearly any design is
choice of instruments. However, be sure that it is acceptable for this purpose. It should fit complete-
capable of testing the transponder operating items ly over the antenna and provide good base ground-
listed at the end of this paragraph. ing. An adhesive base may be best for easy instal-
lation and removal.
5/5/1993 5-3
The IFR ATC-601 features a special automatic test 5.4.2.4 Transponder System Inspection
sequence that significantly reduces the time re-
quired for the test. Using the automatic sequence If the nature of the transponder failure report is
or an equivalent manual sequence is largely a such that it may be caused by antenna cables or
matter of personal choice. However, if a partic- antennas, inspect these for possible physical dam-
ular test fails in the automatic sequence, it might age or deteriorated installation integrity.
be advisable to repeat that test manually to help
in isolating the fault. Follow the test set operat- The condition of the transponder antenna, anten-
ing procedures as provided. na cable(s), and cable connectors can have a signif-
icant effect on transponder operation. Therefore,
At least the following transponder operating items an occasional visual inspection of these compo-
should be tested. The order is not critical.: nents is advisable. However, do not disassemble
1. Mode A response. the airplane to inspect antenna cables unless you
2. Mode C response with altitude if available. have good reason to suspect a cable or connector
3. Mode S all-call response, problem.
4. Mode S lockout.
5. Transmitter frequency. 5.4.2.5 Transponder System Ground Test En-
6. Transponder power output. able
7. Receiver frequency discrimination.
8. Receiver sensitivity. Some transponder installations use a weight-on-
9. Receiver interrogation pulse spacing discrimi- wheels transponder inhibit mechanism to prevent
nation (all modes). This involves altering the response to interrogations while the airplane is on
pulse spacing from normal and testing the the ground. It is necessary to disable this inhibit
transponders reply or lack of reply. feature for testing. This is unique to each air-
10. Individual pulse-width discrimination (all plane therefore you must consult the airplane
modes). This is the same type of test as 9. manual for the necessary instructions.
except that the pulse width is changed instead
of the pulse spacing. It may also be necessary to condition the altitude
11. SLS (side lobe suppression). This involves data system for test purposes.
changing the P2 pulse amplitude with respect
to the P1/P3 pulses and testing the transpond- 5.4.3 Flightline Test Procedures
ers response.
12. Transponder response to invalid address inter- Transponder system testing procedures, for use on
rogations. the flightline, are shown in table 5-2. These pro-
13. SPR on/off. cedures will verify that the system is functional.
14. Mode S, UF0 (uplink format 0). If a failure is detected or suspected because of
15. Mode S, UF4. pilot complaint or other evidence, the fault isola-
16. Mode S, UF5. tion procedures in table 5-5 provide more detailed
17. Mode S, UF11. testing and LRU performance analysis.
18. Mode S, UF16.
19. Mode S, UF20.
20. Mode S, UF21.
21. Diversity isolation (TDR-94D, operating with
dual antennas only).
22. Transponder squitter.
23. Airplane identification code.
5/5/1993 5-4
Table 5-2. Transponder System, Flightline Test Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTING

INSTRUCTIONS
1. Setup: Prepare the airplane and transponder system for testing as required. As a mini-
mum this will require:
Be sure that the air/ground test inhibit, if used, is functional. P2-53 must be
grounded to allow a manual self-test.
Set altimeter system(s) for a test altitude (consult airplane manual for neces-
sary procedures) especially as may be required for TCAS if used.
Setup IFR ATC-601 Ramp Tester and perform the necessary preliminary tests
for it.
If the broadcast method of testing will be used with the ATC-601 (or equiva-
lent) ramp tester and the installation consists of a TDR-94D diversity tran-
sponder install an rf boot over the top antenna. If the direct connection is
being used, disconnect both antenna cables from the transponder mount,
connect the ATC-601 to the lower antenna connector and install an rf load on
the upper connector.
Note: If the transponder installation makes the direct connection method quite
difficult, the broadcast method should be seen as preferred unless initial tests
suggest an advantage in favor of direct connection.
2.0 Inspection: Before applying power to the transponder system, make a visual inspection of the
transponder antenna(s), ATC control, and the r/t. Be sure the r/t is firmly seated
in its mount and there are no obvious signs of a dysfunctional installation. If it is
possible, check the antenna cable connections on the back of the transponder for
tightness and the wire harness for obvious signs of broken wires or dislodged
connector pins.
3.0 Power application: Normal operation: If the broadcast method of testing is

Apply power to the tran- In the case of the IFR ATC-601, the being used with the ATC-601, avoid use
sponder system. Enter an INTERR and REPLY indicators should of an emergency ident code (consult the
appropriate code into the both be lit. airplane manual if you are unsure).
control and set for normal If the INTERR lamp does not light, the
operation. If the installation is equipped with a ramp tester is not functioning properly.
CTL-92/92A -2XX control, "diAG" may If the REPLY lamp does not light, the
be displayed in the lower window if a transponder is not responding. Check
diagnostic is detected. It is necessary, for possible ground operation inhibits.
then, to press TEST to display the
diagnostic code.
5/5/1993 5-5-5
Table 5-2. Transponder System, Flightline Test Procedures.

INSTRUCTIONS
4.0 Self Test: If the installation uses an ATC control See table 5-3 for an interpretation of the
Press the ATC TEST button head other than the CTL-92/92A or diagnostic code.
on the ATC control. RTU-870A/T, you may need to consult
Note: The installation may the airplane manual to determine
feature a remote ATC TEST where the ATC self test results are
button in which case use it displayed and in what format any diag-
instead. nostics are disclosed.
Test results should not show any diag-
nostic other than 00 (no faults detect-
ed). In the case of the CTL-92/92A , the
diagnostics are displayed on the control.
A normal indication on the CTL-92/92A is:

The active code display intensity modulates from minimum to maximum.
On all CTL-92/92A controls:
"AL" is displayed in the upper window and the altitude in thousands of feet
in 100-foot increments is displayed in the lower window.
If a diagnostic condition is detected, the upper window shows "dIAG" and the
two-digit diagnostic code is displayed in the lower window. Refer to table 5-3
for a listing of the codes, and table 5-4 for an interpretation and explanation
of each.
5.0 Auto Test: All AUTO TEST items should indicate Successful completion of tests verifying
Select AUTO TEST on the PASSED. This test takes about 30 sec- these items, and no other indication of
IFR ATC-601 and press onds to complete. failure (like pilot or ATC complaints),
RUN. Note: It is possible that tests 13, 14, indicates a functional transponder.
and 15 indicate FAILED. These items
are a function of datalink capabilities Otherwise, a failure of any one or more
and may not be implemented in which of the items, may indicate a performance
case you can ignore this failure indica- problem. In this case, consider removing
tion. the transponder for additional analysis
and repair on the bench.
6.0 Opposite antenna test: The test results should be approximate- If there is a substantial difference in
If the direct connection met- ly equivalent between the two antenna receiver sensitivity and/or power output,
hod is being used, switch the test. it may be caused by a faulty antenna,
test set cable to the other antenna cable, or connector installation.
antenna port. If the broad- In this case, inspection and repair of the
cast method is being used, antennas, cables, or cable connectors is
move the rf boot to the top needed.
(or opposite) antenna con-
nector and repeat the test.
7.0 Equipment removal and res- Restore all equipment to its normal ground operating configuration. Return the test
toration: set to its normal storage location. Careful handling and storage of all ramp test
equipment prolongs the service life and reduces maintenance costs.
5/5/1993 5-5-6
Table 5-3. TDR-94/94D Diagnostic Codes
PRIMARY SECONDARY DESCRIPTION DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

CODE CODE
TI F/W
00 No fault found
10 Power supply diagnostics (1) (1)
11 +5 V dc Yes Yes
12 +70 V dc No No
13 +35 V dc No No
14 LVPS No No
20 Transmitter/modulator diagnostics (2) (2)
21 Final stage, overcurrent Yes Yes
22 Top antenna, low power output No No
23 Bottom antenna low power output No No
24 Transmitter overtemperature No No
30 Synthesize diagnostics No No
31 Synthesizer lock detect No No
32 Synthesizer low power detect No No
40 Receiver/IF diagnostics No No
41 Top receiver channel No No
42 Bottom receiver channel No No
43 Top DPSK demodulator No No
44 Bottom DPSK demodulator No No
50 Program memory (ROM) diagnostics Yes Yes
51 High-byte ROM Yes Yes
52 Low-byte ROM Yes Yes
53 Both ROM chips Yes Yes
60 Volatile memory (RAM) diagnostics Yes Yes
61 High-byte RAM Yes Yes
6/15/1995 5-7

CODE CODE
TI F/W
60 (contd) 62 Low-byte RAM Yes Yes
63 Both RAM chips Yes Yes
64 Cache RAM Yes Yes
65 Cache RAM and high-byte RAM Yes Yes
66 Cache RAM and low-byte RAM Yes Yes
67 Cache RAM and both RAM chips Yes Yes
68 Dual port RAM Yes Yes
70 Nonvolatile memory (NVRAM)diagnos- No No

tics
80 Serial input control bus diagnostics (4) No
81 ARINC 429 control UART (4) No
82 ARINC 429 control port A inactive (4) No
83 ARINC 429 control port B inactive (4) No
84 ARINC 429 control port C inactive (4) No
85 CSDB control input port A inactive (4) No
90 Serial altitude input diagnostics No No
91 ARINC 429/575 altitude UART No No
92 ARINC 429/575 input port A inactive No No
93 ARINC 429/575 input port B inactive No No
94 CSDB altitude input port A inactive No No
95 CSDB altitude input port B inactive No No
A0 ADLP communication diagnostics No No
A1 ADLP comm A/B UART No No
A2 ADLP comm A/B bus inactive No No
A3 ADLP comm C/D UART No No
A4 ADLP comm C/D bus inactive No No
B0 TCAS communication diagnostics No No
B1 TCAS UART No No
B2 TCAS unit - -
B3 TCAS bus inactive No No
B4 TCAS protocol error No No
C0 Squitter diagnostics No Yes
C1 (TDR-94D only) Top channel squitter No Yes
C2 (TDR-94D only) Bottom channel squitter No Yes
6/15/1995 5-8

CODE CODE
TI F/W
D0 (TDR-94D only) Diversity diagnostic No Yes
E0 Message processor diagnostics No No
E1 (TDR-94D only) Top channel message processor, soft No No

failure
E2 Bottom channel message processor, soft No No

failure
E3 Top channel message processor, hard Yes Yes

failure
E4 Bottom channel message processor, hard Yes Yes

failure
F0 Configuration diagnostics No No
F1 Mode S discrete address changed No No
F2 TCAS selection changed No No
F3 Altitude units selection changed No No
F4 Max airspeed program selects changed No No
F5 Port selects changed No No
F6 SDI selects changed No No
F7 Single antenna selection changed No No
F8 ADLP selection changed No No
F9-FE (not assigned)
FF Unacceptable mode s address selected Yes Yes

(address lines are all 0 or all 1)
Notes:
Except for 00, 70, and D0, primary diagnostics are not displayed.
(1) Transmitter is inhibited (TI) and failure warn (F/W1) output (P1-31) is set only if a diagnostic code 11 is detected.
(2) Transmitter is inhibited and F/W1 discrete is set only if a diagnostic code 21 is detected.
(3) Transmitter is inhibited and TDR-94/94D is set to standby only if all selected control inputs are nonfunctional.
(4) Transmitter is inhibited and TDR-94/94D is set to standby only if the control bus failure is detected on the selected control
bus.
(5) Transmitter is inhibited and TDR-94/94D is set to standby only if serial control is selected and all serial inputs are
nonfunctional.
1
"F/W set" here refers to:
a. TDR-94/94D fault monitor discrete output, P1-31, set to high level,
b. TDR-94/94D CSDB data word label 1F, byte-1, bit-7, set to logic 0, and
c. TDR-94/94D ARINC 429 SSM and other data bits related to diagnostics set to the appropriate fault level.
6/15/1995 5-9
Table 5-4. TDR-94/94D Diagnostic Code Description and LRU Disposition
Diagnostic Title Description and LRU Disposition

Code
For purposes of this diagnostic code interpretation and for the sake of brevity, the following fault levels are defined:
Level 1: A level 1 fault is defined as one in which the TDR-94/94D should be removed for further testing or fault isolation on
the bench.
Level 2: A level 2 fault is defined as one in which the TDR-94/94D is demonstrating a failure which may not prevent it from
performing continued but temporary service. That is, a diagnostic which indicates a failure in a peripheral function. For
example, a diagnostic code A? indicating an ADLP fault. If an ADLP is not being used in the installation the transponder may
operate normally in its other functions.
Level 3: A level 3 fault is defined as one in which the TDR-94/94D has experienced a change in the installation, i.e., external to
the TDR-94/94D. In this case, further analysis is needed to correct or restore the installation as needed. For example, a
diagnostic code F4 indicating a change in the max airspeed strapping. This strongly suggests an airplane wiring problem.
Reference to a failure warning indication should be understood to be the flag.
00 No fault found This code indicates that no failure was detected during the most recent self test
routine.
11 +5 V dc Level 1. This diagnostic code is typically accompanied by a failure warning indication.

It is caused by a out-of-tolerance condition in the +5 V dc power supply.
12 +70 V dc Level 1. Same as 11 except that it applies to the +70 V dc supply on hvps module A1.
13 +35 V dc Level 1. Same as 11 except that it applies to the +35 V dc supply on hvps module A1.
14 LVPS Level 1. Same as 11 except that it applies to the low voltage power supply on module
A7.
21 Transmit- Level 1. This diagnostic code is typically accompanied by a failure warning indication.
ter/modulator, final It is caused by a sensed high current condition in the final transmitter stage. This
stage, overcurrent may be accompanied by a diagnostic code 24.
22 Top antenna low Level 1 if verifiable, otherwise level 2. This diagnostic code is typically not accompa-
power output nied by a failure warning indication. It is caused by a sensed low power output
condition at the top antenna output final stage. This may be verifiable in the ATC-601
test. This diagnostic will not occur on a TDR-94 (non-diversity) unit.
23 Bottom antenna Same as 22 except that it applies to the bottom antenna output port.
low power output
24 Transmitter over Level 1. The same as 21 except that it is caused by a high temperature condition.
temperature
31 Synthesizer lock Level 1. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a failure warning condi-
detect tion and occurs when the synthesizer output frequency does not agree with the proces-
sor command. This condition may be verifiable in the ATC-601 test as a transmitter
off frequency failure.
32 Synthesizer low Level 1. Much the same as 31 except that it applies to the synthesizer output level. A
power detect sufficiently low output may prevent the modulator, and hence the transmitter or
receiver, from operating.
41 * Top receiver chan- Level 2. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a failure warning condi-
nel tion and occurs when the top receiver channel does not respond properly to a simulated
test signal generated by the bottom channel receiver. It is possible that the bottom
channel may still be functional. Neither diagnostic 41, 42 or 43 occur on a TDR-94.
* See the note 1 at the end of this table
5/5/1993 5-10

Code
42 * Bottom receiver Level 2. Same as 41 except that the channel roles are reversed. See note 1 at the end
channel of this table.
43 Top DPSK demodu- Level 1. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a failure warning condi-
lator tion and occurs when the top DPSK demodulator does not respond properly to a
simulated mode s test signal. It is possible that the unit may still respond properly to
ATCRBS (mode A and C) interrogations. * See the note at te end of this table.
44 Bottom DPSK de- Level 1. Same as 43 except that it applies to the bottom channel.
modulator
51 High-byte ROM Level 1. This diagnostic code is typically accompanied by a failure warning condition.
During self-test the microprocessor executes a memory modulo 64K summation of all
memory locations and compares that result against a stored check-sum value. This
diagnostic indicates that the high-byte ROM failed that comparison test.
52 Low-byte ROM Level 1. Same as 51 except that the low-byte ROM failed the test.
53 Both ROM chips Level 1. Same as 51 except that both ROMs failed the test.
61 High-byte RAM Level 1. This diagnostic code is typically accompanied by a failure warning condition.
During self-test the microprocessor executes a read/write test on all available volatile
RAM locations using AAAAH and 5555H data. This diagnostic indicates that one or
more high-byte RAM device failed this test.
62 Low-byte RAM Level 1. Same as 61 except that the low-byte RAM device failed the test.
63 Both RAM Level 1. Same as 61 except that both RAM device failed the test.
64 Cache RAM Level 1. Same as 61 except that the cache RAM failed the test.
65 Cache and high- Level 1. Same as 61 except that both the high-byte RAM (61) and cache RAM (64)
byte RAM failed the test.
66 Cache and low-byte Level 1. Same as 61 except that both the low-byte RAM (62) and cache RAM (64)
RAM failed the test.
67 Cache and both Level 1. Same as 61 except that both RAM (63) and cache RAM (64) failed the test.
RAM
68 Dual port RAM Level 1. Same as 61 except that the dual port RAM failed the test.
70 NVRAM Level 1. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a failure warning condi-
tion. During power-up the microprocessor executes a read/write test on the last 16
bytes of the NVRAM to verify proper operation. This diagnostic indicates that the
NVRAM failed that test.
81 ARINC 429 UART Level 1. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a failure warning
condition. During self-test, the microprocessor forces the output from all serial control
UARTs to feedback to the input. The microprocessor verifies that the UART processes
this ARINC word properly. This diagnostic indicates that the ARINC 429 UART failed
this test.
5/5/1993 5-11

Code
82 ARINC 429 control Level 2. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a failure warning condi-
port A inactive tion. During normal non-burst mode operation, the microprocessor periodically
monitors the selected serial ports for bus activity. During burst mode, this test is not
performed because there is no way of predicting the arrival of control data. This
diagnostic code indicates that ARINC 429 control port A has no bus activity for at least
1-second.
83 ARINC 429 control Level 2. Same as 82 except that it applies to ARINC 429 control port B.
port B inactive
84 ARINC 429 control Level 2. Same as 82 except that it applies to ARINC 429 control port C.
port C inactive
85 CSDB control port Level 2. Same as 82 except that it applies to CSDB control port A. Monitor time is
A inactive extended to 2-seconds.
86 CSDB control port Level 2. Same as 85 except that it applies to CSDB control port B.
B inactive
91 ARINC 429/575 Level 2. Same as 81 except that it applies to the ARINC 429/575 altitude UART.
altitude UART
92 ARINC 429/575 Level 2. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a failure warning condi-
altitude input port tion. During normal operation, the microprocessor periodically monitors the selected
A altitude input ports for bus activity. This diagnostic code indicates that ARINC
429/575 altitude input port A has no bus activity for at least 2-seconds.
93 ARINC 429/575 Level 2. Same as 92 except that it applies to ARINC 429/575 altitude input port B.
altitude input port
B
94 CSDB altitude Level 2. Same as 92 except that it applies to CSDB altitude input port A.
input port A
95 CSDB altitude Level 2. Same as 92 except that it applies to CSDB altitude input port B.
input port B
A1 ADLP comm A/B Level 2. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a failure warning condi-
UART tion. During power-on self-test and whenever a comm A/B bus failure is suspected, the
microprocessor forces the UART output to feedback to the input and verifies that the
UART processes the data properly. This diagnostic code indicates that ADLP comm
A/B UART failed the test.
A2 ADLP comm A/B Level 2. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a failure warning condi-
input port tion. The determination of a failure in this function involves a highly complicated
exchange between data link transmitters and receivers involving data word check-sums
and parity checks. This diagnostic code results after repeated attempts to establish a
reliable communications link fail. The failure should be verifiable in the ATC-601 tests
9 through 15.
A3 ADLP comm C/D Level 2. Same as A1 except that it applies to ADLP comm C/D UART.
UART
A4 ADLP comm C/D Level 2. Same as A2 except that it applies to ADLP comm C/D input port.
input port
5/5/1993 5-12

Code
B1 TCAS UART Level 2. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a failure warning condi-
tion. Whenever a TCAS is selected and a bus failure is suspected, the microprocessor
forces the UART output to feedback to the input and verifies that the UART processes
the data properly. This diagnostic code indicates that TCAS UART failed the test.
B2 TCAS unit failure Level 3. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a TDR-94D failure
warning condition. This diagnostic code indicates that TCAS operation is selected and
a TCAS unit failure warning has been received. The TCAS unit should be indicating a
failure warning.
B3 TCAS bus inactive Level 2. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a failure warning condi-
tion. When TCAS is selected, the microprocessor periodically monitors the TCAS input
port for bus activity. This diagnostic code indicates that the TCAS input port is
inactive, or fails to meet certain parity, rate, and status conditions, for a time exceed-
ing the normal update rate which varies according to the type of data to be exchanged.
B4 * TCAS protocol Level 2. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a failure warning condi-
error tion. This diagnostic code indicates that the TCAS data being received does not comply
with the required protocol. * See the note 2 at the end of this table.
C1 Top channel Level 1. This diagnostic code is typically accompanied by a failure warning condition
squitter (TDR-94D and indicates that the top channel squitter function is not functioning properly.
only)
C2 Bottom channel Level 1: Same as C1 except that it applies to the bottom channel.
squitter
D0 Diversity (TDR- Level 1. This diagnostic code is typically accompanied by a failure warning condition
94D only) and indicates an inability to exchange data between the top and bottom channel as
described for diagnostic 41 and 42 and others below.
E1 Top channel mes- This diagnostic code without an accompanying E3 diagnostic code is typically not
sage processor accompanied by a failure warning condition. During self test the bottom channel PAM
is preloaded to generate an ATCRBS or mode s interrogation which is injected into the
top channel for processing. If the message is not properly processed an E1 diagnostic
code is recorded and the process is repeated. If the failure occurs on three consecutive
attempts, an E3 diagnostic code is recorded. An E3 diagnostic code is typically
accompanied by a failure warning condition. Therefore, an E1 diagnostic code without
an accompanying E3 diagnostic code can be ignored unless a pattern is detected which
may indicate a marginal condition.
E2 Bottom channel Same as E1 except that it applies to the bottom channel message processor.
message processor
E3 Top channel hard Level 1. See E1 above.

message processor
E4 Bottom channel Level 1. Same as E3 except that it applies to the bottom channel message processor.
hard message pro-
cessor
5/5/1993 5-13

Code
F1 Mode s discrete Level 3. This diagnostic code is typically not accompanied by a failure warning condi-
address changed tion and indicates that one or more of the mode s address straps has changed since the
previous power-up. These straps are monitored only during power-up. If the straps
change during a flight leg, the condition will not be detected until the next power-up.
F2 TCAS selection Level 3. Same as F1 except that it applies to the TCAS selection strap.
changed
F3 Altitude units se- Level 3. Same as F1 except that it applies to the altitude units (metric or decimal )
lection changed selection strap. (At the time of this publication, this function has not been imple-
mented.)
F4 Max airspeed pro- Level 3. Same as F1 except that it applies to the max airspeed straps.
grams selects
changed
F5 Control port selects Level 3. Same as F1 except that it applies to the control port select straps.
changed
F6 SDI selects Level 3. Same as F1 except that it applies to the SDI select straps.
changed
F7 Single antenna se- Level 3. Same as F1 except that it applies to the single antenna select strap.
lect strap changed
F8 ADLP selection Level 3. Same as F1 except that it applies to the ADLP select strap.
changed
FF Unacceptable ad- Level 3. This diagnostic code occurs when an unacceptable mode s address strapping is
dress detected; e.g., all straps open or all straps shorted to ground. This can occur if the
strapping plug is removed or the common line has opened.
Note 1:
Several of these diagnostic codes may be seen in a diagnostic data download. In most cases they can be ignored. If, however,
one remains for an extended period (more than 1 or 2 seconds) during manual self-test, the unit should undergo more detailed
testing.
Explanation:
During self-test (automatic and manual) a simulated interrogation signal is generated in one receiver (call this the
sending receiver) and is injected into the opposite receiver (call this the target receiver). If the target receiver does not
return a proper response, the appropriate diagnostic is recorded.
Scenario:
If a valid interrogation arrives in the target receiver at the same time as or slightly ahead of the test signal, it will
respond to the valid interrogation and therefore fail the test evaluation. Because the test signal is automatically
generated at least once per second, the probability of this scenario occurring is rather high and increases as a function
of the interrogation rate. If the valid interrogation arrives at the sending or target receiver during the time this test
sequence is in process, the unit will simply not respond to the interrogation. This will most likely be unnoticed.
Note 2:
The B4 diagnostic may be seen repeatedly in a diagnostic data download. From the point of view of the transponder and if it
is not accompanyed by a TCAS FAIL on the TCAS display, it can be ignored.
Explanation:
The B4 diagnostic can occur because of an incompatibility between the TCAS and transponder protocols as defined in
the respective MOPS (Minimum Operating Performance Standards).
5/5/1993 5-14
5.4.4 Flightline Fault Isolation

Procedures
This paragraph provides procedures for Table 5-1 lists the various units which can be
isolating a transponder equipment used. Other similar units may become
malfunction to a particular LRU. The available which also can be used provided the
procedures in table 5-5 require the use of a capabilities are similar to those listed. Refer
test panel, ramp tester, dvm, and a data bus to figure 5-1 for the test setup diagram.
reader/simulator.
Flightline Fault Isolation, Test Setup Diagram

Figure 5-1
5/5/1993 5-15
Table 5-5. Transponder System, Flightline Fault Isolation Procedures.

INSTRUCTIONS
1.0 Setup: Prepare the airplane and transponder system for testing as required. As a
If this is a continuation minimum this will require:
of table 5-2, skip to step Be sure that the air/ground test inhibit, if used,is functional. P2-53 must
7. be grounded to allow a manual self-test.
Set altimeter system(s) for a test altitude (consult airplane manual for
necessary procedures) especially as may be required for TCAS, if used.
Setup IFR ATC-601 Ramp Test Set (or equivalent) and perform the
necessary preliminary tests for it.
If the broadcast method of testing will be used with the ATC-601 Ramp
Test Set, and the installation consists of a TDR-94D diversity
transponder, install an rf boot over the top antenna. If the direct
connection is being used, disconnect both antenna cables from the
transponder mount, connect the ATC-601 to the lower antenna connector
and install a load on the upper connector.
Note: If the transponder installation restricts use of the direct connection

method, the broadcast method should be used unless or until tests indicate the
need for direct connection.
2.0 Inspection: Before applying power to the transponder system, make a visual inspection of
the transponder antenna(s), ATC control, and the r/t. Be sure the r/t is firmly
seated in its mount and there are no obvious signs of loose or damaged
system components. If it is possible, check the antenna cable connections on
the back of the transponder for tightness and the wire harness for obvious
signs of broken wires or dislodged connector pins.
3.0 Power application: At power-up, you may see diAG along with a diagnostic code number. These
Apply power to the tran- random indications should be ignored. You should be concerned primarily with
sponder system. Enter those diagnostics that persist.
an appropriate code into
the control and set for
normal operation.
4.0 Self Test: If the installation uses an ATC control See table 5-3 for an
head other than the CTL-92/92A, you interpretation of the diagnostic
may need to consult the airplane manual codes and table 5-4 for disposition
to determine where the ATC self test re- of LRU.
sults are displayed and in what format
any diagnostics are disclosed.
Test results should not show any diag-
nostic other than 00 (no faults detected).
In the case of the CTL-92/92A units, the
diagnostics are displayed on the control.
4.1.a. Self-test display on CTL- A normal indication on the CTL-92/92A is:

92/92A: The active code display intensity modulates from minimum to maximum.
Press the ATC TEST On any CTL-92/92A controls with CPN ending in other than -2XX:
button on the ATC If an altitude encoder is connected to the control and operating, "AL"
control. is displayed in the upper window and the altitude in thousands of
Note: The installation feet in 100-foot increments is displayed in the lower window.
may feature a remote If altitude data is not being supplied to the control, "AL" is displayed
ATC TEST button in in the upper window and the lower window remains
which case use it instead. "-------".
If the CTL-92/92A has a If a diagnostic condition is detected, the upper window shows "dIAG"
1/2 switch (dual and the two-digit diagnostic code is displayed in the lower window.
transponder control), set Refer to table 5-3 for a listing of the codes, and table 5-4 for an
the 1/2 switch to 2 and interpretation and explanation of each.
repeat the test.
5/5/1993 5-16

INSTRUCTIONS
4.1.b. Self-test display on RTU- A normal indication on the RTU-870/870A

870A/T: is (top to bottom):
Select the ATC page and Upper window: ON ALT
press the ATC test key. Second window: XXXXX FT
Third window: (not used)
Fourth window: TST
Lower window: (ATC code)* RTN
4.1.c. ATC self-test display for Consult the airplane manual for the
systems using the TTC-920G, location and format of transponder and
CTL-92T, or other type of TCAS self-test display, especially the
ARINC 429 transponder / display of any possible ATC diagnostics.
TCAS control.
Press the TEST button on the
control.
5.0 Setup the ATC-601 for AUTO All AUTO TEST items should indicate Otherwise, a failure of any
TEST and select RUN. PASSED. This test takes about 30 sec- one or more of the items,
onds to complete. may indicate a performance
Note: It is possible that tests 13, 14, and problem. In this case, con-
15 indicate FAILED. These items are a sider removing the tran-
function of datalink capabilities and may sponder for additional
not be implemented in which case you can analysis and repair on the
ignore this failure indication. bench.
6.0 Opposite antenna test: The test results should be approximately If there is a substantial
If the direct connection equivalent between the two antenna test. difference in receiver
method is being used, switch sensitivity and/or power
the test set cable to the other output, it may be caused by
antenna port. If the broad- a faulty antenna, antenna
cast method is being used, cable, or connector installa-
move the rf boot to the top (or tion. In this case,
opposite) antenna connector inspection and repair of the
and repeat the test. antennas, cables, or cable
connectors is needed.
Successful completion of all tests to this point verifies a functional transponder system unless there are other
indications of failure (like pilot or ATC complaints). If any test(s) failed or if you need added assurance, continue with
the fault isolation procedures below. These procedures will help you isolate a failure between the control(s) and the
transponder unit.
The steps that follow require the use of a flightline test panel and bus reader. This allows access to the data busses for
detailed fault isolation and data analysis. The test panel is described in paragraph 5.9. Refer to figure 5-1 for a
diagram of the setup needed for this procedure.
If you choose to continue in this series, you should feel free to pick any or all of the tests as seems necessary depending
on the suspected failure. The sequence of tests given is not important. For example, if the self-test test failed to
produce any results, you should perform the Self-test switch test 9.2.1. to be sure that self-test is being commanded
properly.
5/5/1993 5-17

INSTRUCTIONS
7.0 LRU fault isolation:
7.1 IF POWER IS ON, TURN Flightline Test Panel installation:

Setup POWER OFF TO THE TRAN- If you are connecting the test panel between a CTL-92/92A and the
SPONDER (AND TCAS airplane wiring (with no CTL-92T; i.e., a non-TCAS installation) you will
SYSTEM IF USED) need a CSDB reader/simulator like the DataTrac 200.
Remove the control from its If you are connecting the test panel between the CTL-92/92A and the
location and install the airplane wiring which uses a CTL-92T (i.e., a TCAS installation), you will
flightline test panel and need a CSDB reader/simulator like the DataTrac 200 to monitor/simulate
appropriate cable. Connect the CSDB data between the CTL-92/92A and the CTL-92T, and the CSDB
the control to the test panel data feedback from the TDR-94D.
mating connector. If you are connecting the test panel between the Gables 816 Control,
the CTL-92T Transponder/TCAS Control, TTC-920G Transponder/TCAS
Set all test panel data bus Control, or an RTU-870A/T Radio Tuning Unit and the airplane wiring,
switches to MON. Connect you will need an ARINC 429 reader/simulator.
the compatible data bus read-
er RX terminals to the test Note: Do not connect the bus reader TX port to the test panel OUT
panel OUT terminals. If terminals while the control is also connected and operating, unless you set
your bus reader has a second the corresponding test panel switch to EXT INPUT. The test panel IN
RX port, connect it to the test and OUT bus terminal labeling is with reference to the control. That is,
panel IN terminals. OUT is data being transmitted OUT from the control, while IN is data
being received by/into the control. Placing the corresponding switch to the
Set the ATC-601 for ATCRBS EXT INPUT position disconnects the source so that external data can be
REPLY TEST injected without interference. You can always connect the bus reader RX
to either the IN or OUT terminals to monitor the source of that particular
data (test panel switch in the MON position).
8.0 Normal operation test: Note that the bus reader shows the correct data.
Code Turn power on to the system,
verifi- and set the control for 2150 Control Word Format/Label Bus Reader ATC-601 Bus Reader
cation or any ATCRBS code (avoid RX 1 RX 2
the emergency codes). Set for CTL-92/92A CSDB/1E (Note 1) CODE= 2150 (Note 2)
normal operation. Read the CTL-92T ARINC 429/031 (Note 1) CODE= 2150 (Note 2)
appropriate label as shown RTU-870A/T ARINC 429/031 (Note 1) CODE= 2150 (Note 2)
---->. TTC-920G ARINC 429/031 (Note 1) CODE= 2150 (Note 2)
X = any octal character
Note 1: This is the data being transmitted by the control. ( Remember, the CTL-92/92A input/output is CSDB data. In
all other controls the data is ARINC 429.)
CSDB (CTL-92/92A):
DataTrac 200: LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX-XMT-DATA MSEC
1E 00011111 21 50 24 10 0100
ARINC 429:
DataTrac (all): LBL SI 29-HEX-XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 21 50 XX XX 00 1 0100
JcAIR 429E: 031 01 142211 00
Note 2: This is data being returned by the transponder.
CSDB :
DataTrac 200: LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX-RCV-DATA MSEC
1F 00011111 21 50 24 11 0100
ARINC 429:
DataTrac (all): LBL SI 29-HEX-RCV-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 21 50 XX X 11 1 0100
JcAIR 429E: 031 01 142211 11
5/5/1993 5-18

INSTRUCTIONS
8.1 ATC code test: A normally operating transponder should transmit the IDENT code for
Ident Press IDENT on the control about 18 seconds (18 1 s) and then stop. During that time the ATC-601
head or on the test panel. shows CODE=ID2150; the CODE preceded by "ID". If the CODE being
displayed on the ATC-601 is not the same as the code you entered on the
control head recheck your setup to be certain of the code that you are
supplying. The code being supplied and displayed is entirely a software
function and therefore is highly unlikely of failure.
Note: When the TDR-94/94D first begins transmitting the IDENT code, the ATC-601 displays: CODE=ID2150. After
about 18 seconds (18 1) the ID portion disappears but the code number remains. If IDENT was last commanded by
way of a digital word it is necessary to transmit a new digital word with the IDENT bit reset (bit 13 = 0) before IDENT
can be commanded again either by way of the digital word or by a discrete command. If you use the IDENT button on
the control head, the unit will be automatically reset.
9.0 Altitude Test: Altitude information can be supplied to the transponder in a number of formats:
a. ARINC 429,
b. ARINC 575,
c. CSDB, or
d. ARINC 572 (Gillham code); paragraph 5.7 provides encoding and decoding information for Gillham
code.
In a TCAS installation and if the altitude source is a system using the Gillham code, two sources of altitude
data are required. One source is connected directly to the transponder while the other is connected to the
CTL-92/92A control. In the control the Gillham data is converted to CSDB and supplied to the CTL-92T
where it is converted to ARINC 429 and supplied to the transponder. In the transponder the two sources
are compared. If they do not agree within 500-ft, the transponder will set the altitude word SSM output to
NCD (No Computed Data).
If the altitude system is one of the first three listed, the data is supplied directly to the transponder. One or
two altitude sources may be used. In either case they are connected directly to the transponder.
In non-TCAS installations using a CTL-92/92A control, i.e., no CTL-92T, typically the altitude data is
supplied directly to the transponder. It is possible, however, that the Gillham code can also be supplied to
the CTL-92/92A. In this case it is supplied to the transponder as CSDB altitude data.
10.0 Power Test: The TTC-920G uses 115 V ac , 400 Hz, If the power is not correct,
Connect the dvm to the power, all others use +28 V dc. Allow repair airplane wiring or
appropriate power terminals 10% for 115 Vac or 15% for 28 V dc. power source as needed.
on the test panel.
11.0 Self-test switch verification:

Self-test can be initiated in the transponder with either of two inputs; discrete or digital. In most
installations the discrete input to the transponder is not used. In step 4.0 above, self-test was initiated
digitally. Therefore, if step 4.0 was successful, there is very little to be gained by performing this step. If it
failed, however, step 11.1 below provides instructions for verification of the self-test switch by monitoring the
control internal switching function. If the control does not have a discrete self-test input/output, or if it does
not have a self-test switch, step 11.1 cannot be performed.
5/5/1993 5-19

INSTRUCTIONS
11.0 Step 11.2 is using the bus simulator to monitor the digital output from the control and then to generate a
(cont digital self-test command. If step 4.0 above failed, you can perform step 11.2. If the control output is not
d) correct (i.e., the test bits do not change) the probable cause of failure is in the control. If the transponder
still does not respond correctly when a simulated self-test word is injected, the failure appears to be in the
transponder.
Step 11.2 also provides instructions to monitor the feedback from the transponder to the control. In the case
of CSDB data, the feedback word label is 1F. In ARINC 429 the feedback word label is the same as the
control word label; 031. When the transponder is replying to interrogations, the feedback SSM is set to 11.
Otherwise it is the same as the control word.
11.1 Self-test switch test. Dvm shows +5 Vdc ( 1) when no TEST If +5 V dc voltage is not
Connect the dvm to the TEST switch (either on the control, test panel, correct, or is correct but does
terminal on the test panel [ref or elsewhere), is pressed. not change when the switch
to COMM or 28V (-)]. Press Dvm shows less than +3 V dc when any is pressed, the fault appears
TEST on the control (or TEST switch is pressed. to be in the control and it
remote switch if used - not the should be removed for
switch on the test panel.) further testing on the bench.
11.2 Control output test: CSDB (CTL-92/92A):

With the bus reader RCV DataTrac 200: LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX-XMT-DATA MSEC
connected to the test panel 1E 10000101 21 50 24 10 0100
|<---test bit
OUT terminals and the
ARINC 429:
corresponding switch set to
DataTrac (all) * LBL SI 29-HEX-XMT-11 SM P MSEC
MON, you should see the test 031 01 21 50 XX X1 01 1 0100
bits change when you press ||<--test command
the TEST switch.
Self-test using bus simulator: JcAIR 429E: (TX) 031 01 142211 01
||<--test command
If there is no response,
connect the bus reader XMT * Recognize that the column headers are slightly different between the
to the OUT terminals on the DataTrac 200 and the DataTrac 400/400H.
test panel. Set the
corresponding test panel
switch to EXT INPUT and set
the bus reader as shown --->.
In the first part of this test, the control output should be as shown above.
In the second part of this test, the transponder should respond to the simulated self-test command. Be sure
to set the data back to normal (non-test) after the self-test sequence.
As a further verfication of inter-unit communication, you can connect the bus reader RCV to the test panel
IN terminals and set the corresponding switch to MON. This will allow you to monitor the feedback data
from the transponder to the control. You should see the test bits change when you press the test switch
when the self-test command is transmitted. If so, this verifies that the transponder is receiving the
command properly. It is highly unlikely, however, that the transponder can provide a proper feedback
without properly executing a self-test command.
5/5/1993 5-20

INSTRUCTIONS
Note: The remainder of this procedure consists of explanatory information that may be useful for troubleshooting.
The test panel test points labeling reflects the signal or voltage that is found at that point. In most cases, that signal
or voltage depends on certain installation options. Therefore, you will need to consult the airplane manual to
determine which of those options are active or inactive in your installation. Then use the following procedures to verify
the correctness of the installation. The procedures are separated according to the control present in the installation.
CTL- Use a multimeter at the

92 following test panel test
/92A points, connect the reference
dis- lead to COMM (P1-s):
cretes
and DUAL select (P1-m) (-2XX Selected = ground When this pin is grounded
etc controls only): Not selected = near +5-V dc (pull-up the no. 2 CSDB input port is
resistor to +5 V dc internal). defined as the no. 2 TDR
feedback port.
REMOTE select (P1-K) Selected = ground This pin is typically

Not selected = near +5-V dc (pull-up connected to a remote switch
resistor to +5-V dc internal). labeled REMOTE (or
similar). When grounded
the CTL-92/92A:
controls are inoperative,
display shows RMT, and
code is determined by the
remote tuning device.
XPDR STBY No. 1 and No. P1-W is at ground when 1/2 switch on These pins may be used to
2 (P1-W and P1-X) (applies CTL is in the No. 2 position. Near + 5-V operate a relay which
only to CTL-92/92A units with dc when 1/2 switch is in the No.1 controls power to either or
1/2 switch) position. P1-X is always opposite of P1- both transponders. In this
W. case, the high voltage may
be near +28-V.
XPDR ON/OFF, No. 1 and These two pins are identical and at These pins are typically
No.2 (P1-B and P1-C). ground when the CTL function switch is connected to the XPDR
at OFF and open otherwise. ON/OFF; no. 1 to the no. 1
transponder, and no. 2 to
no.2, in dual installations.
SW 28 V DC OUT, No. 1 These two pins provide switch +28 V dc These outputs may be used
and No. 2 (P1-k and P1-j). output through the control. The outputs to switch power to the
are identical and high in all CTL control transponders through an
switch positions other than OFF. external relay.
DATA BUS SHIELDS (P1- Pin P1-D is typically connected to chassis It is important that these
D, P1-L, P1-P, P1-T, and P1- ground. The other are connected to an pins are properly isolated
V) associated data bus shield. All of these from either of the two
pins are internally connected (within the associated data bus lines.
CTL) to 28-V dc common.
TEST (P1-E) and IDENT Both of these pins should reflect a TTL In both cases, the function is
(P1-b) high (near + 5-V dc) when none of the activated at the low level. A
associated switches are depressed and a constant ground (even when
short to ground when the switch is the switch is not pressed)
depressed. should be seen as a failure
and will disallow the
function.
5/5/1993 5-21

INSTRUCTIONS
CTL- Use a multimeter at the following test panel test points, connect the reference lead to COMM (P1/2-32).
92T
dis- Strapping Options 1 through The airplane manual should reveal those strapping options selected. In
cretes 6. all cases, the selected strap should show a short-to-ground while those not
and selected (open strap) should show a TTL high (near +5-V dc).
etc
No. 1 (P1-53): open = All traffic display,
grounded = RA/TA only display selected.
No. 2: (P1-49) Range select

strap:
On units with push- Open = 5/10/20 nmi ranges enabled

buttons and CPN ending in Ground = 6/12 nmi ranges enabled
0XX:
On units with push- Open = 40/20/10/5/3 ranges enabled

buttons and CPN ending in Ground = 6/12 nmi ranges enabled
1XX:
On units without push- Open = 20 nmi range selected

buttons and CPN ending in Ground = 12 nmi range selected
0XX:
On units without push- Open = 5 nmi range selected

buttons and CPN ending in Ground = 12 nmi range selected
1XX:
No. 3: (P1-52) Relative / Open = intruder altitude displayed as relative to own

Absolute intruder altitude Ground = intruder altitude displayed as absolute
display select:
No. 4: (P1-51) Not used
No. 5 (P1-47) Serial / Open = Serial control selected (CTL-92/92A or ARINC 429)
Parallel Transponder Control Ground = Parallel control selected (CTL-90)
Select
No. 6: P1-24) Not used
Control Functions: The airplane manual should reveal the control functions which are active
in your installation. Most control functions are intended for use with a
parallel ATC control head like the CTL-90.
ATC SEL IN, No. 1 P1-18 P1-19 ATC Active or Standby

(P1-19) and No. 2 (P1-18) open open No. 1 & No. 2 in standby
open gnd No. 1 is active
gnd gnd No. 1 is active
gnd open No. 2 is active
SW 28 V DC OUT No. 1 Operable only on units with OFF control switch position. Provides
(P1-25) switched +28 V dc output when switch is other than OFF; 1.5 A max, open
in OFF position.
5/5/1993 5-22

INSTRUCTIONS
CTL- Control Functions (contd):

92T
dis- Reply Lamp Hi (P1-33) and Provides a constant +5 V dc high and switched low output to drive the
cretes Lo (P1-41) CTL-90 reply lamp. The lamp lights while the transponder is replying to
and interrogations.
etc
ALT REP (Altitude Provides a switched low output to drive the CTL-90 altitude reporting
(cont
Reporting) (P1-20) indicator.
d)
GRAY CODE TUNING These 12 lines are the Gray code tuning lines from the CTL-90. These
(From CTL-90) parallel inputs are translated into ARINC 429 and become the label 031
tuning control output to the transponder (ARINC TO XPDR), P1-5/4 and
P1-6/7.
SERIAL DATA
INPUT/OUTPUT:
When used with the In this application, the inter-unit communication formats are:
CTL-92/92A ATC Control
To CTL-92/92A From CTL-92/92A To XPDR(s) From XPDR(s)
CSDB CSDB ARINC 429 ARINC 429
When used with the In this application, the inter-unit communication formats are:
CTL-90 ATC Control
To CTL-90 From CTL-90 To XPDR(s) From XPDR(s)
* ** ARINC 429 ARINC 429
* Data to the CTL-90 is in the form of discretes:

Reply lamp switching
Altitude reporting lamp switching
** Data from the CTL-90 is in the form of discretes:
Test
Ident
ATC Select, No. 1 and No. 2
Gray code
When used with an In this application, the inter-unit communication formats are:
ARINC 429 Control
To ATC Control From ATC Control To XPDR(s) From XPDR(s)
ARINC 429 ARINC 429 ARINC 429 ARINC 429
If all tests passed successfully, restore all equipment to its normal ground operating configuration. Return
the test set to its normal storage location. Careful handling and storage of all ramp test equipment prolongs
the service life and reduces maintenance costs.
5/5/1993 5-23

INSTRUCTIONS
RTU- Use a multimeter at the following test panel test points. Connect the
870- reference lead to the appropriate "L" test point for power measurements, or
A/T, COMM (P1-53) for signal checks.
power
and Discrete ON/OFF: This input must be low (ground) to
light- Connect meter + to enable the RTU. A cross-side switch
ing ON/OFF, meter - to 28 V may be used to select to enable the unit.
DC POWER IN L (No. 1
or No. 2)
28 V dc power input: +28 V dc 5 The No. 1 and No. 2 power

Connect meter + to: inputs are combined (ord)
a. 28 V DC POWER internally. Therefore, the
IN, NO. 1, H unit will operate on either.
b. 28 V DC POWER
IN, NO 2, H
115 v ac lighting bus: 115 V ac 15 Check 115 V ac lighting

Connect meter + to 115 V supply
AC LIGHTING BUS H
and - to L.
28 V dc dimming input: 28 V dc 15, max, depending on dim Check 28 V dimming supply

Connect meter + to DIM, control setting. If dimming is manually
- to COMM controllable, adjust the DIM control and
note that brightness range appears
correct.
RTU- Discretes: Note: With the exception of ON/OFF,

870- those test points labeled DISCRETES
A/T, are all strapping or switching options.
disc- You will need to check the airplane
retes manual to determine which options have
been selected. In most cases, a high
reading is the result of an internal pull-
up to + 12 V dc and indicates the option
is not selected or enabled.
X-SIDE This is an output to a cross-side RTU A Check RTU

low output indicates the on-side RTU is
on. A high (near + 12 V dc) indicates the
cross-side RTU is enabled.
EDAT (Engine Data This is a reversionary input from an Check external switch or
Select, RTU-870A only) external switch. This should be low RTU
(ground) when Engine Data is selected
and high (near +12 V dc) otherwise.
Engine data information can be
monitored at the ARINC 429 ENGINE
DATA No. 1 and No. 2, A/B test points.
MB (Marker Beacon This input is normally connected to an Check external switch or

Sensitivity Select) external MKR BCN switch. In the HI RTU.
(high) position this input should be high.
In the LO position this input should be
low (ground).
5/5/1993 5-24

INSTRUCTIONS
RTU- Discretes (contd): This input is normally connected to an Check external switch or
870- ATC 1 (transponder no. external ATC (select) switch. A low RTU.
A/T, 1) (near ground) input indicates that
disc- transponder no. 1 is selected. A high
retes (+12 V dc pull-up) indicates, no. 2 is
(cont selected.
d)
RTU 2 A ground at this point designates this
RTU as the no. 2 (co-pilots) RTU. An
open (near +12 V dc) is no. 1 (pilots
side).
REM (remote) If remote tuning is available, this pin is Check external switch or
used to enable the remote tune function. RTU.
The external REMOTE TUNE switch
supplies 28 V dc to this pin when remote
tune is enabled. A ground indicates
disable.
RTU- Strapping options: A switched ground at this input causes Check airplane wiring or
870- TST EN (Self test the RTU to turn on all display segments RTU
A/T, enable) and indicators (DME HOLD and
Strap- REPLY). It also transmits the following
pin data word on the ARINC 429 data bus:
op- 1. Diagnostic label 350,
tions 2. Dim bus word label 351, and
3. Self test word label 352 (RTU-870T
only). You will need an ARINC 429 bus
reader, connected to any one of the
ARINC 429 OUT test jacks if you want
to verify this.
N TST (Nav test) A ground at this point disables the NAV Check airplane wiring or
test function. "TEST" is removed from RTU
the VOR or MLS subpages.
MLS 1 and MLS 2 A ground at these points configures the Check airplane wiring or
RTU to display MLS 1/2 on the top line RTU
of the main menu. This is used only on
installations equipment with a
microwave landing system (or systems).
If the installed MLS is on same side as
the RTU, the MLS control words are
added to its ARINC output bus and to
the top line of the VOR subpage.
5/5/1993 5-25

INSTRUCTIONS
RTU- DME (No DME2) A ground at this point causes the pilots Check airplane wiring or
870- RTU to transmit only the channel 1 RTU
A/T ARINC 429 tuning word to the DME. A
Strap- ground at this point on the copilots RTU
pin causes that RTU to transmit only the
op- channel 2 ARINC 429 tuning word to the
tions DME. The copilots RTU transmits
(cont channel 3 data only when the copilots
d) RTU receives channel 3 data from the
remote tuning source. With this pin at
ground, only SDI 01 is transmitted.
ADF (No ADF 2) A ground at this point indicates there is Check airplane wiring or
no ADF on the copilots side. This RTU
causes the RTU to transmit tune data
only for the pilots ADF.
UHF 1 (RTU-870T An open at this point selects vhf 1 Check airplane wiring or
only) COMM 1 as the left-side COMM. A RTU
ground selects UHF 1 as the left side
COMM.
UHF 2 (RTU-870T Same as UHF 1 except as it applies to Check airplane wiring or

only) the copilots side and no. 2 systems. RTU
TCN 1 (TACAN No. 1) A ground at this point selects the Check airplane wiring or
(RTU-870T only) TACAN transceiver for the left-side DME RTU
transceiver. TCN is shown on the
display. An open selects the left-side
DME transceiver .
TCN 2 (TACAN No. 2) Same as TCN 1 except as it applies to Check airplane wiring or
(RTU-870T only) the copilots side. RTU
TCAS (RTU-870T only) There should be a ground at this point if Check airplane wiring or
a TCAS is installed on this airplane. RTU
Open if no TCAS is installed.
ADF X (ADF extended A ground at this point configures the Check airplane wiring or
frequency range) (RTU- RTU to use the 2091 kHz ADF extended RTU
870T only) tuning frequency range with or in place
of the 2081 kHz extended range.
INV TC (Inverse A ground at this point disables the Check airplane wiring or
TACAN) (RTU-870T inverse TACAN function. An open RTU
only) enables.
C EXT (COMM A ground at this point selects the Check airplane wiring or
frequency extension) extended frequency range (above 135.95 RTU
MHz).
N EXT (NAV frequency A ground at this point enables the NAV Check airplane wiring or
extension) frequencies up to 135.00 MHz. RTU
5/5/1993 5-26

INSTRUCTIONS
RTU- A EXT (ADF frequency A ground at this point enables the ADF Check airplane wiring or
870- extension) emergency frequency, 2182 kHz. RTU
A/T
Strap-
pin
op-
tions
(cont
d)
RTU- Data Buses The RTU-870A/T can receive and If the installation is non-
870- transmit ARINC 429 data on three data typical, consult airplane
A/T buses, labeled A, B, and C. This is in manual to determine the
Data addition to the engine data input buses buses active and the
Buses described below. A data bus reader can information that each can be
be used to read the data. Typical labels expected to reveal.
seen here are (update rate):
016*: ATC mode S (5/s),
030: VHF COMM frequency (10/s),
031: ATC control code (5/s),
032: ADF tune frequency (5/s),
034: VHF NAV tune frequency (5/s),
035: DME tune frequency (30/s),
036: MLS channel echo (5/s),
051*: UHF frequency and control (5/s),
053*: TACAN tune frequency and
control (5/s),
154: MLS max select GP angle (5/s),
157: Basic data word 2 (5/s),
166*: DPU mode W and 1 (5/s),
203: ATC altitude code (5/s),
254: FCC mode word 3 (10/s),
270: FMC mode (5/s),
301: VHF COMM frequency (burst),
302: VHF NAV frequency (burst),
303: DME frequency X3 (burst),
304: ADF frequency (burst),
305: ATC code (burst),
320*: Heading word,
376*: UHF frequency (burst), and
377*: TACAN channel (burst).
* = RTU-870T only
Engine Data Buses: Typically the labels seen here are

(update rate):
340: Torque (percent of max) (10/s),
344: Propeller RPM (10/s),
345: Inner turbine temperature (10/s),
and
346: Turbine speed (percent of max in
RPM) (10/s).
If all tests passed successfully, restore all equipment to its normal ground operating configuration. Return the test set
to its normal storage location. Careful handling and storage of all ramp test equipment prolongs the service life and
reduces maintenance costs.
5/5/1993 5-27

INSTRUCTIONS
TTC- Note: You can skip any tests that have been performed earlier as part of this test sequence.
920G, Check the airplane manual to determine the strapping and switching functions used in your installation.
power These procedures assume all functions are active which may not be true in all cases. For example, you will
and never find an installation that uses both 28 V and 5 V lighting.
light-
ing Power Test: Measure aircraft power at both sets of Check aircraft power
Connect multimeter to 115 test points. Allow 10% tolerance. source(s).
VAC POWER IN, NO. 1 and
NO. 2 test points.
Lighting and Dimming Measure lighting power. Note that Check lighting and dimming
Control Test: dimming control works and intensity source. If any legends are
Connect multimeter to appears correct. Note that all switch not properly lit, remove TTC
LIGHTING power test points; and control legends are properly for bench repair.
either 28V or 5 V, as illuminated. It may be necessary to
applicable. If a manual block the cockpit light, especially if this
dimming control is used, is being done outdoors.
adjust it.
Monitor Lamp Power test: Measure the monitor lamp power input. Check power source.
Connect multimeter (+) to This may be 28 V or 12 V. Allow 10%
MON LMP PWR point and (-) tolerance.
to COMM (J1-6)
TTC- Self Test Switch tests:

920G,
man- Connect multimeter, set for Note an open when the switch is not Check TTC.
ual resistance measurement: pressed and a short when the switch is
con- (+) to SELF TEST, pressed.
trols, (-) to COMM (J1-6).
tests
Fault Monitor Lamp Test
Switch tests:
Connect multimeter, set for Note an open when the switch is not Check TTC.
resistance measurement: pressed and a short when the switch is
(+) to MON, pressed.
(-) to COMM (J1-6).
ANTENNA SELECT Switch

tests:
Connect multimeter, set for Note an open when the XPDR switch is Check TTC.
resistance measurement: at position 2 and a short when the
(+) to No. 1, switch is at position 1.
(-) to COMM (J1-6)
(-) to COMM (J2-6)
5/5/1993 5-28

INSTRUCTIONS
TTC- XPDR IN STBY Switch tests:

920G,
man- Connect multimeter, set for Note an open when the XPDR switch is Check TTC.
ual resistance measurement: at position 2 and a short when the
con- (+) to No. 1, switch is at position 1.
trols, (-) to COMM (J1-6)
tests
(con-
td)
(-) to COMM (J2-6)
REP ALT SEL (Reporting

Altitude Select) Switch tests:
Connect multimeter, set for Note an open when the switch is at Check TTC.
resistance measurement: position 2 and a short when the switch is
(+) to NO. 1, at position 1.
(-) to COMM (J1-6)
Connect multimeter, set for Note an open when the switch is at Check TTC.
resistance measurement: position 1 and a short when the switch is
(+) to NO. 2, at position 2.
(-) to COMM (J2-6)
TTC- AIR/GRD Tests:

920G,
disc- Connect multimeter, set for Note: This input is normally connected Check airplane wiring
retes resistance measurement: to an airplane strut switch. With weight
tests, (+) to NO. 1 IN, on wheels this point should show a short
(con- (-) to COMM (J1-6) to chassis ground (CHAS GND, J1-8 or
td) (NO. 1 OUT is identical) J2-8). If this function has been defeated
for test purposes, it should show an
open.
Connect multimeter, set for Note: This input is normally connected Check airplane wiring
resistance measurement: to an airplane strut switch. With weight
(+) to NO. 2 IN, on wheels this point should show a short
(-) to COMM (J1-6) to chassis ground. If this function has
(NO. 2 OUT is identical) been defeated for test purposes, it should
show an open.
Transponder Fail I/O Tests:
TTC- Connect multimeter, set for dc 28 V dc at either of these points Note: Not all diagnostic
920G, voltage measurement: indicates that no detected failure exists conditions produce a failure
Xpdr (+) to TRANSPONDER FAIL, in the applicable transponder. If this warn (flag) output. Refer to
fail 1-IN, (-) to COMM (J1-6) voltage is low, you may need to use an tables 5-3 and 5-4.
warn ARINC 429 data bus reader to determine
tests Connect multimeter, set for dc the diagnostic condition - see Diagnostic
voltage measurement: Code Retrieval Procedures below.
(+) to TRANSPONDER FAIL,
2-IN, (-) to COMM (J2-6)
Connect multimeter, set for dc This is an inverted failure warn output. Check TTC.
voltage measurement: If either of the two transponder fail
(+) to TRANSPONDER FAIL, inputs are low, this point should be high.
OUT, (-) to COMM (J1-6) If both inputs are high, this point should
be low.
5/5/1993 5-29

INSTRUCTIONS
TTC- Connect an ARINC 429 bus Set the bus reader to read ARINC 429
920G, reader to the ARINC 429 word labels 13, 15, or 16. The words are
data OUT NO. 1 jack. Select defined as follows:
bus transponder no. 1.
output
tests Label 013:
Bit(s) Definition
0-7 Label (in octal): bits 0,1 = MSB, 2-4 = second digit, 5-7 = LSB,
8, 9 SDI (source destination (or data) identifier),
10 Intruder altitude (ABS/REL), ABS = 1
11, 12 Altitude select, bits 12/11: 00 = normal, 10 = above, 01 = below, 11 = unrestricted
13 Display: all traffic/threat traffic, all = 0
14 - 20 (not used)
21 - 28 TCAS range (see below)
29, 30 SSM (see below)
31 Parity bit
Label 015:
Bit(s) Definition
10 - 16 Altitude A limits (see airplane manual)
17 - 23 Altitude B limits (see airplane manual)
24 - 28 (not used)
31 Parity bit
Label 016:
Bit(s) Definition
10 Altitude reporting, on/off, 1 = off,
11 Ident mode
12, 13 Display control
14 - 16 Sensitivity control
17 - 19 Digit 4 code
31 Parity bit
TCAS range bit definition: SSM definition (bits 30/29):

bit 21 = 0.5 nmi 00 = normal operation
bit 22 = 1.0 nmi 01 = NCD (no computed data)
bit 23 = 2.0 nmi 10 = Functional test
bit 24 = 4.0 nmi 11 = Failure warn
bit 25 = 8.0 nmi
bit 26 = 16.0 nmi
bit 27 = 32.0 nmi
bit 28 = 64.0 nmi
5/5/1993 5-30

INSTRUCTIONS
TTC- If all tests passed successfully, restore all equipment to its normal ground operating configuration. Return
920G the test set to its normal storage location. Careful handling and storage of all ramp test equipment prolongs
(con- the service life and reduces maintenance costs.
td)
Table 5-6. Transponder System, Diagnostic Data Retrieval Procedures.
TEST NO and BUS READER, TX SETUP RESULTS and COMMENTS

DATA TITLE
1.0 Note: These procedures apply only to installations using the CTL-92T or the RTU-870A/T.
Introduction Diagnostic information is available only on the ARINC 429 data bus. Installations using a TTC-
920G or a CTL-90, do not return this bus to the control. Installations using a CTL-92/92A only use
the CSDB bus which does not carry diagnostic data beyond the current diagnostic code which is
displayed on the CTL-92/92A during self test. Refer to paragraph 5.5 for added information on
Diagnostic Data Retrieval and Interpretation.
2.0 Setup These procedures use the same setup as used for the procedures in table 5-5, shown on figure 5-1.
In all cases, the XMT word label is 277 and the response word label is 351.
Note: Throughout these procedures be sure the SSM is always set to 11. If you are using the
DataTrac 400/400H you need change only digits 5 and 6 of the data fields; digit 1 (e.g., the 6 in step
3.0) is always set automatically. This bit is set by data word bits 29 through 32. On the DataTrac
200 you set the SI field. For the sake of simplicity, the column headers are not shown on the
DataTrac display examples below.
3.0 Soft-ware Data request: Response form (data may differ):

Rev Status DataTrac 400/400H XMT: DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
277 00 00 00 00 FD 00 1 0100 351 10 90 26 92 97 00 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT: DataTrac 200 RCV:
277 00 00000 00 1 0100 351 10 81348 00 1 0100
JcAIR 429E TX, label 277: JcAIR 429E RX, label 351:
E00000 902692
This shows a SRS = 10-26-92
4.0 Total Pwr- Data request: Six-digit data field displays count in decimal
On Cycle DataTrac 400/400H XMT: form.
Counter 277 01 E0 00 01 FD 11 1 0100 DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
DataTrac 200 XMT: 351 00 60 02 00 97 11 1 0100
277 01 00000 11 1 0100 DataTrac 200 RCV:
JcAIR 429E TX, label 277: 351 00 00100 11 1 0100
E00001 JcAIR 429E RX, label 351:
600200
This shows a POCC = 200.
5.0 Total Data request: Six-digit data field displays count in decimal
Fault Counter DataTrac 400/400H XMT: form.
277 10 E0 00 02 FD 11 1 0100 DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
DataTrac 200 XMT: 351 00 60 02 08 97 11 1 0100
277 10 00000 11 1 0100 DataTrac 200 RCV:
JcAIR 429E TX, label 277: 351 00 00104 11 1 0100
600002 JcAIR 429E RX, label 351:
600208
This shows a TFC = 208.
5/5/1993 5-31

DATA TITLE
6.0 Total Data request: Six-digit data field displays count in decimal
Pwr-on DataTrac 400/400H XMT: form.
Timer (Hrs) 277 11 60 00 03 FD 11 1 0100 DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
DataTrac 200 XMT: 351 11 60 00 77 97 11 1 0100
277 11 00000 11 1 0100 DataTrac 200 RCV:
JcAIR 429E TX label 277: 351 11 0003A 11 1 0100
600077
This shows a TPOTH = 77.
7.0 Total Note: If you watch this data item for a minute or less you will see the data increment.
Pwr-on
Timer (Min) Data request: Six-digit data field displays count in decimal
DataTrac 400/400H XMT: form.
277 00 E0 00 04 FD 11 1 0100 DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
DataTrac 200 XMT: 351 11 60 00 11 97 11 1 0100
277 00 00002 11 1 0100 DataTrac 200 RCV:
JcAIR 429E TX label 277: 351 11 00008 11 1 0100
600011
This shows a TPOTM = 11.
8.0 Last Pwr- Data request: Six-digit data field displays count in decimal
on Cycle DataTrac 400/400H XMT: form.
Fault Cntr 277 01 60 00 05 FD 11 1 0100 DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
DataTrac 200 XMT: 351 10 E0 00 02 97 11 1 0100
277 01 00002 11 1 0100 DataTrac 200 RCV:
JcAIR 429E TX label 277: 351 10 00000 11 1 0100
600002
This shows a LPOCFC = 2.
9.0 Last Data request: Six-digit data field displays in the form
Maintenance DataTrac 400/400H XMT: MMDDYY.
Date 277 11 60 00 07 FD 11 1 0100 Six-digit data field displays count in decimal
DataTrac 200 XMT: form.
277 11 00002 11 1 0100 DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
JcAIR 429E TX label 277: 351 11 E6 29 93 97 11 1 0100
600007 DataTrac 200 RCV:
351 11 314C8 11 1 0100
JcAIR 429E RX, label 351:
E62993
This shows a LMD = 6-29-93 (June 29, 1993)
10.0 Last Note: In this sequence you must watch the label 351 word carefully. The UUT may transmit
Pwr-on several words, each with a different diagnostic code, at 5-second intervals. The first transmission is
Cycle Fault the contents of the current Total Power-on Cycle count buffer (see step 4.0; above). This is followed,
Data in 5-seconds intervals, with a transmission of each of the secondary diagnostic codes encountered
during the most recent power-on cycle (auto self-test). This sequence is automatic and non-
interruptable. If you are using the JcAIR 429E, be prepared to write down the data as it appears.
The DataTrac units will retain the data. The final label 351 word is likely to be a word similar to
XXXEOF which translates into "End of File".
5/5/1993 5-32

DATA TITLE
10.0 Last Data request: Six-digit data field displays count in decimal
Pwr-on DataTrac 400/400H XMT: form.
Cycle Fault 277 00 60 00 10 FD 11 1 0100 DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
Data (contd) DataTrac 200 XMT: 351 00 E0 02 00 97 11 1 6800
277 00 00008 11 1 0100 351 10 60 00 82 97 11 1 6800
JcAIR 429E TX, label 277: 351 11 E0 0E 0F 97 11 1 6800
600010 DataTrac 200 RCV:
351 00 00100 11 1 4999
351 10 00040 11 1 4999
351 11 00706 11 1 4999
JcAIR 429E RX, label 351:
E00200
600082
E00E0F
11.0 Continue Note: This step can be seen as an extension of the previous step by retrieving diagnostic data stored
(prior) during earlier power-on cycles. Data delivery and interpretation is the same as step 10.0. The most
Pwr-on recent 16 power-on cycle sequences are stored and are read by incrementing data field bit 6 (bit 5 on
Cycles Fault the DataTrac 200) 1 through F (Hex).
Data
Data request: Same as step 10.0 except one set of data for
DataTrac 400/400H XMT: each interrogation.
277 00 60 00 11 FD 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT: A convenient Record Chart is provided,
277 01 00008 11 1 0100 following paragraph 5.5.14.2, for manually
JcAIR 429E TX, label 277: entering the data.
600011
12.0 Fast Note: This step is for those with access to an automated means of requesting, capturing, and
Data analyzing the data. Such facilities are available from sources other than Collins. For example,
Download Atlantic Instruments supplies hardware and software, operating with the DataTrac 400/400H, for
automated downloading of the captured data on a PC for detailed analysis and storage. For manual
(slower) data download, use step 13.0 below.
Data request: Refer to paragraph 5.5.13.2 for a detailed

DataTrac 400/400H XMT: description of the data that is transmitted
277 00 60 00 50 FD 11 1 0100 here. If you are retrieving data manually,
DataTrac 200 XMT: e.g., with the JcAIR 429E, use step 13.0
277 00 00028 11 1 0100 instead. In this step, step 12.0, the data is
JcAIR 429E TX, label 277: transmitted to quickly to be read manually.
600050 See note below.
13.0 Slow Note: This step is essentially the same as the previous step, step 12.0. Here, however, the data
Data output rate is slower; each sequence is transmitted for a 5-second period, separated by a break
Download transmission 0FFFFH.
Data request: Same as step 12.0 except the data is

DataTrac 400/400H XMT: transmitted at 5--second interval.
277 00 60 00 51 FD 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT:
277 01 00028 11 1 0100
JcAIR 429E TX, label 277:
600051
Note: The DataTrac 400/400H units have a Break Data Review feature which can be effectively used here to capture
the data. Consult the applicable manual for the necessary operating procedures.
Return the test set to its normal storage location. Careful handling and storage of all ramp test equipment prolongs
the service life and reduces maintenance costs.
5/5/1993 5-33
5.4.5 ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURES item. Panel A refers to the abbreviated

panel shown schematically in figure 5-4.
5.4.5.1 Introduction Panel E is the enhanced version shown in
figures 5-3 and 5-5. TE items keyed A and
The Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) should E can be used with either panel. TE items
be used to verify that the equipment is keyed A only can be used only with the
operational; that no shipping damage has abbreviated version; items keyed E are for
occurred. Verifying equipment operation before use only on the enhanced version.
installation helps to isolate most problems
discovered after installation. The procedures in 5.4.5.3 Test Panel Options
this paragraph can also be seen as a Return to
Service Test (RTS). In this scenario a the Table 5-7 shows two test panels. Option
pilot complaint and the flightline test is not 1A is the enhanced version and will allow
conclusive. Thus the unit is removed from an use of a databus reader and various
airplane and tested on the bench to isolate a controls and control simulators in addition
malfunction between the unit or the airplane to a number of altitude sources. The
installation. If the unit performs properly on details of this panel are included in
the bench using the RTS, it can be returned to paragraph 5.8 Option 1B is the
service. The procedures in this paragraph abbreviated version mentioned in
must not be seen as the equivalent of a Final paragraph 5.4.5.2. It is expected that the
Performance Test (FPT). An FPT must be abbreviated test panel is assembled locally.
performed after any repair operation and is The enhanced version can also be locally
considerably more detailed than this ATP. The assembled or purchased from a number of
FPT is provided in the TDR-94/94D Component suppliers. Those known suppliers are
Maintenance Manual. included in the vendor listing in table 5-8.
The procedures are provided in four different The abbreviated test panel, when used with
procedures. The procedure chosen depends on the automatic test capability of the ATC-
equipment available and on the extent to which 601, satisfies the requirements of
testing is to be performed. The first procedure ADVISORY CIRCULAR NO 43.13-6A,
uses the CTL-92/92A CSDB control and an dated 11/11/77; Subject: Automatic
abbreviated version of the test panel. This Pressure Altitude Encoding Systems and
procedure satisfies a minimum level of Transponder Maintenance and Inspection
acceptance testing by verifying that the UUT is Practices. The IFR ATC-601 Test Set, or
able to respond to CSDB tuning data and equivalent, can be used with either of the
report any internal diagnostics that may exist. two panel versions.
The remaining procedures utilize the enhanced If you are using a test panel built according
version of test panel and provide a greater level to instructions in an earlier version of this
of I/O testing capability. These procedures manual, it may need to be updated. Refer
differ only in the particular data bus analyzer to paragraph 5.8.1 for update information.
being used.
5.4.5.2 ATP Setup Description
Table 5-7 is a list of the equipment required for

this ATP. The equipment includes an IFR
ATC-601 Mode S Test Set. If an other test set
is used, you should be sure that it is capable of
performing the tests as defined in these
procedures and as listed in paragraph 5.4.2.
The right hand column in table 5-7 identifies

the test panel required for the use of that TE
5/5/1993 5-34
Table 5-7. Equipment Required for ATP
Item Manufacturer Mfg Part Number Purpose Panel

A/E
Test Panel Locally fabricated See figure 5-3 and 5-5 To interconnect E
Option 1A equipment for ATP
Test Panel Locally fabricated See figure 5-4 To interconnect A

Option 1B equipment for ATP
ATC/Mode S Test IFR Systems, Inc. ATC-601 For rf testing A,E

Set Wichita, KS
ARINC Bus Reader Atlantic Instr. DataTrac 200, Data Trac For bus monitor and E
Option 2A Melbourne, FL 400, or DataTrac 400H simulation
ARINC Bus Reader JcAIR 429E ARINC 429 For bus monitor and E
Option 2B Industrial Airport, KS Transmitter / Receiver simulation
Transponder Collins CTL-92 or CTL-92A Transponder control A,E

Control Transponder Control
Option 3A
Interconnect cable Same as test panel See figure 5-6 For CTL-92/92A A,E
for option 3A interface to test panel
Transponder Collins RTU-870A or RTU-870T Transponder or E

Control Radio Tuning Unit transponder/TCAS
Option 3B control
Interconnect cable Same as test panel See figure 5-7 For RTU-870/870A E
for option 3B interface to test panel
Transponder Collins TTC-920G TCAS / Transponder control E

Control Option 3C Transponder Control
Interconnect cable Same as test panel See figure 5-8 For TTC-920G interface E
for option 3C to test panel
RF load Omni-Spectra 3101-6100-00 RF termination of A,E

unused antenna port
Interconnect cables Locally fabricated or the See figure 5-9 To connect bus reader E
for Bus Readers same as test panel and control / altitude
and control simulator to test panel
simulators
28 V dc power any 5 A minimum capability For test setup power A,E

supply
Scope any any For suppression test A,E
Table 5-8. Equipment Suppliers
Supplier Address Product
IFR Systems, Inc. 10200, West York Street ATC-601 Ramp Test Set
Wichita, KS 67215
Atlantic Instruments, Inc. P.O. Box 021466 DataTrac 400 DataTrac 400H and
Melbourne,FL 32902 DataTrac 200 Databus Analyzers
JcAIR 400 Industrial Parkway, AcceptanceTest Panel, Flightline Test Panel,

Industrial Airport, KS 66031 and 429E ARINC 429 Transmitter/Receiver
Avionics Specialist, Inc 3833 Premier Ave. Acceptance Test Panel and Flightline Test
Memphis, TN 38118 Panel
5/5/1993 5-35
The enhanced version of test panel, also 5.4.5.5 Gillham Code Simulator
satisfies these requirements, and offers
additional capabilities for more complete I/O The TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder
testing as follows: Acceptance Test Panel used here includes a
built-in Gillham code (ARINC 572)
Gillham altitude simulation, simulator. The Gillham Code Altitude
Gillham altitude switching for direct or Tests in this section include a listing of a
through CTL testing, number of altitudes and corresponding
Mode S address code selection, Gillham code switch settings. Set the
Control type selection, corresponding switch down (SEL) for an
Control input port selection, active code selection, and set the switch up
Digital altitude type selection; ARINC 429, (OFF) for an inactive selection.
ARINC 575, or CSDB,
TCAS i/o bus verification, 5.4.5.6 ATC Setup Description
Digital altitude and control port selection,
Manual ident, If you are using this setup for the first
Crossfeed switching, time, check that 28 volts appears only on
Side 1/Side 2 switching, the correct pins. Use the schematic
Output port selection, and diagram shown in figure 5-4 or 5-5 as
Use of a data bus analyzer. applicable to the panel you are using.
The control interface cables, shown in figures WARNING: Do not use a standard
5-6, 5-7, and 5-8 can be used with either panel. multimeter probe when making continuity
tests to the ProLine II UUT mating
5.4.5.4 Control Panel Options connector. These types of probes have been
known to cause the contact forks to break
Some type of transponder control is required resulting in unreliable operation. It is far
with either test panel. The abbreviated version better to fabricate one or two test probes
uses the CTL-92/92A Control. The enhanced using a short length of flexible 22 or 26
version can use any of the currently available AWG wire, terminated at one end with a
controls or a simulator. If you have a databus mating blade contact like those used in the
receiver/transmitter, like the DataTrac 400, UUT connector. Terminate the other end
DataTrac 400H, or DataTrac 200, by Atlantic with a small alligator clip or tip jack to
Instruments, it can be used to simulate an connect to the multimeter lead.
ARINC 429 control. The DataTrac 200 can
also simulate a CSDB control. If you plan to
used the TTC-920G TCAS control, be aware
that it requires 115 Vac, 400 Hz, power which
is not provided in the test panel. The
interconnect cable, figure 5-8, has a patch
provision for 115 Vac power input. Table 5-8 is
a listing of suppliers for the various test
equipment items as well as the test panel.
5/5/1993 5-36
Interconnect the equipment as shown in figure

5-2. The data bus readers are not used with SWITCH POSITION
the abbreviated test panel. Be sure that the rf
connections to the antenna connectors are fully UUT POWER: OFF
inserted and that the i/o mating connectors are EXT STBY: STBY
firmly seated before applying power. XFEED: OUT
Terminate the unused antenna port with a SELF TEST: EN
TNC 50 rf termination as identified in table TCAS/NO TCAS: NO TCAS
5-1 and table 5-7. SDI: SIDE 1
AIR: AIR
Turn on the ATC-601 Test Set, or equivalent, ANT: DL
and exercise the self test routine. If the test AUTO ALT: OFF
set is operational continue with the test. REP ALT SEL: PA
Otherwise, repair the test set. DATA LINK SEL: A/B
If you are using the test panel shown on figure BURST TUNE: OFF
5-5, set the switches as follows: The DATALINK: NO ADLP
abbreviated panel has only the UUT POWER CONTROL DATA SELECT:
and EXT STBY switches. If you are using a ARINC PORT: PA
test panel built according to instructions in an OUTPUT PORT SELECT:
earlier version of this manual, it may require ARINC 429 PORT
modification. Refer to paragraph 5.8.1. A
ARINC 572 ALT IN: TO TDR
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
SOURCE SELECT: SEL
Gillham Code switches:
All OFF except C2 and B1 to SEL (2,
500 ft)
MAX AIRSPEED: All OFF
MODE S ADDRESS SELECT: All OFF
except: P1-35, 36, 37, 39, 41, 42, 46, 51, 56.
(Hex code: 3AC421, Octal: 16542041)
6/15/1995 5-37
Acceptance Test, Test Setup Diagram

Figure 5-2
6/15/1995 5-38
5.4.5.7 Minimum Acceptance Test, Using a panel for equipment interconnection.

CSDB Control and the Abbreviated Test Successful completion of these procedures
Panel verifies the performance of the UUT by
providing reasonable assurance of the
The procedures in table 5-9 use a CSDB control functional integrity of the transmitter,
like the CTL-92/92A to provide transponder receiver, the CSDB control input, and
control and the abbreviated version of test internal data handling.
Table 5-9. Minimum Acceptance Test Procedures, Using a CSDB Control

and the Abbreviated Test Panel
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
1.0 Setup If not already done, connect equipment as shown in figure 5-2.
Connect the CTL-92/92A using the cable shown in figure 5-6.
Connect the ATC-601 (or equivalent) to the UUT bottom antenna connector.
Connect and rf termination to the top antenna connector.
Connect power to the power jacks - observe proper polarity.
Be sure POWER switch is OFF and EXT STBY switch is at STBY.
The bus reader is not needed in this setup.
2.0 Initial Power application

Test
Set test panel POWER switch to ON
Set CTL to any valid ATC code; e.g. 1234
Set CTL switch to STBY ATC-601 REPLY lamp is off; no replies.
Set CTL switch to OPR No change.
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR ATC-601 REPLY lamp lights; UUT is replying
to the interrogations.
3.0 UUT Self Press the TEST button; either on the test
Test panel or on the CTL.
Notice any diagnostic code that may be displayed on the CTL. If diAG and a diagnostic code is
displayed, refer to table 5-3 and 5-4 for an interpretation. If a code from 10 to 70 (inclusive),
C(), or D0 is displayed, the UUT should be rejected. Any other code may not be indicative of
an equipment failure but rather the result of an inactive data bus. As a general rule in testing
a UUT with CPN ending in -002, those diagnostic conditions accompanied by an extinguished
FLT MON (fault monitor) lamp on test panel, should be seen as cause for unit rejection.
Others may be the result of the an incomplete equipment complement and may not be
indicative of an equipment failure.
4.0 Test Set, Follow the instructions in the Test Set Ensure that all tests pass. See note below.
Auto Test operation manual for the Auto Test mode and
execute the test.
Set the test panel POWER switch to Off
Switch the RF connector on the UUT from top

to bottom (or bottom to top)
Repeat the Auto Test sequence. Ensure that all tests pass. See note below.
5/5/1993 5-39
Table 5-9. Minimum Acceptance Test Procedures, Using a CSDB Control

and the Abbreviated Test Panel (Cont).
This completes the minimum test requirement.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note. The AUTO TEST sequence will indicate FAILED even when certain tests result in a NO REPLY condition. The NO
REPLY conditions are the result of no ADLP (Airborne Data Link Processor) data being supplied in this setup. This
same condition is likely to occur when using the ATC-601 as a ramp tester when testing an installation not equipped
with an ADLP. It is also possible that the AUTO TEST fails because the UUT sensitivity is more than -77.0 dBm. If you
find this to be the case, recognize that Collins prefers that a sensitivity (MTL) greater than 77.0 be seen as acceptable.
Obviously, an MTL approaching -80 dBm tends to indicate a problem with test equipment calibration. To verify that
the test can be seen as successful, proceed as follows:
When the test sequence is completed and the ATC-601 stops (as indicated by no INTERR lamp off, you will see a
screen as follows:
** AUTO TEST - FAILED **

MODES TESTED - A,C,S FREQ: 1089.92 MHz
MODES PASSED - A,C.S ERP: 55 dBm
MODES FAILED - -> MTL: -77 dBm
DIVERSITY ISOLATION: >40 dB
Press RUN to start
Verify the test results as follows:
Use the SELECT up arrow or down arrow key to scroll through the following list of tests performed. If you use the up
arrow, you will see the sequence as listed from top to bottom. If you use the down arrow, you will see the sequence is
reverse order.
1. ** MTL DIFFERENCE TEST - PASSED **

2. ** DIVERSITY TEST - PASSED **
3. ** FREQUENCY TEST - PASSED **
4. ** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
5. ** MODE S UF21 TEST - NO REPLY **
8. ** MODE S UF11 TEST - PASSED **
12. ** SPR ON/OFF TEST - PASSED **
13. ** INVALID ADDRESS TEST - PASSED **
14. ** MODE S ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
15. ** ATC ONLY ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
16. ** SLS LEVEL TEST - PASSED **
17. ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST - PASSED **
18. ** REPLY JITTER TEST - PASSED **
19. ** REPLY DELAY TEST - PASSED **
At this point, another press of the arrow key will redisplay the first item; either 1. or 19., depending which arrow was
used.
In each case, the screen also shows the particular test parameter and the test result. If the test has failed, this value
can be compared to the required value to gain more definitive insight into the reason for the failure.
5/5/1993 5-40
5.4.5.8 Minimum Acceptance Test, Using completion of these procedures verifies the
a ARINC 429 Control and the Abbreviated performance of the UUT by providing
Test Panel reasonable assurance of the functional
integrity of the transmitter, receiver, the
The procedures in table 5-10 use an ARINC ARINC 429 control input, and internal data
429 control like the RTU-870A/T to provide handling.
transponder control and the abbreviated
version of test panel for equipment
interconnection. Successful
Table 5-10. Minimum Acceptance Test Procedures, Using an ARINC 429 Control
and the Abbreviated Test Panel
1.0 Setup If not already done, connect equipment as shown in figure 5-2.
Connect the ARINC 429 control using the cable shown in figure 5-7 or 5-8.
Connect the ATC-601 (or equivalent) to the UUT bottom antenna connector.
Connect and rf termination to the top antenna connector.
Connect power to the power jacks - observe proper polarity.
Be sure POWER switch is OFF and EXT STBY switch is at STBY.
The bus reader is not needed in this setup.
2.0 Initial Power application

Test
Set test panel POWER switch to ON
Set CTL to any valid ATC code; e.g. 7777
Set CTL switch to STBY ATC-601 REPLY lamp is off; no replies.
Set CTL switch to OPR No change.
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR ATC-601 REPLY lamp lights; UUT is replying
to the interrogations.
3.0 UUT Self Press the TEST button; either on the test
Test panel or on the control.
Notice any diagnostic code that may be displayed. If a diagnostic code is displayed, refer to
table 5-3 and 5-4 for an interpretation. If a code from 10 to 70 (inclusive), C(), or D0 is
displayed, the UUT should be rejected. Any other code may not be indicative of an equipment
failure but rather the result of an inactive data bus. As a general rule in testing a UUT with
CPN ending in -002, those diagnostic conditions accompanied by an extinguished FLT MON
(fault monitor) lamp on test panel, should be seen as cause for unit rejection. Others may be
the result of the an incomplete equipment complement and may not be indicative of an
equipment failure.
4.0 Test Set, Follow the instructions in the Test Set Ensure that all tests pass. See note below.
Auto Test operation manual for the Auto Test mode and
execute the test.
Set the test panel POWER switch to Off
Switch the RF connector on the UUT from top

to bottom (or bottom to top)
Repeat the Auto Test sequence. Ensure that all tests pass. See note below.
5/5/1993 5-41
Table 5-10. Minimum Acceptance Test Procedures, Using an ARINC 429 Control
and the Abbreviated Test Panel (Cont).
This completes the minimum test requirement.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REPLY conditions are the result of no ADLP (Airborne Data Link Processor) data being supplied in this setup. This
same condition is likely to occur when using the ATC-601 as a ramp tester when testing an installation not equipped
with an ADLP. It is also possible that the AUTO TEST fails because the UUT sensitivity is more than -77.0 dBm. If you
find this to be the case, recognize that Collins prefers that a sensitivity (MTL) greater than 77.0 be seen as acceptable.
Obviously, an MTL approaching -80 dBm tends to indicate a problem with test equipment calibration. To verify that
the test can be seen as successful, proceed as follows:
When the test sequence is completed and the ATC-601 stops (as indicated by no INTERR lamp off, you will see a
screen as follows:

MODES TESTED - A,C,S FREQ: 1089.92 MHz
MODES PASSED - A,C.S ERP: 55 dBm
MODES FAILED - -> MTL: -77 dBm
Press RUN to start
Use the SELECT up arrow or down arrow key to scroll through the following list of tests performed. If you use the up
arrow, you will see the sequence as listed from top to bottom. If you use the down arrow, you will see the sequence is
reverse order.
1. ** MTL DIFFERENCE TEST - PASSED **

2. ** DIVERSITY TEST - PASSED **
3. ** FREQUENCY TEST - PASSED **
4. ** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
12. ** SPR ON/OFF TEST - PASSED **
13. ** INVALID ADDRESS TEST - PASSED **
14. ** MODE S ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
15. ** ATC ONLY ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
16. ** SLS LEVEL TEST - PASSED **
17. ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST - PASSED **
18. ** REPLY JITTER TEST - PASSED **
19. ** REPLY DELAY TEST - PASSED **
At this point, another press of the arrow key will redisplay the first item; either 1. or 19., depending which arrow was
used.
In each case, the screen also shows the particular test parameter and the test result. If the test has failed, this value
can be compared to the required value to gain more definitive insight into the reason for the failure.
5/5/1993 5-42
5.4.5.9 Procedures using the DataTrac 400 or DataTrac 400H Databus Analyzer
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,

Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer
1.0 Setup Note: If you are using a Test Panel built according to instruction provided in a previous edition of this
manual, it may be necessary to upgrade the panel. Refer to paragraph the Special Tools and Fixture
Section.
If not already done, connect equipment as shown in figure 5-2.
Connect DATATRAC as follows using cables shown in figure 5-9.
XMT 1 to test panel DIGITAL CONTROL port,
Parallel connect XMT 1 to test panel PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE PORT,
RCV 1 to test panel DATA BUS READER port.
Connect the ATC-601 to the UUT bottom antenna connector.
Connect an rf termination to the TOP antenna port.
Connect power to test panel power jacks - observe proper polarity.
Preset the switches as shown in paragraph 5.4.4 above. Be sure POWER switch is OFF and EXT
STBY switch is at STBY.
On test panel, set the MODE S ADDRESS switches to any combination except all OFF or all to SEL.
If all switches are set OFF or all set SEL, a diagnostic code FF will result.
1.1 Setup Turn the DATATRAC ( ) on and set the -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
RCV 1, and XMT 1 screen -----> ... no data present ...
-ON-------------XMT 1 ----------12.5 KHz

(See notes 1 and 2 that follow test step Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
031 01 15 66 C1 98 00 1 0100
1.2) 203 01 64 00 01 C1 11 1 0100
Turn on On test panel: If the unit has been in service and there is a possibility of
TDR-94/94D Set POWER switch to ON an over-current condition, monitor the power supply
Monitor current. If OK: current output. The setup should draw no more than 1.5
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR A. Typically it draws about 0.9 to 1.1 A when the UUT is
Monitor current. transmitting.
Setup Turn the ATC-601 on and press SELECT ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST - NOT RUN **
(power-up) for the screen --------------> (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
Press RUN to start
See Note in next cell below.
1.2 ARINC 429 On the ATC-601, press RUN UUT responds to interrogations as indicated by a lighted
tuning test ATC-601 screen ---------> XFEED OUT lamp on the test panel and a lighted REPLY
lamp on the ATC-601.
Note: When power is applied and proper
control data is supplied, the TDR-94/94D ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
should turn on the XFEED OUT lamp (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
almost immediately. The FAULT MON CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
lamp may be off for a few seconds and ***** TEST RUNNING *****
then turn on. A lighted FAULT MON lamp
should generally be seen as a no-fault To change the CODE, see note 1 below.
indication. See table 5-3. To change the ALT, see note 2 below.
The DATATRAC ( ) RCV 1 display -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz

becomes ---------> 203 01 64 00 01 C1 11 1 0200
031 01 F5 66 81 98 00 1 0200
350 01 60 00 01 17 11 1 0200
... no data present ...
Note: Any other labels displayed are irrelevant to this

test. Use the down arrow key to scroll the display. See
Note 3 below.
6/15/1995 5-43

Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
Note 1. You can change the (octal) CODE=XXXX display by changing data bits 18 through 29 in the label 031 data word (XMT 1
field of the DATATRAC ( )) as follows:
ATC-601 digit: First Second Third Fourth

Bit: 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Data: Par SSM |<-----Data -------> ----->| Pad
Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
DATATRAC (Hex): | 1 | | 5 | | 6 | | 6 |
Binary: 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Octal value: 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1
Produces CODE: 5 2 6 3
Bits 11 through 17, of the label 031 control word, are assigned the following functions:
DATATRAC Hex bits: 5th 6th
Bit: 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Bit values: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| | | | Pad | |<- |<--SDI
Assignment: Pad Pad | | |<--Altitude reporting, 1 = OFF
| |<--Ident, 1 = ON
|<--Altitude port select, 1 = B
Note 2: You can set the XMT 1 label 203 data field bits 12 through 28 to any combination of 1 and 0. The RCV 1 label 203
word data field will reflect the XMT 1 word while the ATC-601 will show the altitude to the nearest 100 feet. The label 203
word data bit values are as follows:
DATATRAC Hex *: | 2nd | | 3rd |

Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit: 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
Alt value:(sign bit; 0 = +) 65536 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512
(in feet)
DATATRAC Hex *: | 4th | | 5th | | 6th |
Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit: 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09
Alt value 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 ** ** **
(in feet)
Determine the altitude by totaling the bit value of all bits set to 1.
* The left-most Hex Data bit (bit 1) is determined by the parity bit 32, the SSM bits 31 and 30, and sign bit 29. Since bit 29
must always be a 0, this Hex bit must always be an odd number. The right-most bits (bits 7 and 8) are determined by the
label. **= Not used
Note 3: You will see a label 371 data word. This is the ARINC 429 Specific Equipment Identification word which is
structured the same as other ARINC 429 words but conveys the following information:
Bits 11 through 18 identify the equipment type. The code for ATC transponders is 18 therefore bits 14 and 15 are 1; the
others are 0. Bits 19 through 24 convey a binary code identifying the equipment manufacturer. Collins is 6. Therefore bits
20 and 21 are 1; all others are 0. Bits 24 through 29 are reserved for purposes to be defined.
When ARINC 572 altitude data is active, you will see a label 200 data word. This word reflects the ARINC 572 (Gillham code)
altitude data. This word is structured the same as other ARINC 429 words, except bits 9 and 10 are part of the data field; i.e.,
there is no SDI. Bits 9,10, and 11 reflect the D1, D2, and D4 code bits respectively. Bits 13, 14, and 15 reflect the C-bits,
bits 17, 18, and 19 reflect the B-bits, and 21, 22, and 23 reflect the A-bits.
6/15/1995 5-44

2.0 Test set, Auto On ATC-601: Ensure that all tests pass. See note below.
Test Press RUN/STOP to stop
Press AUTO TEST
Press RUN to start
Note: This test requires a few
seconds to run. It will stop
automatically.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set POWER switch OFF
On UUT:
Move the test set rf cable to the UUT top antenna connector and the rf termination to the
bottom.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
On ATC-601: Ensure that all tests pass. See note below.

Repeat the AUTO TEST
Note. The AUTO TEST sequence will indicate FAILED even when certain tests result in a NO REPLY condition. The NO REPLY
conditions are the result of no ADLP (Airborne Data Link Processor) data in this setup. This same condition is likely to occur
when using the ATC-601 as a ramp tester when testing an installation not equipped with an ADLP. To verify that the test can
be seen as successful, proceed as follows:
When the test sequence is completed and the ATC-601 stops, as indicated by INTERR and REPLY lamps off, you will likely
see a screen as follows:

MODES TESTED - A,C,S FREQ: 1089.92 Mhz
MODES PASSED - A,C,S ERP: 55 Dbm
MODES FAILED - -> MTL: -77 Dbm
Press RUN to start
(The FREQ, ERP, and MTL values can vary from UUT to UUT and to a lesser degree on UUT temperature.)
On the ATC-601, use the SELECT 6th up arrow or down arrow key to scroll through the following list of tests performed; the
numbers are for reference purposes only and do not appear on the test set screen. If you use the down arrow, you will see
the list in the order shown; from test 1 through test 19. If you use the up arrow key, you will see the list in reverse order,
starting at test 19. You will likely notice that all tests passed except tests 13, 14, and 15 which had a NO REPLY.
NO. TEST NAME AND RESULT TEST SPECIFICATION / DESCRIPTION
1.0 ** REPLY DELAY TEST - PASSED ** MODE S: 128.00 (0.25) s

ITM A: 128.00 (0.25) s
(All others): 3.00 (0.50) s
2.0 ** REPLY JITTER TEST - PASSED ** MODE S: =< 0.05 s

ITM: =< 0.06 s
(All others): =< 0.1 s
3.0 ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST - PASSED ** F1 TO F2 SPACING: 20.3 (0.1) s

All PULSE WIDTH: 0.45 (0.1) s
6/15/1995 5-45

4.0 ** SLS LEVEL TEST - PASSED ** UUT is interrogated with F2 (SLS) pulse at 9 dB below F1.
UUT should reply to this interrogation. Then UUT is
interrogated with F2 equal to F1. UUT should not reply.
PASSED indicates correct response to both tests.
5.0 ** ATC ONLY ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED ** The TDR-94/94D should not reply to this mode a and mode
c only interrogation. PASSED indicates a correct (NO)
response.
6.0 ** MODE S ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED ** The TDR-94/94D should reply to this interrogation. PASSED
indicates a correct response. UUT address previously
determined in mode s interrogation, is sent to UUT in UF4
(Uplink Format 4) and verified in DF4 (Downlink Format 4)
reply.
7.0 ** INVALID ADDRESS TEST - PASSED ** UUT is interrogated with two addresses, both of which are
different from the correct address. PASSED indicates UUT
did not reply to interrogation.
8.0 ** SPR ON/OFF TEST - PASSED ** UUT is interrogated first with SPR ON and verifies a proper
reply, then with SPR OFF and verifies no reply. PASSED
indicates UUT responded correctly.
9.0 ** MODE S UF0 TEST - PASSED ** UUT is interrogated with mode S UF0, verifying correct
altitude as compared to previous mode c reply, correct
address as compared to DF11 address, and correct format.
PASSED indicates correct UUT response.
10.0 ** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED ** UUT is interrogated with UF4, verifying correct altitude as
compared to previous mode c reply, correct address as
compared to DF11 reply, and correct format. PASSED
indicates correct UUT response.
11.0 ** MODE S UF5 TEST - PASSED ** UUT is interrogated with UF5, verifying the correct ID code
as compared to previous mode a reply, correct address as
12.0 ** MODE S UF11 TEST - PASSED ** UUT is interrogated with UF11, verifying correct address as
compared to previous response, and correct format.
13.0 ** MODE S UF16 TEST - NO REPLY ** (See test 15.)
6/15/1995 5-46

STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
15.0 ** MODE S UF21 TEST - NO REPLY ** UUT is interrogated with UF16, UF20, and UF21.
These formats are all related to the airborne data link
function. This function has not been implemented.
The TDR-94/94D will not reply to these interrogation
formats. NOT REPLY should not be seen as a failure.
16.0 ** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED ** When set for dual antenna operation, the TDR-94D
transmits a squitter pulse once each second, alternating
between top and bottom antenna ports. The ATC-601
verifies that one squitter pulse is received every 1.6 to
2.4 seconds. The test panel ANT SGL/DL switch must
be in the DL position. When set for single antenna
operation, or when testing a TDR-94, only the bottom
antenna port is used. In this case the ATC-601 verifies
that one squitter pulse is received every 0.6 to 1.4
seconds. When you change the ANT SGL/DL switch,
you must cycle power to the UUT in order for it to take
effect. PASSED indicates a correct UUT response.
17.0 ** FREQUENCY TEST - PASSED ** Freq: 1090 (1) MHz
18.0 ** DIVERSITY TEST - PASSED ** ATC-601 monitors squitter pulses on active antenna
port (as in test 16) and then monitors for intervening
squitter pulses that are not greater than 20 dB below
the active squitter. This test will always fail when the
UUT is a TDR-94 (non diversity) because squitter is
transmitter every second on the same antenna port. If
you are testing a TDR-94D and the DL ANT/SGL ANT
switch is set to SGL ANT, the test will also fail because
this causes the unit to operate like a TDR-94. PASSED
indicates a correct response from a TDR-94D.
19.0 ** MTL DIFFERENCE TEST - PASSED ** ATC-601 verifies that the MTL difference between mode
a and mode c responses is < 1.0 dB. At this point,
another press of the arrow key will display the first item;
either 1.0 or 18.0, depending on which arrow was used.
6/15/1995 5-47

3.0 Power On test panel select:

output and Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Rcvr Set POWER switch OFF
Sensi-tivity
Test On ATC-601: ** POWER TEST - Top Antenna **
ANTENNA UNITS ERP MTL STATUS
Select POWER TEST NO REPLY
Press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING ---- ***** TEST RUNNING *****
--->
Note: If necessary, press SELECT (or SLEW) to select Top Antenna. Be sure that the ATC-601 rf
cable is connected to the top antenna port and the rf termination is connected to the bottom port.
On DATATRAC ( ): set screen ------> -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz

... no data present ...
-ON-------------XMT 1 ----------12.5 KHz
031 01 15 66 C1 98 00 1 0100
203 01 64 00 01 C1 11 1 0100
On test panel: ** POWER TEST - Top Antenna **

Set POWER switch ON Top dBm 55.7 -76.0 PASSED
***** TEST RUNNING *****
After a few seconds, the ATC-601
shows ----> If a failure is detected, a small arrow will be shown to
the left of the offending parameter(s). Make a note of
On ATC-601: the test results, if a record is needed, and label it as
Press RUN/STOP to stop the test. applicable to the UUT bottom antenna port. The data
displayed here will be overwritten on the next test.
If the UUT is a TDR-94, skip this step. You should see a similar display on the ATC-601
On test panel: except this data is applicable to the top antenna port.
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY The data can be slightly different. See below for test
Set POWER switch OFF tolerances and an explanation of a possible failure
On TDR-94D mount: indication due to high sensitivity.
Swap the rf cable connection and
termination on the UUT antenna ports. Note: You may also select bottom antenna screen on
(Rf cable to bottom port and termination the ATC-601.
to top antenna port.)
On test panel: Note: You may see a marginal test failure if the UUT is
Set POWER switch to ON relatively cold. In this case allow the unit to warm up a
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR few minutes and then repeat the test.
On ATC-601:
Press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING
Wait a few seconds then press RUN/STOP
to stop the test.
6/15/1995 5-48

3.0 Power The test tolerances are:

(con- output and ERP: > 48.5 dBm and < 57.0 dBm
td) Rcvr MTL: -73.0 (4.0) dBm
Sensi-tivity
Test The ATC-601 will indicate that the UUT has FAILED if the MTL is more than -77.0 dBm or less than -
(contd) 71 dBm. Collins prefers, however, that a FAILURE should be reported only if the MTL is less than -
71 dBm. Therefore, if you have a unit displaying an MTL of -77.1 or more, you should see that value
as acceptable. Obviously, an MTL indication approaching -80 dBm or more may be cause for
suspecting a problem with test set calibration.
You may also see a failure because the ERP, Effective Radiated Power or Peak Pulse Power , is
more than 57 dBm. Power measurements taken with a ramp tester can be confusing. The various
test equipment manufacturers use different dimensions for displaying the test results, the test
specifications are not always clear on how the test is to be performed to produce the specified result,
and the test method; direct or radiation, yields different results. As in the case of MTL, an ERP
slightly greater than 57 dBm ( e.g., 59 dBm max), using the direction connection method, should not
be seen as cause for unit rejection.
DO-181 specifies the transponder power output at the antenna. Testing a unit on the bench by direct
connection to the antenna port yields a power reading at the transmitter output. The difference is,
of course, antenna cable and connector losses.
DO-181 specifies transponder power output in watts and dBW. The IFR ATC-601 displays power in
dBm (ERP). The TIC-48/-49 displays power in watts. The following chart may be useful for proper
test evaluation:
Watts dBW dBm TDR-94/94D Spec
50 16.99 46.99
70 18.45 48.45 (Min for airplanes limited to 15 000 ft and 175 kts.)
100 20.00 50.00
125 20.97 50.97 Minimum at antenna (ramp testing)
150 21.76 51.76
200 23.01 53.01
250 23.98 53.98 Minimum direct (on bench)
300 24.77 54.77
350 25.44 55.44
400 26.02 56.02
450 26.53 56.53
500 26.99 56.99 Maximum at antenna
6/15/1995 5-49

4.0 Gillham On ATC-601: select ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

Altitude ATCRBS REPLY TEST -----------> (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
Test
Press RUN to start
On test panel select:

On DATATRAC ( ): -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz

Set XMT 1 label 203 word to OFF ... no data present ...
Set RCV 1 and XMT 1 screen
------> -ON-------------XMT 1 ----------12.5 KHz
031 01 15 66 C1 98 00 1 0100
On test panel: The XFEED OUT lamp turns on. The ATC-601 REPLY
Set all ARINC 572 switches to OFF: lamp indicates that UUT is responding to interrogations.
Then set A4, C2, C4, and B4 to SEL.
Set POWER to ON
DATATRAC ( ) RCV 1 screen shows: ----- ----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz

---------------> 203 01 E0 B8 61 C1 11 1 0200
031 01 F5 66 81 98 11 1 0200
(ignore any other displayed labels)
On ATC-601: ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

Press RUN. Screen shows: (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT=5900 FT [4460]
--------------------> ***** TEST RUNNING *****
(The CODE 5263 depends on your selection in the 031

XMT 1 word. See note 1 under step 1.2 above)
At this step you are asked to toggle each of the ARINC 572 switches and verify the altitude display. You should also watch
the RCV 1 data word on the DATATRAC ( ) display. By cycling each switch between OFF and SEL you should see the ATC-
601 display and the DATATRAC ( ) 203 data word change. If the displays do not change for a particular switch, this would
indicate either an open or a shorted code line. If the wrong altitude is shown, this would suggest that the code line is affecting
another line; i.e., causing two or more inputs to change simultaneously. In either case the UUT, the test panel, or the
interconnecting cable needs repair.
Set each switch as shown in the listing below to the (position) shown, and back, and verify the altitude display at both
positions. The altitude display should always revert to the initial display when the switch is returned to its original position.
There is no serious need to verify the correctness of the RCV word as long as the ATC-601 display is correct.
SWITCH DISPLAYED ALTITUDE SWITCH DISPLAYED ALTITUDE

Initial 5,900 FT [4460] C4 (OFF) 6,000 FT [4420]
A1 (SEL) 23,600 FT [5460] B1 (SEL) 3,600 FT [4560]
A2 (SEL) 7,600 FT [6460] B2 (SEL) 5,600 FT [4660]
A4 (OFF) -400 FT (0460] B4 (OFF) 6,600 FT [4060]
C1 (SEL) none (blank; this is invalid) D2 (SEL) 119,600 FT [4462]
C2 (OFF) 5,800 FT [4440] D4 (SEL) 55,600 FT [4464]
For addtional information on Gillham code structure, refer to paragraph 5.7 in this section.
6/15/1995 5-50

5.0 CSDB This test cannot be performed using a DATATRAC 400/400H because these instruments are not
tuning capable of transmitting or receiver CSDB data. However, as an acceptable alternative, you can use
test a CTL-92/92A, connected to the test panel using the cable shown in figure 907.
Turn power off and connect CTL-92/92A to test panel. Be sure CTL-92/92A mode knob is set to
OFF.
Turn power on and set the CTL-92/92A mode knob to ALT.
On the CTL: ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

Set the CTL-92/92A to 5263 or any (lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]
desired ident code. ***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel: The CODE 5263 depends on your selection on the CTL-
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT to 92/92A code select knobs. See note 1 under step 1.2
CSDB above. The ALT display depends on the altitude
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to CSDB selection on the test panel ARINC 572 ALT IN switches.
PORT 1
Set ALT TYPE SELECT to CSDB Be sure that the ACT display, on the CTL-92/92A does
Set ARINC 572 ALT IN to TO CTL not flash. A flashing ACT indicates that the control
Set SOURCE SELECT to CTL feedback label 1F data, from the TDR, does not agree
with the CLT-92/92A output label 1E data to the TDR.
Only one of the two data CTL input ports is being used;
pins U/V.
On the test panel: Be sure that the ACT display, on the CTL-92/92A, does
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to CSDB not flash. A flashing ACT at either port selection
PORT 2 indicates that output port has failed. If both ports flash,
there may be a problem with the test panel wiring or the
CTL input.
5.1 CSDB In this altitude test configuration, Gillham altitude data is being supplied to the CTL (ARINC 572 ALT
altitude IN to CTL). The CTL converts this data to CSDB and supplies it to the TDR via the CSDB data
test output port (only 1 port is used; pins S/R). The CSDB altitude data is being read on the control bus
input (SOURCE SELECT to CTL). You can verify this by setting the CTL mode switch to ON. If you
suspect a problem with the altitude data, check the following:
On the test panel: The ATC-601 ALT display should be the same as
Set ARINC 572 ALT IN to TO TDR above since the ultimate source of altitude information
Set ALT TYPE SELECT to ARINC 572 is the same in both tests. If it is different here, suspect
Set SOURCE SELECT to SEL a problem with one or more of the altitude discrete
inputs to the CTL. If you encounter such a problem,
you can identify the defective discrete by returning
these three switches to the settings above and then
performing the ARINC 572 switching sequence shown
following step 4.0 above.
On test panel:
Set power to OFF
Disconnect the CTL-92/92A from the
test panel
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT -
ARINC PORT to PA
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to ARINC
429 PORT A
6/15/1995 5-51
Table 103. Acceptance Test Procedures,

6.0 ARINC On ATC-601: select ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

429 ATCRBS REPLY TEST and press RUN to (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
Altitude indicate TEST RUNNING ---------> ***** TEST RUNNING *****
Test
On test panel: -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHzLbl

SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY ... no data present ...
Set POWER switch to OFF
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429 -ON-------------XMT 1 ----------12.5 KHz
OUTPUT PORT SELECT: ARINC 429 Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
031 01 15 66 C1 98 00 1 0100
PORT A 203 01 64 00 01 C1 11 1 0100
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set XMT 1 to ON
Setup screen ------>
Set POWER to ON lamp indicates that UUT is responding to interrogations.
EXT STBY to OPR
The ATC-601 screen shows: ---> ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]

XMT 1 word. See note 1 under step 1.2 above.)
DATATRAC ( ) RCV 1 screen shows: ---- -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz

---> 203 01 64 00 01 C1 11 1 0200
6/15/1995 5-52

6.1 ARINC On the test panel: ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

Control Be sure the SOURCE SELECT switch (lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]
Discretes is set to SEL. ***** TEST RUNNING *****
Tests
(contd) On the test panel: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Set the REP ALT SEL switch to PB
Note: At this point the UUT is configured to report
altitude data from port B. There is none so the display
blanks.
On the test panel: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Move the parallel connection from the
PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE SOURCE Note: This verifies that UUT is configured to report
jack to the ALTERNATE DIGITAL altitude data being supplied on port B.
ALTITUDE SOURCE jack.
On the test panel: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Set the REP ALT SEL switch to PA
Note: UUT is returned to port A. This series of steps
has verified that the Reporting Altitude discrete is
switchable.
Set the SOURCE SELECT switch to
CTL Note: This switches the UUT to the altitude data
supplied on the control port.
On the test panel: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display remains.
Disconnect the parallel connection from
the ALTERNATE DIGITAL ALTITUDE Note: This verifies the previous step; that altitude is
SOURCE jack. (Wait about 5 seconds) being drawn from the control port; all other sources are
disconnected.
On DATATRAC ( ): Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.

SEL. Note: This verifies that the Source Select Discrete is
switchable.
On test panel: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display remains

Reconnect the parallel connection to blanked.
the ALTERNATE DIGITAL ALTITUDE
SOURCE jack.
6/15/1995 5-53

6.1 ARINC On test panel: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
(contd) Control Set the AUTO ALT switch to SEL
Discretes (-003 UUT units only) Note: This enables the automatic altitude port select
Tests feature and verifies that the UUT does switch to
(contd) alternate port B even though port A is the selected port.
On test panel: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.

Set the AUTO ALT switch to OFF
(-003 UUT units only) Note: This enables the AUTO ALT discrete is
switchable.
On the DATATRAC: -ON-------------XMT 1 ----------12.5 KHz

Set the XMT 1 label 031 word to 031 01 95 66 E1 98 00 1 0100
-------->
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Note: This digitally switches the UUT to port B. If this

test is correct while the earlier test of port B altitude
failed, suspect a problem with the Reporting Altitude
Select discrete. If both tests failed, suspect a problem
with the altitude data receivers.
On test panel: -ON-------------XMT 1 ----------12.5 KHz

Set EXT STBY switch to STBY. 031 01 15 66 C1 98 00 1 0100
Set the POWER switch OFF.
Set the AUTO ALT switch to OFF.
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set the XMT 1 label 031 word to ------>
If you wish, you can set the XMT 1 label 203 data field bits 12 through 28 to any combination of 1 and 0. The RCV 1
label 203 word data field will follow the XMT 1 word exactly while the ATC-601, set to the ATCRBS REPLY TEST mode, will
show the altitude to the nearest 100 feet. When set to the MODE UF0 TEST, the ATC-601 displays altitude to the nearest 25
feet. The label 203 bit values are shown in note 2 following step 1.2.
To simulate any altitude up to about 131,000 feet:

1. Select the desired altitude.
2. Find the data bit with the maximum bit value less than the selected altitude. Make a note of that bit number.
3. Subtract that bit value from your selected value.
4. Find the next bit with the maximum bit value less than the remainder. Make a note of that bit number.
5. Subtract that bit value from your remainder.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the remainder is 0.
In the XMT 1 label 203 data word, set all noted bits to 1. You should see your selected altitude, to the nearest 100 feet,
displayed on the ATC-601.
7.0 ARINC On test panel:

575 SOURCE SELECT: SEL
Altitude ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
Test
Lbl SDI 29--Binary Data--11 SSM Par msec
Set screen ------> ... no data present ...
Note: The binary data format is retained
here to emphasize the similarity between -ON--------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
ARINC 429 and ARINC 575. If you are 031 01 0000000111011111011 00 1 0100
more comfortable with the Hex data 203 01 0010001010101010100 00 1 0100
format, feel free to use it instead.
6/15/1995 5-54


(con- 575 Connect parallel control cable to
td) Altitude PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE SOURCE
Test jack.
(contd) Set POWER switch to ON.
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR.

Select ATCRBS REPLY TEST and (lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=35,500 FT [5524]
press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING. ***** TEST RUNNING *****
ATC-601 screen -------->
On test panel: -ON--------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz

Set ALT TYPE SELECT switch to 203 01 0010001010101010100 00 1 0100
ARINC 575
On DATATRAC:
Set XMT 1 label 203 word
-------->
(just change the SSM to 00)
ATC-601 screen --------> ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

CODE=5263 ALT=17,700 FT [3740]
DATATRAC screen ---------> -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz

203 01 0001000101010101010 11 1 0100
| | | | | | |
/ / / / / / /
| | | | | | |
-ON--------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
203 01 0010001010101010100 00 1 0100
In addition to testing the altitude type select discrete, this test illustrates the differences between
ARINC 429 and ARINC 575 data. Notice that the bits in the RCV 1 label 203 word (above) are offset
to the right by one bit from the XMT 1 label 203 word and the SSM code is 11 as opposed to the 00 in
the XMT 1 word. In ARINC 575, the LSB is bit 13; in ARINC 429 the LSB is bit 12. In ARINC 575,
bits 30 and 31 determine the sign; 00 being positive.
Notice also, that the altitude displayed on the ATC-601 corresponds to the code in the RCV 1 word;
not the XMT 1 word. This is also due to the UUT being configured for ARINC 575 and thus the bit
values are offset by 1 bit position which has the effect of changing the altitude by a factor of 1/2.
On test panel: -ON--------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz

ARINC 429
On DATATRAC:
Set XMT 1 label 203 word ---->
ATC-601 screen: ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

CODE=5263 ALT=35,500 FT [5524]
6/15/1995 5-55

8.0 Mode S On the test panel:

Address Set POWER switch OFF
Discretes Set all test panel mode s address switches to SEL except switch P1-56; set it to OFF.
Test Set POWER switch ON
On ATC-601: ** MODE S ALL CALL TEST - NO REPLY **

ALL CALL ADDRESS = [ ] TAIL
Set for MODE S ALL CALL TEST -------> NUMBER =
Press RUN to start
On ATC 601: ** MODE S ALL CALL TEST - PASSED **

ALL CALL ADDRESS = FFFFFE [77777776]
Press RUN TAIL NUMBER =
Note screen ----->
****** TEST RUNNING *****
The remainder of this step should be seen as optional unless you have reason to suspect a failure in
one or more of the address discrete lines. The procedure will require a few minutes because of the
delay involved in cycling power between each switch setting.
On test panel: After a few seconds, UUT begins to reply and shortly
Set POWER switch OFF. thereafter the ATC-601 screen shows the following
Set each triad of address switches for address:
an octal digit 6.
Set POWER switch ON. ALL CALL ADDRESS = DB6DB6 [66666666]
an octal digit 4.
Set POWER switch ON. ALL CALL ADDRESS = 924924 [44444444]
an octal digit 0, except the eighth triad
which is set to 1. ALL CALL ADDRESS = 000001 [00000001]
Set POWER switch ON.
6/15/1995 5-56

9.0 TCAS / On test panel:

NO TCAS Set POWER switch OFF
Discrete
Select On DATATRAC ( ):
and Same setup as STEP 1.1.
TCAS
Bus Test ATC-601 is not needed for this test but can be left on.
On test panel: After a few seconds the RCV 1 portion of the

Set POWER switch ON DATATRAC ( ) screen shows:
After data appears on the RCV 1 display, -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz

press RCV and then ENT and use the 350 01 00 00 01 17 11 1 0200
down arrow key to scroll the words so
that you can see the 350 word.
On test panel: After a few seconds the RCV 1 portion of the

Set POWER switch to OFF DATATRAC ( ) screen shows: (use down arrow key to
Set TCAS/NO TCAS switch to TCAS scroll words)
On DATATRAC ( ):
Press RCV and then ENT -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
On test panel: 350 01 68 B3 01 17 11 1 0200
Set POWER switch to ON |<---diagnostic code B3
This display shows a diagnostic B3 which is interpreted: TCAS Bus Inactive. This verifies that the
discrete properly configures the unit for operation with a TCAS. However, no TCAS data is being
supplied in this step, therefore, the unit declares a B3 diagnostic.
6/15/1995 5-57

9.0 TCAS Connect the DATATRAC RCV 1 to the -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)----100 KHz
(contd) Bus Test, TCAS OUT jack. Verify that the data 275 00 80 00 00 BD 00 1 0150
XPDR to word labels are detectable as shown -->. 276 10 80 F8 02 7D 00 1 0150
TCAS 350 01 68 B3 01 17 11 1 0150
Note: Except for the diagnostic code in Notice the higher speed. Other labels may also be
the label 350 data word, the data content present.
is not important. It is quite likely that the
data will be different. The presence of
the data word labels shown verifies that
the TCAS data bus output is active and
appears to be normal.
TCAS to Note: In this step you need the capability of transmitting data to two separate input ports
XPDR simultaneously and at different speeds; the 031 control word must be low speed (12.5-kbps) while
Bus Test the TCAS label 274 data words must be high speed (100-kbps). All DATATRAC instruments, as
well as the JC Air 429E, can transmit at either of these speeds but only the DATATRAC 400 can do
so on two separate ports simultaneously. Otherwise, you will need two simulators. If you do not
have this capability, you may not be able to verify the integrity of the TCAS bus input port.
If you are using a DATATRAC 400, or -ON-------------XMT 2 -----------100 KHz

have access to a second bus simulator, 274 00 18 00 00 3D 00 1 0100
connect your second transmitter port or
data bus simulator to the TCAS IN and Note: Be sure to set the higher speed.
setup as shown -------->:
On bus reader RCV display: After a few seconds, the 350 word shows:
Note: The objective is to verify that the -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz

UUT recognizes a valid TCAS label 274 350 01 68 00 01 17 11 1 0150
word and declares this by removing the |<---diagnostic code 00
diagnostic B3.
On the bus reader: After a few seconds, notice that the B3 diagnostic
Set the XMT 2 word to OFF returns.
Note: Disconnect XMT 2 from the TCAS

IN jack and reconnect RCV 1 to the
DATA BUS OUTPUT port.
Final step On test panel: After a few seconds, the original 350 word returns:
in this Set POWER switch to OFF -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
test, all Set TCAS/NO TCAS switch to NO 350 01 00 00 01 17 11 1 0200
setups TCAS
On DATATRAC ( ):
Press RCV and then ENT
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
6/15/1995 5-58

10.0 Side 1/ On test panel:

Side 2 Set POWER switch OFF
Discrete Be sure SIDE 1/SIDE 2 switch is set to
Test SIDE 1.
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as STEP 9.0.

Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST screen --> (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
On test panel: After a few seconds, X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
Set POWER switch ON lamps light and the ATC-601 shows:
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
On test panel: Note that unit does not reply (X FEED OUT lamp and
Set POWER switch to OFF REPLY lamps are off and no altitude is displayed on
Set SIDE 1/SIDE 2 switch to SIDE 2 ATC-601). Wait about 10 seconds.
Note: UUT does not respond because the SDI and side
strapping do not agree.
Note: Be sure to allow adequate time for the CPU to
reinitialize properly between power off and power on.
The SIDE 1/2 strap is one of several that are monitored
only at processor initialization. Therefore, if this tests
fails, cycle power again but allow more time between
power off and power on.
On DATATRAC ( ): Notice that unit begins to reply almost immediately

On XMT 1, label 031 word, set the SDI (XFEED OUT lamp turns on and ATC-601 REPLY lamp
to 10 and press ENTER lights).
Note: UUT responds because the SDI and side

strapping agree.
On DATATRAC ( ): Notice that unit stops replying (X FEED OUT lamp and
On XMT 1, label 031 word, set SDI to ATC-601 REPLY lamps turn off).
01 and press ENTER.
Set POWER switch OFF lamps light and the ATC-601 shows that the UUT is
Set SIDE 1/SIDE 2 switch to SIDE 1 replying.
Set POWER switch ON
6/15/1995 5-59

11.0 AIR/ On test panel:

GND Set POWER switch OFF
Discrete TDR ALT SOURCE: EXT DIRECT
Test ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
On DATATRAC ( ):
On ATC-601: ** MODE S UF4 TEST - NO REPLY **

Set for MODE S UF4 TEST screen -----> DF FS= DR= UM= AC=
ADDRESS=
ATC-601 screen shows ----->: ** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED **

DF 4 FS=0 DR=00 UM=00 AC=32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
Note: Initially the screen will show FS=2 for about 2

seconds and then change to FS=0.
On test panel: After a few seconds, the ATC-601 shows:

Set AIR/GND switch to GND
** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED **
DF 4 FS=1 DR=00 UM=00 AC=32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
Of particular significance here is the FS (flight status) indication.

For a detailed description of each of these message fields, refer to the Theory of Operation section.
On test panel: After a few seconds, notice that the ATC-601 FS field
Set AIR/GND switch to AIR again shows 0.
6/15/1995 5-60

12.0 DL ANT/ On test panel:

SGL ANT Set POWER switch OFF
Discrete
Test On DATATRAC ( ):
(TDR-94D Same setup as STEP 9.0.
only)
On ATC-601, set for SQUITTER TEST ** SQUITTER TEST - NO REPLY **
PERIOD = SECONDS
screen -----> TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
Be sure the ATC-601 is connected to the
top antenna port.
On test panel: After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows: See
Set DL ANT/SGL ANT switch to DL note below.
ANT
Set POWER switch ON ** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
PERIOD = 2.00 SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
You can watch the PERIOD display for a SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
time.
See the note at the end of this step for test tolerances.
On test panel: After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows:

Set DL ANT/SGL ANT switch to SGL ** SQUITTER TEST - FAILED **
PERIOD = SECONDS
ANT TAIL NUMBER =
Set POWER switch ON SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
Note: This test is intended to fail. When the UUT is set

for single antenna operation, there is no transmission
from the top antenna port. Therefore, if this test
indicates PASSED, recheck all switch settings or
suspect a problem with the SGL/DL ANT select strap.
It should not pass.
On test panel:
On ATC-601:
Press RUN to stop the test.
Remove rf terminator from bottom

antenna connector
Connect ATC-601 cable to bottom
antenna connector
Connect rf terminator to top antenna
connector
6/15/1995 5-61

12.0 DL ANT On test panel: After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows: See
/SGL Set POWER switch ON note below.
ANT
Discrete On ATC-601: ** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
Test Press RUN to start the test. TAIL NUMBER =
(contd) SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
(TDR-94D
only)
Set POWER switch OFF note below.
Set DL ANT/SGL ANT switch to DL
ANT ** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
Set POWER switch ON TAIL NUMBER =
Note: The PERIOD value tends to vary somewhat in all cases. When the UUT is set for dual antenna
operation and the ATC-601 is monitoring the top or the bottom antenna port, the value can vary from
1.6 to 2.4. When the TDR-94D is set for single antenna operation, or the UUT is a TDR-94, there is
no transmission from the top antenna port and and the transmission PERIOD from the bottom
antenna port can vary from 0.6 to 1.4.
13.0 Burst On test panel:

Tune and Set POWER switch OFF
Cross- Set CONTROL DATA SELECT to PA
Feed In Set ALT TYPE SELECT to ARINC 429
Discrete Set SOURCE SELECT to SEL
Test
On DATATRAC ( ):

PERIOD = SECONDS
If necessary, reconnect ATC-601 to top
antenna connector, with terminator on
bottom connector.
On test panel: After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUT and
Set POWER switch ON the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the unit is
replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates PASSED.
On test panel: Notice that both X FEED lamps are lighted.

Set X FEED IN/OUT switch to IN
On DATATRAC ( ): Notice that the X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY

Set XMT 1 to OFF lamps turns off (X FEED IN stays on).
(With the cursor on the 1, press ENT)
6/15/1995 5-62

13.0 Burst On DATATRAC ( ): Notice that the X FEED IN and OUT and REPLY lamps
(contd) Tune and Set XMT 1 to ON are lighted.
Cross-
Feed In On test panel: Notice that UUT continues to reply. Watch the unit for
Discrete Set X FEED IN/OUT switch to OUT a few seconds.
Test Set BURST TUNE switch to ON
(contd) On DATATRAC ( ):
Set XMT 1 to OFF
On test panel: Notice that UUT stops replying (X FEED OUT and
Set BURST TUNE switch to OFF REPLY lamps turn off).
On test panel: Notice that UUT does not reply (X

Set BURST TUNE switch to ON FEED OUT and REPLY lamps do not light).
On DATATRAC ( ): Notice that UUT replys (X FEED OUT and REPLY lamps
Set XMT 1 to ON are on).
Set BURST TUNE switch to OFF REPLY lamps are off).
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set XMT 1 to OFF
On test panel: X FEED OUT lamp flashes while XMT 1 is on .

Set BURST TUNE switch to ON
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set XMT 1 to ON
On test panel: X FEED OUT lamp remains off when XMT is OFF.
Set XMT 1 to OFF
14.0 Output On test panel:

Port Set BURST TUNE switch to OFF
Discrete Set SOURCE SELECT switch to SEL
CONTROL DATA PORT SEL: PA
OUTPUT PORT SELECT: ARINC 429 PORT A
On DATATRAC ( ):
The same as STEP 1.1
Set XMT 1 to ON

PERIOD = SECONDS
On test panel: After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUTand
On test panel: Notice that there is no change in the test result; X

Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT switch to FEED OUT and REPLY lights are on and ATC-601
ARINC 429 PORT B display does not change.
6/15/1995 5-63

15.0 Control On test panel:

Data Set POWER switch OFF
Input Port Set SOURCE SELECT switch to SEL
Select ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
Discrete CONTROL DATA SELECT: ARINC
Test PORT PA
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as for STEP 9.0.

PERIOD = SECONDS

Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch FEED OUTand REPLY lights are on and ATC-601
to ARINC PORT PB display does not change.

Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch FEED OUT and REPLY lights are on and ATC-601
to ARINC PORT PC display does not change.
16.0 Manual On test panel:

STBY Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Discrete Set POWER switch OFF
Test Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch to ARINC PORT PA
On DATATRAC ( ):

Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST screen (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
----------> ***** TEST RUNNING *****
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates PASSED.
On test panel: Note that X FEED OUT lamp and ATC-601 REPLY
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY lamps turn off and ATC-601 indicates NO REPLY. See
note below.
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR lamps light almost immediately and ATC-601 indicates
PASSED.
6/15/1995 5-64

17.0 Max Air- On test panel:

speed Set POWER switch OFF
Be sure that all three MAX AIRSPEED switches are set to OFF.
On DATATRAC ( ):
(The DATATRAC is used here only for
tuning data.)

Set for MODE S UF0 TEST screen > DF VS= RI= AC=
ADDRESS=
On test panel: After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUT lamp
Set POWER switch ON and the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the
unit is replying.
Note the ATC-601 screen -----------> ** MODE S UF0 TEST - PASSED **

DF 0 VS=0 RI=8 AC= 32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
Exercise the MAX AIRSPEED switches on the test panel and verify the correct RI indication as
shown in the following list. Cycle power and allow about 2 or 3 seconds of OFF time and about 5
seconds for processor initialization and ATC-601 response time between each switch setting.
MAX AIRSPEED SWITCH RI VALUE

BIT 15 BIT 16 BIT 17
OFF OFF OFF 8
SEL OFF OFF 9
OFF SEL OFF A
SEL SEL OFF B
OFF OFF SEL C
SEL OFF SEL D
OFF SEL SEL E
SEL SEL SEL F (not an assigned configuration)
It is worth noting that in this test mode the ATC-601 displays the altitude to the nearest 25 feet.
6/15/1995 5-65

18.0 Ext Sup- On test panel:

pression ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
Test
On DATATRAC ( ):

Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST screen ----- (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
-> ***** TEST RUNNING *****
Connect scope channel A to the test Note a (approx) 30s pulse on channel A.
panel SUPPR test points.
Connect scope channel B to the REPLY Note a reply waveform on channel B. If your scope is
VIDEO BNC connector on the ATC-601. able, you will see the individual reply code pulses on
Set the scope to display both channels channel B. You may also see the occasional squitter
transmission which appears as a much longer series of
pulses at about 1 transmission every 2 sec. Of
particular importance, however, is that the channel A
(suppression) pulse is about 30 s long during ATCRBS
reply, and brackets the 21 s ATCRBS reply. During
squitter transmission, the suppression pulse extends to
bracket the squitter transmission. The squitter
transmission is a DF11 reply about 72 s long.
6/15/1995 5-66

19.0 ADLP On test panel:

Select, Be sure DATALINK switch is set to NO
Discrete ADLP.
Strap
DATATRAC RCV 1 screen ------> -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz

350 01 60 00 01 17 11 1 0100
Note: The ATC-601 is not needed for
this test but it can remain connected and
operating.
On test panel: -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz

Set POWER switch to OFF 350 01 64 A2 01 17 11 1 0100
Set DATALINK switch to ADLP. |<---diagnostic code A2
Be sure DATALINK SELECT switch is
set to A/B. Note: The diagnostic A2 identifies an inactive ADLP
Set POWER switch to ON. bus. This test verifies that the ADLP enable discrete is
functional.
DATATRAC RCV 1 screen ------>

Set POWER switch to OFF. 350 01 60 00 01 17 11 1 0100
Set DATALINK switch to NO ADLP. |<---diagnostic code 00
Set POWER switch to ON.
DATATRAC RCV 1 screen ------>
Note: The Airborne Datalink system is not fully implemented at this time. If and when an ADLP
(Airborne DataLink Processor) becomes available and operational, suitable procedures will be
provided to verify the integrity of the ADLP input/output ports. At this point, therefore, verification of
the ADLP SELECT strap is seen as sufficient to prevent nuisance diagnostics that can occur if the
select input should be defective. You will notice that the DATALINK SELECT A/B, C/D function is
also not tested.
6/15/1995 5-67

20.0 Remote On test panel:

IDENT Same as initial setup
Discrete

Setup for ATCRBS REPLY test (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]

Press and release the REMOTE IDENT 031 01 75 66 91 98 11 1 0200
switch. |<----Ident bit
On DATATRAC ( ):
Note RCV screen ----->: Note: The 9 should appear in the data field only while
the switch is being pressed. This, together with the ID
display on the ATC-601, verifies that the REMOTE
IDENTdiscrete input is functional.

Notice the ID display. ID should (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=ID5263 ALT= 32,800 FT [1344]
display for about 18 seconds.
|<----ID display
On Datatrac ( ): -ON--------------XMT 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz

Set the label 031 XMT 1 word: 031 01 15 66 91 98 00 1 0100
On DATATRAC RCV 1 and on ATC-601 You should see the same displays as immediately
screens: above. If the test failed using the REMOTE IDENT
switch, but succeeds here, then suspect a failure in the
discrete input or the test panel.
On Datatrac ( ): -ON--------------XMT 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz

Set the label 031 XMT word: 031 01 95 66 81 98 00 1 0100
6/15/1995 5-68

21.0 Self Test On test panel:

AIR/GND: AIR
SELF TEST: ENABLE: OFF
On DATATRAC ( ):

Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
----------> ***** TEST RUNNING *****
unit is replying. The ATC-601 screen indicates PASSED.

screen shows: ---------> 031 01 F5 66 81 98 11 1 0200
203 01 64 00 01 C1 11 1 0200
350 01 60 00 01 17 11 1 0200
(You may need to press INC to display all three labels.)
In the next few steps, watch the

DATATRAC RCV screen carefully.
On the test panel: After a few seconds, notice that the DATATRAC ( ) and
Press and hold the SELF TEST ATC-601 screens do not change except that the
pushbutton for about 1 sec. DATATRAC briefly shows *s to the left of the 0200 time
displays in the RH column. (The test panel TEST lamp
lights while you hold the switch but otherwise there is
no change.)
6/15/1995 5-69

21.0 Self Test On test panel: Self-test Displays:

(contd) Set the AIR/GND switch to GND After a few seconds, notice that the X FEED OUT lamp
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to turns off briefly while the ATC-601 screen shows +s or
ON -s in most of the data fields, followed by blank fields.
Press and hold the SELF-TEST button
for about 1 s After a few seconds, notice that the X FEED OUT
lamps turns on again and the ATC-601 screen returns
Note: The test panel TEST lamp lights to the normal display.
while you hold the switch. This has no
bearing on UUT operation, however. If On the DATATRAC ( ), notice that the SSMs change to
the lamp does not light, check the test 10 and then back to 11.You should try to be especially
panel. watchful of the 350 data word and try to catch any
diagnostic codes that may be displayed during the self-
On the DATATRAC ( ), press RCV (either test sequence.
once or twice) to return to the setup
screen, followed by ENT, to clear the
screen of any extraneous labels.
On the test panel: Notice that the self-test displays as described above do
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to not appear..
OFF.
Press and hold the SELF TEST button Note: This verifies that self test is properly inhibited by
for about 1 s. the self-test inhibit discrete.
ON.
Set the AIR/GND switch to AIR. Note: This verifies that self test is properly inhibited by
Wait about 5 seconds *. the AIR/GND discrete.
Press and hold the SELF TEST button
for about 1 s.
*Note: The CPU must be allowed sufficient time to complete at least one software cycle in order to
recognize the change in the AIR/GND discrete. If you press the SELF TEST switch in less than
about 3 seconds of setting the AIR/GND switch to AIR, the unit may execute self-test as though it
were not inhibited. This should be seen as normal.
On the test panel: Notice the self-test displays as described above

Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to reappear.
ON.
Set the AIR/GND switch to GND. Note: This verifies that the self-test inhibit and AIR/GND
Press and hold the SELF TEST button discretes are switchable.
for about 1 s.
This completes this test sequence. Successful completion of this series provides reasonable
assurance that the unit is operational. However, this test does not satisfy the requirements of a Final
Performance Test which must be performed after any repair operation.
Turn off all power, disconnect the equipment, and return it to its normal storage location. Return the
UUT to its original shipping container, or equivalent, if it is to remain in storage. Otherwise, prepare
it for installation.
6/15/1995 5-70
5.4.5.10 Procedures Using The Atlantic Instruments

DataTrac 200 Databus Analyzer

Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer
manual, it may be necessary to upgrade the panel. Refer to the Special Tools and Fixtures Section.
If not already done, connect equipment as shown in figure 5-2.
Connect DATATRAC 200 as follows and using cables shown in the Special Tools and Fixtures
paragraph.
ARINC 429 XMT to test panel DIGITAL CONTROL port,
Parallel connect XMT to test panel PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE PORT,
ARINC 429 RCV to test panel DATA BUS READER port.
Connect an rf termination to the top antenna port.
Preset the switches as shown in paragraph 5.4.5.6. above. Be sure POWER switch is OFF and EXT
1.1 Setup Turn the DATATRAC 200 on, intialize for Lbl SI 29-Hex RCV-11 SM P MSEC
>> NO DATA RECEIVED
ARINC 429, and set the RCV, and XMT
screen -----> Lbl SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSRC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
203 01 20000 11 1 100
(See notes 1 and 2 that follow test step

1.2)
On test panel, set switches as shown in paragraph 5.4.4. above.
CODE= ALT= [ ]
Press RUN to start
1.2 UUT power ATC-601 screen ---------> ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
on and (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
ARINC 429 CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
tuning test ***** TEST RUNNING *****
To change the CODE, see note 1 below.

To change the ALT, see note 2 below.
The DATATRAC 200 RCV display becomes Lbl SI 29-Hex RCV-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 559A0 11 1 0200
---------> 203 01 20000 11 1 0200
350 01 00000 11 1 0200

test. Use the INC key to scroll the display. See Note 3
below.
On the ATC-601, press RUN UUT responds to interrogations as indicated by a lighted
XFEED OUT lamp on the test panel and a lighted REPLY
6/15/1995 5-71

Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
Note 1. You can change the (octal) CODE=XXXX display by changing data bits 18 through 29 in the label 031 data word (XMT
field of the DATATRAC 200) as follows:
ATC-601 octal digit: First Second Third Fourth

Bit: 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
Data: Par SSM |<-----Data -------> ----->| Pad Pad Pad
DATATRAC Hex Bits: First Second Third Fourth
DATATRAC Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
DATATRAC (Hex): 5 5 9 8
Binary: 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
Octal value: 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1
Produces an ATC-601 CODE: 5 2 6 3
DATATRAC Hex bits: Fifth
Bit: 14 13 12 11 10 9
Bit values: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
DATATRAC (Hex): 0
| | Pad | |<- |<--SDI
Assignment: | | |<--Altitude reporting, 1 = OFF
| |<--Ident, 1 = ON
Note 2: You can set the XMT label 203 data field bits 12 through 28 to any combination of 1 and 0. The RCV label 203 word
data field will reflect the XMT word while the ATC-601 will show the altitude to the nearest 100 feet. The label 203 word data
bit values are as follows:
DATATRAC (Hex) *: | lst | | 2nd |

Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit: 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
Alt value:(sign bit; 0 = +) 65536 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024
(in feet)
DATATRAC (Hex) *: | 3rd | | 4th | | 5th |
Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit: 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09
Alt value 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 ** ** **
(in feet)
Determine the altitude by totaling the bit value of all bits set to 1.
* The first (lst) Hex Data bit sets data bits 26 through 29. Since bit 29 must always be a 0, this Hex bit must not be set to a
hex number greater than 7. The fifth (5th) bit includes part of the SI, bit 10, therefore you will see it change whenever the SI
is set to any value other than 01. ** Bits 9, 10, and 11 are not used in the altitude definitions.
Note 3: You will see a label 371 data word. This is the ARINC 429 Specific Equipment Identification word which is
6/15/1995 5-72

Press AUTO TEST
Press RUN to start
Note: This test requires a few sec-
onds to run. It will stop automati-
cally.
On test panel:
On UUT:
bottom.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON

Note. The AUTO TEST sequence will indicate FAILED even when certain tests result in a NO REPLY condition. The NO REPLY
conditions are the result of no ADLP (Airborne Data Link Processor) data in this setup. This same condition is likely to occur
when using the ATC-601 as a ramp tester when testing an installation not equipped with an ADLP. To verify that the test can
be seen as successful, proceed as follows:

Press RUN to start
On the ATC-601, use the SELECT up arrow or down arrow key to scroll through the following list of tests performed; the

ITM A: 128.00 (0.25) s
(All others): 3.00 (0.50) s

ITM: =< 0.06 s

6/15/1995 5-73

UUT should reply to this interrogation. Then UUT is interro-
gated with F2 equal to F1. UUT should not reply. PASSED
indicates correct response to both tests.
response.
reply.
6/15/1995 5-74

STEP TEST NAME AND RESULT TEST SPECIFICATION / DESCRIPTION
15.0 ** MODE S UF21 TEST - NO REPLY ** UUT is interrogated with UF16, UF20, and UF21. These
formats are all related to the airborne data link function. This
function has not been implemented. The TDR-94/94D will
not reply to these interrogation formats. NOT REPLY should
not be seen as a failure.
16.0 ** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED ** When set for daul antenna operation, the TDR-94D transmits
a squitter pulse once each second, alternating between top
and bottom antenna ports. The ATC-601 verifies that one
squitter pulse is received every 1.6 to 2.4 seconds. The test
panel ANT SGL/DL switch must be in the DL position.
When set for single antenna operation, or when testing a
TDR-94, only the bottom antenna port is used. In this case
the ATC-601 verifies that one squitter pulse is received every
0.6 to 1.4 seconds. When you change the ANT SGL/DL
switch, you must cycle power to the UUT in order for it to
take effect. PASSED indicates a correct UUT response.
18.0 ** DIVERSITY TEST - PASSED ** ATC-601 monitors squitter pulses on active antenna port (as
in test 16) and then monitors for intervening squitter pulses
that are not greater than 20 dB below the active squitter.
This test will always fail when the UUT is a TDR-94 (non
diversity) because squitter is transmitter every second on the
same antenna port. If you are testing a TDR-94D and the DL
ANT/SGL ANT switch is set to SGL ANT, the test will also
fail because this causes the unit to operate like a TDR-94.
PASSED indicates a correct response from a TDR-94D.
19.0 ** MTL DIFFERENCE TEST - PASSED ** ATC-601 verifies that the MTL difference between mode a
and mode c responses is < 1.0 dB. At this point, another
press of the arrow key will display the first item; either 1.0 or
18.0, depending on which arrow was used.
6/15/1995 5-75


output Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
and Rcvr Set POWER switch OFF
Sensi-
tivity Test On ATC-601: ** POWER TEST - Top Antenna **
Press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING ---- ***** TEST RUNNING *****
----->
On DATATRAC 200: set screen ------> LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC

>> NO DATA RECEIVED
LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
203 01 20000 11 1 100

If the UUT is a TDR-94, skip this step. You should see a similar display on the ATC-601 ex-
On test panel: cept this data is applicable to the top antenna port. The
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY data can be slightly different. See below for test
Swap the rf cable connection and ter-
mination on the UUT antenna ports. (Rf Note: You may also select bottom antenna screen on
cable to bottom port and termination to the ATC-601.
top antenna port.)
On ATC-601:
Wait a few seconds then press RUN/STOP
to stop the test.
6/15/1995 5-76


(cont- output and ERP: > 48.5 dBm and < 57.0 dBm
d) Rcvr MTL: -73.0 (4.0) dBm
Sensi-tivity
Test The ATC-601 will indicate that the UUT has FAILED if the MTL is more than -77.0 dBm or less than -
(contd) 71 dBm. Collins prefers, however, that a FAILURE should be reported only if the MTL is less than -
71 dBm. Therefore, if you have a unit displaying an MTL of -77.1 or more, you should see that value
as acceptable. Obviously, an MTL indication approaching -80 dBm or more may be cause for
test evaluation:
50 16.99 46.99
100 20.00 50.00
150 21.76 51.76
200 23.01 53.01
300 24.77 54.77
350 25.44 55.44
400 26.02 56.02
450 26.53 56.53
6/15/1995 5-77


CODE= ALT= [ ]
Test
Press RUN to start

On DATATRAC 200: Lbl SI 29-Hex RCV-11 SM P MSEC

>> NO DATA RECEIVED
Set XMT label 203 word to OFF
Set RCV and XMT screen Lbl SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
------> 031 01 55980 00 1 100
Set all ARINC 572 switches to OFF: lamp indicates that UUT is responding to interrogations.
Set POWER to ON
DATATRAC 200 RCV screen shows: Lbl SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC

031 01 55980 11 1 100
--------------------> 203 01 05C30 11 1 100

Press RUN. Screen shows: (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT=5,900 FT [4460]
--------------------> ***** TEST RUNNING *****

XMT word. See note 1 under step 1.2 above)
the RCV data word on the DATATRAC 200 display. By cycling each switch between OFF and SEL you should see the ATC-
601 display and the DATATRAC 200 and 203 data words change. If the displays do not change for a particular switch, this
would indicate either an open or a shorted code line. If the wrong altitude is shown that code line may be effecting another
line; i.e., causing two or more inputs to change simultaneously. In either case the UUT, the test panel, or the interconnecting
cable needs repair.
There is no serious need to verify the correctness of the RCV word as long as the ATC-601 display is correct.

A1 (SEL) 23,600 FT [5460] B1 (SEL) 3,600 FT [4560]
A2 (SEL) 7,600 FT [6460] B2 (SEL) 5,600 FT [4660]
A4 (OFF) -400 FT (0460] B4 (OFF) 6,600 FT [4060]
C2 (OFF) 5,800 FT [4440] D4 (SEL) 55,600 FT [4464]
6/15/1995 5-78

Gillham Code, Altitude Listing:

GILLHAM CODE SWITCHES
ATC-601 ALT DISPLAY D2 D4 A1 A2 A4 B1 B2 B4 C1 C2 C4
-1000 FT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
0 FT 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
500 FT 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
1000 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
1300 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
1500 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
1800 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
2000 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
2600 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
2700 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
3000 FT 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
4000 FT 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
6000 FT 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
6800 FT 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
8000 FT 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
10000 FT 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
12000 FT 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
14000 FT 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
14800 FT 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
16000 FT 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
16100 FT 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
16200 FT 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
18000 FT 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
20000 FT 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
22000 FT 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
25000 FT 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
30000 FT 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
30800 FT 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
35000 FT 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
40000 FT 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
45000 FT 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
50000 FT 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
66000 FT 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
67500 FT 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
In all cases, set the applicable switch to SEL for those pulses identified by a logic 1.
For addtional information on Gillham code structure, refer to paragraph 5.7 in this section.
6/15/1995 5-79

5.0 CSDB tun- On ATC-601:

ing and Press RUN/STOP to stop the interrogations
altitude test On test panel:
Set POWER OFF
On DATATRAC 200:
Turn POWER to OFF
Wait a few seconds, then turn POWER to ON
At the initial screen, select CSDB (enter C and press ENT)
At the DATA RECEIVER SETUP screen, press 2 (for HEX DATA) and press ENT (this brings up the
RCV DATA screen)
Press XMT to show the TRANSMITTER SETUP screen (default values should be correct)
Press ENT (this brings up the combined screen)
Note screen ----------> LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX RCV DATA MSEC

>> NO DATA RECEIVED
LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX XMT DATA MSEC
(Note cursor is under the B in the XMT LBL field)
On the back of the DATATRAC 200:

Move the cables (HI and LO) connected to the 429 TX to CSDB TX
Move the cables (HI and LO) connected to the 429 RX to CSDB RX
On DATATRAC 200: LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX XMT DATA MSEC

1E 10011001 63 52 44 13 100
Enter 1E (this is the CSDB
|||||||| || || ||<||<-Gillham altitude *
tuning word label)
|||||||| ||<||<-ATC code *
DATATRAC responds with a
|||||| |<- SI; 01 = side 1, 10 = side 2
default field of 0s and 100 below
||||||<-Test; 1 = on
MSEC
Change XMT data field as shown |||||<-ATC ident; 1 = on
-------------> ||||<-Altitude reporting; 1 = on
(Be sure to press INC) |||<-Mode; 1 = standby
||<-Pad (not used)
|<-Validity; 1 = valid
* Refer to paragraph 5.6.3.2 for code description.
On ATC-601: select ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST NO REPLY **

ATCRBS REPLY TEST (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
and press RUN to indicate TEST CODE= ALT= [ ]
RUNNING
----------->
6/15/1995 5-80

5.0 CSDB tuning On test panel:

(contd) and altitude Set CONTROL DATA SELECT to CSDB
test (contd) Set ALTITUDE DATA, ALTITUDE TYPE SELECT to CSDB (CTL)
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to CSDB PORT 1
Set ARINC 572 ALT IN to TO CTL
Set SOURCE SELECT to CTL
On the test panel CONTROL CONNECTOR J1, connect two jumpers:
From Pin To Pin
26 41
25 8 Note: These jumpers are not required if MOD 1 has been installed in the
test panel.
Set POWER switch ON
DATATRAC 200 screen --> LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX RCV DATA MSEC
1F 11011001 63 52 44 13 0100
A0 10000001 20 20 00 00 0100
F3 00000001 00 00 00 00 0100
LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX XMT DATA MSEC
1E 10011001 63 52 44 13 100
On test panel: Notice that the same data is displayed. (The data may
Set the OUTPUT PORT SELECT flicker somwhat while you are switching; ignore that.)
switch to CSDB PORT 2.
Important points:
The 1F RCV word is a reflection of the 1E XMT word
The A0 RCV word is irrelavent here, the hex data shown above can be different
The F3 word is the diagnostic word and should indicate no faults; HEX DATA is all 0s. Bits 1
and 0 of the status byte are the SI bits and indicate that the UUT is set for side 1 (01) which
must be true of all word labels.
The ATC-601 screen shows: ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

CODE=5263 ALT= 32,800 FT [1344]
Important points:
Notice that the CODE agrees with the HEX XMT DATA 1E word except that the hex digital pair
groupings are reversed in order. That is, the XMT and RCV words show 63 52 while the ATC-
601 shows 5263. In the altitude field, the XMT and RCV words show 44 13 while the ATC-601
shows 1344.
6.0 ARINC 429 On ATC-601: select ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

Altitude Test ATCRBS REPLY TEST and press RUN (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
to indicate TEST RUNNING ---------> ***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set the POWER switch to OFF
Set ALT TYPE SELECT to ARINC 429
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT switch to ARINC 429 PORT A
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch to PA
On DATATRAC 200:
Move the TX and RX leads to the ARINC ports.
Reinitialize the unit for ARINC 429 operation.
6/15/1995 5-81

6.0 ARINC On DATATRAC 200: Lbl SI 29-Hex RCV-11 SM P MSEC

>> NO DATA RECEIVED
(contd) 429 Alti- Set XMT to ON
tude Test Setup screen ------> Lbl SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
(contd) 031 01 55980 00 1 100
203 01 20000 11 1 100
On test panel: POWER indicator comes on immediately and after a

Set POWER to ON few seconds the XFEED OUT lamp turns on. The ATC-
EXT STBY to OPR 601 REPLY lamp indicates that UUT is responding to
Be sure REP ALT switch is at PA interrogations.

CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]

XMT word. See note 1 under step 1.2 above.)
DATATRAC 200 RCV screen shows: Lbl SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSRC

031 01 559A0 11 1 0200
-------> 203 01 20000 11 1 0200
350 01 00000 11 1 0200
(ignore any other displayed labels, and the order is not

important)

Altitude Be sure the SOURCE SELECT switch (lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]
Control is set to SEL. ***** TEST RUNNING *****
Disc-retes
Tests On the test panel: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
blanks.
jack to the ALTERNATE DIGITAL ALTI- altitude data being supplied on port B.
TUDE SOURCE jack.
switchable.
CTL Note: This switches the UUT to the altitude data sup-
plied on the control port.
6/15/1995 5-82

6.1 ARINC On the test panel: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display remains.
(contd) Alltitude Disconnect the parallel connection from
Control the ALTERNATE DIGITAL ALTITUDE Note: This verifies the previous step; that altitude is
Disc-retes SOURCE jack. (Wait about 5 seconds) being drawn from the control port; all other sources are
Tests now disconnected.
(contd)
switchable.

SOURCE jack.
On test panel: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.

Set the AUTO ALT switch to SEL
(-003 UUT units only) Note: This enables the automatic altitude port select
feature and verifies that the UUT switches to alternate
port B even though port A is selected (REP ALT at PA).
On test panel: Notice that ATC-601 altitude display blanks.

Set AUTO ALT switch to OFF.
(-003 UUT units only) Note: This verifies that the AUTO ALT discrete is
switchable.
On the DATATRAC: Lbl SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSRC

031 01 55988 00 1 100
Set the XMT label 031 word to
--------> Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.

On test panel: Lbl SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSRC

031 01 55980 00 1 100
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY.
On DATATRAC 200:
Set the XMT label 031 word to
--------->
6/15/1995 5-83

The remainder of the step is optional. Testing for various digital altitude inputs is primarily software verification and therefore
unnecessary. If the UUT responds to one altitude word input it will likely respond to all.
If you wish, you can set the XMT label 203 data field bits 12 through 28 to any combination of 1 and 0. The RCV label 203
word data field will follow the XMT word exactly while the ATC-601, set to the ATCRBS REPLY TEST mode, will show the altitude
to the nearest 100 feet. When set to the MODE UF0 TEST, the ATC-601 displays altitude to the nearest 25 feet. The label
203 bit values are shown in note 2 following step 1.2.

In the XMT label 203 data word, set all noted bits to 1. You should see your selected altitude, to the nearest 100 feet,
displayed on the ATC-601.
7.0 ARING On test panel:

575 Alti- SOURCE SELECT: SEL
tude Test ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
On DATATRAC 200: LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC

>> NO DATA RECEIVED
Set screen ------>
LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
203 01 10000 00 1 100
On test panel:
Connect parallel control cable to PRI-
MARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE SOURCE
jack.

CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
ATC-601 screen -------->
On test panel: LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC

031 01 55980 00 1 0100
ARINC 575
On DATATRAC:
Set XMT label 203 word
-------->
(just change the SM to 00)

CODE=5263 ALT=16,400 FT [3230]
6/15/1995 5-84

7.0 ARINC DATATRAC screen ---------> LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC

203 01 10000 11 1 100
(con- 575 Alti-
(ignore any other displayed words)
td) tude Test
(contd) LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
203 01 20000 00 1 100
In addition to testing the altitude type select discrete, this test illustrates the differences between
ARINC 429 and ARINC 575 data. Notice that the msb in the RCV label 203 word (above) are offset
by one bit from the XMT label 203 word and the SSM code is 11 as opposed to the 00 in the XMT word.
In ARINC 575, the LSB is bit 13; in ARINC 429 the LSB is bit 12. In ARINC 575, bits 30 and 31
determine the sign; 00 being positive.
Notice also, that the altitude displayed on the ATC-601 corresponds to the code in the RCV word; not
the XMT word. This is also due to the UUT being configured for ARINC 575 and thus the bit values
are offset by 1 bit position which has the effect of changing the altitude by a factor of 1/2.
On test panel: LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC

031 01 55980 00 1 100
ARINC 429
On DATATRAC:
Set XMT label 203 word ---->
(Set SM to 11) ATC-601 screen:

CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
6/15/1995 5-85


Disc-retes Set all test panel mode s address switches to SEL except switch P1-56; set it to OFF.

Press RUN to start

Note screen ----->
The remainder of this step will require a few minutes because of the delay involved in cycling power
between each switch setting.
an octal digit 6.
an octal digit 4.
6/15/1995 5-86


Discrete
Select On DATATRAC 200: LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
and Set XMT words as shown ----->: 203 01 20000 11 1 100
TCAS
On test panel: After a few seconds the RCV portion of the DATATRAC
Set POWER switch ON 200 screen shows:
After data appears on the RCV display, LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
350 01 00000 11 1 0200
press RCV and then INC to scroll the
words so that you can see the 350 word.
On test panel: After a few seconds the RCV portion of the DATATRAC
Set POWER switch to OFF 200 screen shows: (use INC key to scroll words)
Set TCAS/NO TCAS switch to TCAS
350 01 45980 11 1 0200
On test panel:
Refer to paragraph 5.7.2 for a more detailed discussion. The 45980 display translates into a
diagnostic B3 which is interpreted: TCAS Bus Inactive. This verifies that the discrete properly
configures the unit for operation with a TCAS. However, no TCAS data is being supplied in this step,
therefore, the unit declares a B3 diagnostic.
TCAS Connect the DATATRAC RCV to the LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
275 00 00000 00 1 0150
Bus Test, TCAS OUT jack. Verify that the data 276 10 07C00 00 1 0150
XPDR to word labels are detectable as shown ----- 350 01 45980 11 1 0150
TCAS --->.
Notice the higher speed. Other labels may also be
Note: Except for the diagnostic code in present.
the label 350 data word, the data content
6/15/1995 5-87

9.0 TCAS to Note: In this step you need the capability of transmitting data to two separate input ports simulta-
(contd) XPDR neously and at different speeds; the 031 control word must be low speed (12.5-kbps) while the
Bus Test TCAS label 274 data word must be high speed (100-kbps). All DATATRAC instruments, as well as
the JC Air 429E, can transmit at either of these speeds but only the DATATRAC 400 can do so on
two separate ports simultaneously. Otherwise, you will need two simulators. If you do not have this
capability, you may not be able to verify the integrity of the TCAS bus input port.
If you are using a DATATRAC 400, or LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC

274 00 C0000 00 1 0100
have access to a second bus simulator,
connect your second transmitter port or Note: Be sure to set the higher speed.
data bus simulator to the TCAS IN and
setup as shown -------->:
On bus reader RCV (1) display: After a few seconds, the 350 word shows:
Note: The objective is to verify that the LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
350 01 00000 11 1 0150
UUT recognizes a valid TCAS label 274
word and declares this by removing the Note: This verifies that the unit is able to receognize a
diagnostic B3. valid TCAS label 274 word and declare that by remov-
ing the B3 diagnostic code.
Set the XMT (2) word to OFF returns.
Note: Disconnect XMT (2) from the

TCAS IN jack and CONNECT IT TO THE
PRIMARY DIGITAL CONTROL.
Reconnect RCV to the DATA BUS
OUTPUT port.
in this Set POWER switch to OFF -----------------RCV--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
test, all Set TCAS/NO TCAS switch to NO 350 01 00 00 01 17 11 1 0200
setups TCAS
On DATATRAC 200:
On test panel:
6/15/1995 5-88


Test SIDE 1.
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as in step 1.1.

CODE= ALT= [ ]
------> ***** TEST RUNNING *****

CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
On test panel: Notice that UUT does not reply (X FEED OUT lamp and
(wait a few seconds, then)
Set POWER switch to ON Note: UUT does not respond because the SI and side
Note: If you do not allow sufficient time for the CPU to
power down, it may not recognize the power interruption
and fail to re-initialize properly. The SIDE 1/2 strap is
one of several that is not monitored except at initial-
ization. Therefore, if this test fails, cycle power again
but allow more time between power-off and power-on.
On DATATRAC 200: Notice that unit begins to reply almost immediately

On XMT, label 031 word, set the SI to (XFEED OUT lamp turns on and ATC-601 REPLY lamp
10 and press INC lights).
Note: UUT responds because SI and side strapping

agrees.
On DATATRAC 200: Notice that unit stops replying (X FEED OUT lamp and
On XMT, label 031 word, set SI to 01 ATC-601 REPLY lamps turn off).
and press INC.
Set POWER switch to OFF lamps light and the ATC-601 shows that the UUT is
(wait a few seconds)
6/15/1995 5-89


GND Same as initial setup
Discrete Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Test
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as for step 1.1.

Set for MODE S UF4 TEST screen DF FS= DR= UM= AC=
--------> ADDRESS=
Set EXT STBY switch OPR lamps light and the ATC-601 shows:
Set AIR/GND switch AIR
DF 4 FS=0 DR=00 UM=00 AC=32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
Note: Initially the screen may show FS=2 for about 2


DF 4 FS=1 DR=00 UM=00 AC=32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001

6/15/1995 5-90


Discrete
Test On DATATRAC 200:
(TDR-94D Same setup as for step 1.1.
only)
PERIOD = SECONDS
top antenna port.
ANT
TAIL NUMBER =
You can watch the PERIOD display for a SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
time. After PASSED appears, press
RUN/STOP to stop the test.

PERIOD = SECONDS
ANT TAIL NUMBER =
After FAILED (or PASSED) appears, press
RUN/STOP to stop the test. Note: This test is intended to fail. When the UUT is set
indicates PASSED, recheck all switch settings, or suspect
a problem with the SGL/DL ANT select strap. It should
not pass.
On test panel:
On ATC-601:

antenna connector
antenna connector
connector
6/15/1995 5-91

12.0 DL ANT On test panel: After 15 to 20 seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows:
/SGL Set POWER switch to ON. See note below.
ANT Dis-
crete Test On ATC-601: ** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
(contd) Press RUN to start the test. TAIL NUMBER =
(TDR-94D SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
only) After PASSED appears, press RUN/STOP
to stop the test.
On test panel: After 15 to 20 seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows:

Set POWER switch OFF See note below.
After PASSED appears, press RUN/STOP
to stop the test.
1.6 to 2.4. When the UUT is set for single antenna operation there should be no transmission from
the top antenna port and the transmission PERIOD from the bottom antenna port can vary from 0.6 to
1.4.
13.0 Burst On test panel:

Tune and Set POWER switch OFF
Cross- CONTROL DATA PORT SEL:
Feed In PB
Discrete
On ATC-601, set for ATCRBS REPLY ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

TEST screen -----> (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
If necessary, reconnect ATC-601 to top
antenna connector, with terminator on
bottom antenna connector.

On DATATRAC 200: Notice that the X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
Set XMT to OFF lamps turns off (X FEED IN stays on).
Note: The easiest method of interrupting

the data input is simply to disconnect it
from the test panel.
6/15/1995 5-92

13.0 Burst On DATATRAC 200: Notice that the X FEED IN and OUT and REPLY lamps
(con- Tune and Set XMT to ON (reconnect the control are lit.
td) Cross- input)
Feed In
Discrete On test panel: Notice that XFEED IN lamp turns off and that UUT
Test Set XFEED switch to OUT. replies (X FEED OUT and REPLY lamps turn on).
(contd) Set BURST switch to BURST
On test panel: Notice that UUT continues to reply (X

Disconnect the DATATRAC XMT input FEED OUT and REPLY lamps stay on).
from the test panel.
On DATATRAC 200: Notice that UUT stops replying (X FEED OUT and
Set BURST switch to OFF REPLY lamps turn off).
On test panel: Notice that UUT does not reply (X FEED OUT and
Set BURST switch to BURST REPLY lamps remain off).
On test panel: Notice that UUT replies (X FEED OUT and REPLY
Reconnect the DATATRAC XMT to the lamps turn on).
test panel
On test panel:
Set BURST switch to OFF

Port Dis- Set POWER switch OFF
crete Test OUTPUT PORT SELECT: ARINC 429 PORT A
On DATATRAC 200:
Set for the same screen as for test 1.1
On ATC-601, set for ATCRBS REPLY ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

TEST screen -----> (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
Set POWER switch ON the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the unit
is replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates
PASSED.

Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT switch to FEED OUT and REPLY lights are on and ATC-601
ARINC 429 PORT B display does not change.
On test panel:
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT switch to
ARINC 429 PORT A
6/15/1995 5-93


Test PORT PA
On DATATRAC 200:
On ATC-601, set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

screen -----> (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]

Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch FEED OUTand REPLY lights are on and ATC-601 dis-
to ARINC PORT PB play does not change.


On DATATRAC 200:

CODE= ALT= [ ]
screen ----------> ***** TEST RUNNING *****
note below.
PASSED.
6/15/1995 5-94


Be sure that all three MAX AIRSPEED switches are set to OFF (opposite of SEL).
On DATATRAC 200:
(The DATATRAC is used here only for
tuning data.)

Set for MODE S UF0 TEST screen ------> DF VS= RI= AC=
ADDRESS=
unit is replying.

DF 0 VS=0 RI=8 AC= 32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
shown in the following list. Cycle power between each switch change. Allow about 2 or 3 seconds
OFF time and about 5 seconds for processor initialization and ATC-601 response time between each
switch setting.

OFF OFF OFF 8
SEL OFF OFF 9
OFF SEL OFF A
SEL SEL OFF B
OFF OFF SEL C
SEL OFF SEL D
OFF SEL SEL E
6/15/1995 5-95


Test
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as for test 1.1.

CODE= ALT= [ ]
pulses at about 1 transmission every 2 sec. Of particu-
lar importance, however, is that the channel A (sup-
pression) pulse is about 30 s long during ATCRBS
bracket the squitter transmission. The squitter trans-
mission is a DF11 reply about 72 s long.
6/15/1995 5-96


Discrete ADLP.
Strap
DATATRAC RCV screen ------> LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC

350 00 60000 11 1 0200
operating.

350 00 25100 11 1 0200
Set DATALINK switch to ADLP. Note: The diagnostic A2 identifies an inactive ADLP
Be sure DATALINK SELECT switch is bus. This test verifies that the ADLP enable discrete is
set to A/B. functional.
DATATRAC RCV screen ------>

350 01 60000 11 1 0200
Set POWER switch to OFF.
Set DATALINK switch to NO ADLP.
DATATRAC RCV screen ------>
also not tested.
6/15/1995 5-97


Discrete

CODE= ALT= [ ]

031 00 55984 11 1 0200
Press and release the REMOTE IDENT
|<----Ident bit
switch.
On DATATRAC 200:
Note: The 4 should appear in the data field only while
Note RCV screen ----->:
the switch is being pressed. This verifies that the dis-
crete input is functional.

Notice the ID display. ID should dis- (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=ID5263 ALT= 32,800 FT [1344]
play for about 18 seconds.
|<----ID display
On Datatrac 200: LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC

031 00 55984 00 1 100
Set the label 031 XMT word:
On DATATRAC RCV and on ATC-601: You should see the same displays as immediately
above. If the test failed using the REMOTE IDENT
On Datatrac 200: LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC

031 00 55980 00 1 100
Set the label 031 XMT word:
6/15/1995 5-98


AIR/GND: AIR
On DATATRAC 200:

CODE= ALT= [ ]
----------> ***** TEST RUNNING *****

031 01 559A0 11 1 0200
screen shows: ---------> 203 01 00000 11 1 0200
350 01 00000 11 1 0200
(You may need to press INC to display all three labels.)
In the next few steps, watch the

DATATRAC RCV screen carefully.
On the test panel: After a few seconds, notice that the DATATRAC and
Press and hold the SELF TEST ATC-601 screens do not change. (The test panel TEST
pushbutton for about 1 sec. lamp lights while you hold the switch but otherwise
there is no change.)
6/15/1995 5-99


bearing on UUT operation, however. If On the DATATRAC, notice that the SMs change to 10
the lamp does not light, check the test and then back to 11. This instrument has a tendency to
panel. retain superceded data words, therefore, you may need
to clear the screen repeatedly to be sure that you are
On the DATATRAC 200, press RCV viewing current data. You should try to be especially
(either once or twice) to return to the watchful of the 350 data word and try to catch any
setup screen, followed by ENT, to clear diagnostic codes that may be displayed during the self-
the screen of any extraneous labels. test sequence.
OFF.
ON.
for about 1 s.
On the test panel: Notice the self-test displays as described above reap-
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to pear.
ON.
for about 1 s.
assurance that the unit is operational. However, this test does not satisfy the requirements of a
Detailed Performance Test which must be performed after any repair operation.
6/15/1995 5-100
5.4.5.11 Procedures using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,

Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver
manual, it may be necessary to upgrade the panel. Refer to paragraph 5-8.
If not already done, connect equipment as shown in figure 5-2 using cables shown in figure 5-9.
TX to test panel DIGITAL CONTROL port,
Parallel connect TX to test panel PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE PORT,
RX to test panel DATA BUS READER port.
Connect an rf termination to the TOP antenna port (TDR-94D only).
Preset the switches as shown in paragraph 5.4.5.6 above. Be sure POWER switch is OFF and EXT
On test panel, set the MODE S ADDRESS switches to any combination except all OFF or all to SEL.
If all switches are set OFF or all set SEL, a diagnostic code FF will result.
1.1 Setup Turn the JcAIR 429E on and set the TX 1 031 01 1566C1 00
203 01 640001 11
and TX 2 screens ----->
CODE= ALT= [ ]
Press RUN to start
See Note in next cell below.
1.2 ARINC 429 On the ATC-601, press RUN UUT responds to interrogations as indicated by a lighted
tuning test ATC-601 screen ---------> XFEED OUT lamp on the test panel and a lighted REPLY
Note: When power is applied and proper
control data is supplied, the TDR-94/94D ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
should turn on the XFEED OUT lamp (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
almost immediately. The FAULT MON CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
lamp may be off for a few seconds and ***** TEST RUNNING *****
then turn on. A lighted FAULT MON lamp
should generally be seen as a no-fault To change the CODE, see note 1 below.
indication. See table 109. To change the ALTITUDE, see note 2 below.
The JcAIR 429E RX displays show 203 01 E40000 11

031 01 F56681 11
---------> 350 01 600001 11

test. See Note 3 below.
6/15/1995 5-101

Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
Note 1. You can change the (octal) CODE=XXXX display by changing data bits 18 through 29 in the label 031 data word (TX
field of the JcAIR 429E) as follows:
ATC-601 digit: First Second Third Fourth

Bit: 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Data: Par SSM |<-----Data -------> ----->| Pad
Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
JcAIR 429E (Hex): | 1 | | 5 | | 6 | | 6 |
Binary: 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Octal value: 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1
Produces CODE: 5 2 6 3
JcAIR 429E (Hex) bits: 5th 6th
Bit: 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Bit values: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| | | | Pad | |<- |<--SDI
Assignment: Pad Pad | | |<--Altitude reporting, 1 = OFF
| |<--Ident, 1 = ON
Note 2: You can set the TX label 203 data field bits 12 through 28 to any combination of 1 and 0. The RCV 1 label 203 word
data field will reflect the TX word while the ATC-601 will show the altitude to the nearest 100 feet. The label 203 word data bit
values are as follows:
JcAIR 429E digit *: lst | 2nd | | 3rd |

Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit: 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
Alt value:(sign bit; 0 = +) 65536 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512
(in feet)
JcAIR 429E digit *: | 4th | | 5th | | 6th |
Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit: 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09
Alt value 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 ** ** **
(in feet)
Determine the altitude by totaling the bit values of all bits set to 1.
* The left-most Hex Data bit (bit 1) is determined by the parity bit 32, the SSM bits 31 and 30, and sign bit 29. Since bit 29
must always be a 0, this Hex bit must always be an odd number. **= Not used
Note 3: You may see a label 371 data word. This is the ARINC 429 Specific Equipment Identification word which is
6/15/1995 5-102

Press AUTO TEST
Press RUN to start
Note: This test requires a few
seconds to run. It will stop
automatically.
On test panel:
On UUT:
bottom.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON

REPLY conditions are the result of no ADLP (Airborne Data Link Processor) data in this setup. This same condition is likely
to occur when using the ATC-601 as a ramp tester when testing an installation not equipped with an ADLP. To verify that the
test can be seen as successful, proceed as follows:

Press RUN to start
On the ATC-601, use the SELECT up arrow or down arrow key to scroll through the following list of tests performed; the

ITM A: 128.00 (0.25) s
(All others): 3.00 (0.50) s

ITM: =< 0.06 s

6/15/1995 5-103

UUT should reply to this interrogation. Then UUT is
interrogated with F2 equal to F1. UUT should not reply.
PASSED indicates correct response to both tests.
response.
reply.
6/15/1995 5-104

NO. TEST NAME AND RESULT TEST SPECIFICATION / DESCRIIPTION
15.0 ** MODE S UF21 TEST - NO REPLY ** UUT is interrogated with UF16, UF20, and UF21.
These formats are all related to the airborne data link
function. This function has not been implemented.
The TDR-94/94D will not reply to these interrogation
formats. NO REPLY should not be seen as a failure.
16.0 ** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED ** When set for daul antenna operation, the TDR-94D
transmits a squitter pulse once each second, alternating
between top and bottom antenna ports. The ATC-601
verifies that one squitter pulse is received every 1.6 to
2.4 seconds. The test panel ANT SGL/DL switch must
be in the DL position. When set for single antenna
operation, or when testing a TDR-94, only the bottom
antenna port is used. In this case the ATC-601 verifies
that one squitter pulse is received every 0.6 to 1.4
seconds. When you change the ANT SGL/DL switch,
you must cycle power to the UUT in order for it to take
effect. PASSED indicates a correct UUT response.
18.0 ** DIVERSITY TEST - PASSED ** ATC-601 monitors squitter pulses on active antenna
port (as in test 16) and then monitors for intervening
squitter pulses that are not greater than 20 dB below
the active squitter. This test will always fail when the
UUT is a TDR-94 (non diversity) because squitter is
transmitter every second on the same antenna port. If
you are testing a TDR-94D and the DL ANT/SGL ANT
switch is set to SGL ANT, the test will also fail because
this causes the unit to operate like a TDR-94. PASSED
indicates a correct response from a TDR-94D.
19.0 ** MTL DIFFERENCE TEST - PASSED ** ATC-601 verifies that the MTL difference between mode
a and mode c responses is < 1.0 dB. At this point,
another press of the arrow key will display the first item;
either 1.0 or 18.0, depending on which arrow was used.
6/15/1995 5-105


output and Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Rcvr Set POWER switch OFF
Sensitivity
Test On ATC-601: ** POWER TEST - Top Antenna **
Press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING --- ***** TEST RUNNING *****
------>
On JcAIR 429E: set TX screen --- 031 01 1566C1 00

203 01 640001 11
--->

If the UUT is a TDR-94, skip this step. You should see a similar display on the ATC-601
On test panel: except this data is applicable to the top antenna port.
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY The data can be slightly different. See below for test
Swap the rf cable connection and
termination on the UUT antenna ports. Note: You may also select bottom antenna screen on
(Rf cable to bottom port and termination the ATC-601.
to top antenna port.)
On ATC-601:
Wait a few seconds then press
RUN/STOP to stop the test.
6/15/1995 5-106


(con- output and ERP: > 48.5 dBm and < 57.0 dBm
td) Rcvr MTL: -73.0 (4.0) dBm
Sensitivity
Test The ATC-601 will indicate that the UUT has failed if the MTL is more than -77.0 dBm or less than -71
(contd) dBm. Collins prefers, however, that a failure should be reported only if the MTL is less than -71
dBm. Therefore, if you have a unit displaying an MTL of -77.1 or more, you should see that value as
acceptable. Obviously, an MTL indication approaching -80 dBm or more may be cause for
test evaluation:
50 16.99 46.99
100 20.00 50.00
150 21.76 51.76
200 23.01 53.01
300 24.77 54.77
350 25.44 55.44
400 26.02 56.02
450 26.53 56.53
To convert milliwatts to dBm, or watts to dBW:

a. For calculators with log(10) (usually written log or LOG): P(dBW) = 10 x LOG(P).
b. For calculators with log(e) (usually written ln or LN): P(dBW) = 10 x [LN(P) / LN(10)]
In both cases, P must be in watts. For dBm, P must be in milliwatts; for example:
450 watts = 450 000 milliwatts.
To convert from dBm to milliwatts or dBW to watts:
a. For calculators equipped with LOG : P = INVLOG (P(dBW) / 10)
b. For calculators equipped with LN : P = INVLN [(P(dBW) / 10) x 2.30259]

The result P will be in milliwatts if you use P(dBm) , or watts if you use P(dBW).
Most scientific calculators have both the LN (natural logarithm - base e) and the LOG (logarithm base
10) capabiliity. Likewise, most have an INV (inverse) function. Thus you must press INV and then
LN or LOG for the INVLN or INVLOG function.
6/15/1995 5-107


Test CODE= ALT= [ ]
Press RUN to start

Set SOURCE SEL switch to SEL
On JcAIR 429E: 031 01 1566C1 00

Set TX screen ------>
Set POWER to OFF lamp indicates that UUT is responding to interrogations.
Set all ARINC 572 switches to OFF:
Set POWER to ON
On ATC-601:
Press RUN.
JcAIR 429E RCV 1 screen shows: --------- 203 01 E0B861 11

031 01 F56681 11
----------->
(ignore any other labels)
ATC-601 Screen shows: ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

--------------------> (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT=5900 FT [4460]

TX word. See note 1 under step 1.2 above)
the RX data word on the JcAIR 429E display. By cycling each switch between OFF and SEL you should see the ATC-601
display and the JcAIR 429E 203 data word change. If the displays do not change for a particular switch, this would indicate
either an open or a shorted code line. If the wrong altitude is shown, this would suggest that the code line is affecting another
line; i.e., causing two or more inputs to change simultaneously. In either case the UUT, the test panel, or the interconnecting
cable needs repair.
There is no serious need to verify the correctness of the RCV word provided the ATC-601 display is correct.

A1 (SEL) 23,600 FT [5460] B1 (SEL) 3,600 FT [4560]
A2 (SEL) 7,600 FT [6460] B2 (SEL) 5,600 FT [4660]
A4 (OFF) -400 FT (0460] B4 (OFF) 6,600 FT [4060]
C2 (OFF) 5,800 FT [4440] D4 (SEL) 55,600 FT [4464]
For additional information on Gillham code structure, refer to paragraph 5.7 below.
6/15/1995 5-108

5.0 CSDB This test cannot be performed using a JcAIR 429E because these instruments are not capable of
tuning transmitting or receiver CSDB data. However, as an acceptable alternative, you can use a CTL-
test 92/92A, connected to the test panel using the cable shown in figure 907.
Turn power off and connect CTL-92/92A to test panel. Be sure CTL-92/92A mode knob is set to
OFF.
Disconnect the JCAIR 429E from the test panel.
Turn power on and set the CTL-92/92A mode knob to ALT.
On the CTL: ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

Set the CTL-92/92A to 5263 or any (lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]
desired ident code. ***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel: The CODE 5263 depends on your selection on the CTL-
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT to 92/92A code select knobs. See note 1 under step 1.2
CSDB above. The ALT display depends on the altitude
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to CSDB selection on the test panel ARINC 572 ALT IN switches.
PORT 1
Set ALT TYPE SELECT to CSDB Be sure that the ACT display, on the CTL-92/92A does
Set ARINC 572 ALT IN to TO CTL not flash. A flashing ACT indicates that the control
Set SOURCE SELECT to CTL feedback label 1F data, from the TDR, does not agree
with the CLT-92/92A output label 1E data to the TDR.
Only one of the two data CTL input ports is being used;
pins U/V.
On the test panel: Be sure that the ACT display, on the CTL-92/92A, does
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to CSDB not flash. A flashing ACT at either port selection
PORT 2 indicates that output port has failed. If both ports flash,
there may be a problem with the test panel wiring or the
CTL input.
5.1 CSDB In this altitude test configuration, Gillham altitude data is being supplied to the CTL (ARINC 572 ALT
altitude IN to CTL). The CTL converts this data to CSDB and supplies it to the TDR via the CSDB data
test output port (only 1 port is used; pins S/R). The CSDB altitude data is being read on the control bus
input (SOURCE SELECT to CTL). You can verify this by setting the CTL mode switch to ON. If you
suspect a problem with the altitude data, check the following:
On the test panel: The ATC-601 ALT display should be the same as
Set ARINC 572 ALT IN to TO TDR above since the ultimate source of altitude information
Set ALT TYPE SELECT to ARINC 572 is the same in both tests. If it is different here, suspect
Set SOURCE SELECT to SEL a problem with one or more of the altitude discrete
inputs to the CTL. If you encounter such a problem,
you can identify the defective discrete by returning
these three switches to the settings above and then
performing the ARINC 572 switching sequence shown
following step 4.0 above.
On test panel:
Set power to OFF
Disconnect the CTL-92/92A from the test panel
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT - ARINC PORT to PA
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to ARINC 429 PORT A
Reconnect the JcAIR 429E from the test panel.
6/15/1995 5-109

On test panel: 031 01 1566C1 00

203 01 640001 11
6.0 ARINC Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
429 Set POWER switch to OFF
Test OUTPUT PORT SELECT: ARINC 429
PORT A
On JcAIR 429E:
Set TX screen ------>
On ATC-601: select ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **

ATCRBS REPLY TEST and press RUN to (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
indicate TEST RUNNING ---------> ***** TEST RUNNING *****
Set POWER to ON lamp indicates that UUT is responding to interrogations.
Set EXT STBY to OPR

CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]

TX word. See note 1 under step 1.2 above.)
JcAIR 429E RX screen shows: 203 01 640001 11

-------> (ignore any other displayed labels)

Altitude Be sure the SOURCE SELECT switch (lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]
Control is set to SEL. ***** TEST RUNNING *****
Disc-retes
Tests On the test panel: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
blanks.
jack to the ALTERNATE DIGITAL altitude data being supplied on port B.
ALTITUDE SOURCE jack.
switchable.
CTL Note: This switches the UUT to the altitude data
supplied on the control port.
6/15/1995 5-110

6.1 ARINC On the test panel: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display remains.
(contd) Control Disconnect the parallel connection from
Disc-retes the ALTERNATE DIGITAL ALTITUDE Note: This verifies the previous step; that altitude is
Tests SOURCE jack. (Wait about 5 seconds) being drawn from the control port; all other sources are
(contd) disconnected.
On JcAIR 429E: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.

switchable.

SOURCE jack.
On test panel: Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.

Set the AUTO ALT switch to SEL
(-003 UUT units only) Note: This enables the automatic altitude port select
feature and verifies that the UUT does switch to
alternate port B even though port A is the selected port.

Set the AUTO ALT switch to OFF
(-003 UUT units only) Note: This verifies that the AUTO ALT discrete is
switchable.
On the JcAIR 429E: 031 01 9566E1 00

Set the TX label 031 word to
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
-------->
On test panel: 031 01 1566C1 00

Set EXT STBY switch to STBY.
On JcAIR 429E:
Set the TX label 031 word to:
--------->
6/15/1995 5-111

The remainder of the step is optional. Testing for various digital altitude inputs is primarily software verification and therefore
unnecessary. If the UUT responds to one altitude word input it will likely respond to all.
If you wish, you can set the TX label 203 data field bits 12 through 28 to any combination of 1 and 0. The RCV 1 label 203
word data field will follow the TX word exactly while the ATC-601, set to the ATCRBS REPLY TEST mode, will show the altitude
to the nearest 100 feet. When set to the MODE UF0 TEST, the ATC-601 displays altitude to the nearest 25 feet. The label
203 bit values are shown in note 2 following step 1.2.

In the TX label 203 data word, set all noted bits to 1. You should see your selected altitude, to the nearest 100 feet, displayed
on the ATC-601.

575 SOURCE SELECT: SEL
Test
On JcAIR 429E: 031 01 1566C1 00
203 01 640001 11
Set screen ------>
On test panel:
Connect parallel control cable to
PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE SOURCE
jack.

CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
ATC-601 screen -------->
On test panel:
Set ALT TYPE SELECT switch to
ARINC 575
On JcAIR 429E: 203 01 040001 00
Set TX label 203 word -------->
(just change the SSM to 00)

CODE=5263 ALT=16,400 FT [3230]
6/15/1995 5-112

7.0 ARINC JcAIR 429E RX screen ---------> 203 01 620001 11

(con- 575
td) Altitude In addition to testing the altitude type select discrete, this test illustrates the differences between
Test ARINC 429 and ARINC 575 data. Notice that the second data bit in the RX label 203 word (above)
(contd) one-half the bit value of the corresponding bit in the TX label 203 word and the SSM code is 11 as
opposed to the 00 in the TX word. In ARINC 575, the LSB is bit 13; in ARINC 429 the LSB is bit 12.
In ARINC 575, bits 30 and 31 determine the sign; 00 being positive.
Notice also, that the altitude displayed on the ATC-601 corresponds to the code in the RX word; not
the TX word. This is also due to the UUT being configured for ARINC 575 and thus the bit values
are offset by 1 bit position which has the effect of changing the altitude by a factor of 1/2.
On test panel: 031 01 1566C1 00

203 01 640001 11
Set ALT TYPE SELECT switch to
ARINC 429
On JcAIR 429E:
Set TX label 203 word ---->
ATC-601 screen:
CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
6/15/1995 5-113


Discretes Set all test panel mode s address switches to SEL except switch P1-56; set it to OFF.

Press RUN to start

Note screen ----->
The remainder of this step should be seen as optional unless you have reason to suspect a failure in
one or more of the address discrete lines. The procedure will require a few minutes because of the
delay involved in cycling power between each switch setting.
an octal digit 6.
an octal digit 4.
6/15/1995 5-114


Discrete
Select On JcAIR 429E:
and Same setup as STEP 1.1.
TCAS
On test panel: The JcAIR 429E RX screen shows:

Set POWER switch ON
350 01 600001 11
After unit begins operating, display the
350 word.
On test panel: The JcAIR 429E RX screen shows:

Set TCAS/NO TCAS switch to TCAS 350 01 68B301 11
On test panel: |<---diagnostic code B3
The diagnostic code B3 indicates a TCAS bus failure.
Bit 28 in the data word is also set which produces the 8
in the display. See paragraph 5.B. below.
Refer to paragraph 5.B. for a more detailed discussion. This display shows a diagnostic B3 which is
interpreted: TCAS Bus Inactive. This verifies that the discrete properly configures the unit for
operation with a TCAS. However, no TCAS data is being supplied in this step, therefore, the unit
declares a B3 diagnostic.
TCAS Connect the JcAIR 429E RX to the 275 00 800000 00

276 10 80F802 00
Bus Test, TCAS OUT jack. Verify that the data 350 01 68B301 11
XPDR to word labels are detectable as shown ----- |<---diagnostic code B3
TCAS --->.
Set the JcAIR 429E for high speed. Other labels may
Note: Except for the diagnostic code in also be present.
the label 350 data word, the data content
6/15/1995 5-115

9.0 TCAS to Note: In this step you need the capability of transmitting data to two separate input ports
(contd) XPDR simultaneously and at different speeds; the 031 control word must be low speed (12.5-kbps) while
Bus Test the TCAS label 274 data words must be high speed (100-kbps). All JcAIR 429E instruments can
transmit at either of these speeds but not on two separate ports simultaneously. If you do not have
this capability, you may not be able to verify the integrity of the TCAS bus input port.
If you have access to a second JcAIR 274 00 180000 00

429E, connect your second transmitter
Note: Be sure to set for high speed.
port or data bus simulator to the TCAS
IN and setup as shown -------->:
On bus reader RCV display: After a few seconds, the 350 word shows:
Note: The objective is to verify that the 350 01 680001 11

UUT recognizes a valid TCAS label 274 |<---diagnostic code 00
word and declares this by removing the
diagnostic B3.
Set the XMT 2 word to OFF returns.
Note: Disconnect XMT 2 from the TCAS

IN jack and reconnect RCV 1 to the
DATA BUS OUTPUT port.
in this Set POWER switch to OFF 350 01 000001 11
test, all Set TCAS/NO TCAS switch to NO
setups TCAS
On test panel:
6/15/1995 5-116


Test SIDE 1.
On JcAIR 429E:

CODE= ALT= [ ]

CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
On test panel: Note that unit does not reply (X FEED OUT lamp and
Note: UUT does not respond because the SDI and side
Note: Be sure to allow adequate time for the CPU to
reinitialize properly between power off and power on.
The SIDE 1/2 strap is one of several that are monitored
only at processor initialization. Therefore, if this tests
fails, cycle power again but allow more time between
power off and power on.
On JcAIR 429E: Notice that unit begins to reply almost immediately

On TX, label 031 word, set the SDI to (XFEED OUT lamp turns on and ATC-601 REPLY lamp
10 lights).
Note: UUT responds because the SDI and side

strapping agree.
On JcAIR 429E: Notice that unit stops replying (X FEED OUT lamp and
On TX, label 031 word, set SDI to 01. ATC-601 REPLY lamps turn off).
Set POWER switch OFF lamps light and the ATC-601 shows that the UUT is
Set POWER switch ON
6/15/1995 5-117


GND Set POWER switch OFF
Discrete TDR ALT SOURCE: EXT DIRECT
On JcAIR 429E:

Set for MODE S UF4 TEST screen -----> DF FS= DR= UM= AC=
ADDRESS=

DF 4 FS=0 DR=00 UM=00 AC=32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
Note: Initially the screen will show FS=2 for about 2


DF 4 FS=1 DR=00 UM=00 AC=32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001

6/15/1995 5-118


Discrete
Test On JcAIR 429E:
(TDR-94D Same setup as STEP 1.1.
only)
PERIOD = SECONDS
top antenna port.
ANT
TAIL NUMBER =
Watch the PERIOD display for a time. SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
You will notice it changing somewhat but
it should remain at or near 2 seconds.

PERIOD = SECONDS
ANT TAIL NUMBER =
Note: This test is intended to fail. When the UUT is set

indicates PASSED, recheck all switch settings or
suspect a problem with the SGL/DL ANT select strap.
It should not pass.
On test panel:
On ATC-601:

antenna connector
antenna connector
connector
6/15/1995 5-119

12.0 DL ANT On test panel: After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows: See
(contd) /SGL Set POWER switch ON note below.
ANT
Discrete On ATC-601: ** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
Test Press RUN to start the test. TAIL NUMBER =
(contd) SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
(TDR-94D
only)
Set POWER switch OFF note below.
1.6 to 2.4. When the TDR-94D is set for single antenna operation, or the UUT is a TDR-94, there is
no transmission from the top antenna port and and the transmission PERIOD from the bottom
antenna port can vary from 0.6 to 1.4.
13.0 Burst On ATC-601, set for SQUITTER TEST ** SQUITTER TEST - NO REPLY **
PERIOD = SECONDS
Tune and screen -----> TAIL NUMBER =
Cross- SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
Feed In If necessary, reconnect ATC-601 to
DiscreteT bottom antenna connector, with
est terminator on top (TDR-94D only)
connector.
On JcAIR 429E:
On test panel:
CONTROL DATA SELECT: PA
SOURCE SELECT: SEL
Be sure that X FEED IN/OUT switch is
set to OUT
Be sure that BURST TUNE switch is
set to OFF.

On JcAIR 429E: Notice that the X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
Set TX to OFF lamps turns off (X FEED IN stays on).
(The easiest way to turn TX off is to

disconnect it from the test panel)
6/15/1995 5-120

13.0 Burst On JcAIR 429E: Notice that the X FEED IN and OUT and REPLY lamps
(contd) Tune and Set TX to ON are lighted.
Cross-
Feed In On test panel: Notice that UUT continues to reply. Watch the unit for
Discrete Set X FEED IN/OUT switch to OUT a few seconds. (The X FEED IN lamp extinguishes
Test Set BURST TUNE to ON because the switch turns it off.)
(contd) On JcAIR 429E:
Set TX to OFF
Set BURST TUNE switch to OFF REPLY lamps turn off).
On test panel: Notice that UUT does not reply (X

Set BURST TUNE to ON FEED OUT and REPLY lamps do not light).
On JcAIR 429E: Notice that UUT replys (X FEED OUT and REPLY lamps
Set TX to ON are on).
Set BURST TUNE to OFF REPLY lamps are off).
On JcAIR 429E: Set TX to OFF
On JcAIR 429E: Set TX to ON X FEED OUT lamp and the REPLY lamp turns on again.
On test panel: X FEED OUT lamp flashes .

Set BURST TUNE switch to ON.
Set TX to ON

Port Set BURST TUNE to OFF
Discrete Set POWER switch to OFF
Test Set X FEED IN/OUT to OUT
CONTROL DATA SEL: PA
OUTPUT PORT SELECT: ARINC 429 PORT A
On JcAIR 429E: Both X FEED OUT and REPLY lamps are on.
The same as STEP 1.1
On test panel:
JcAIR 429E RCV screen -----> 031 01 F56681 11
Note: Be sure that the JcAIR screen flashes somewhat.

This indicates that the screen is being updated. A non-
flashing screen usually indicates that obsolete data is
being displayed.
On ATC-601, set for SQUITTER TEST After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen data indicates
PASSED.

Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT switch to FEED OUT and REPLY lights are on and JCAIR screen
ARINC 429 PORT B does not change.
6/15/1995 5-121


Test PORT PA
On JcAIR 429E:

PERIOD = SECONDS

Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch FEED OUTand REPLY lights are on and ATC-601
to ARINC PORT PB display does not change.


On JcAIR 429E:

CODE= ALT= [ ]
----------> ***** TEST RUNNING *****
note below.
PASSED.
6/15/1995 5-122


Be sure that all three MAX AIRSPEED switches are set to OFF.
On JcAIR 429E:
(The JcAIR 429E is used here only for
tuning data.)

Set for MODE S UF0 TEST screen ---> DF VS= RI= AC=
ADDRESS=
unit is replying.

DF 0 VS=0 RI=8 AC= 32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
shown in the following list. Cycle power and allow about 2 or 3 seconds of OFF time and about 5
seconds for processor initialization and ATC-601 response time between each switch setting.

OFF OFF OFF 8
SEL OFF OFF 9
OFF SEL OFF A
SEL SEL OFF B
OFF OFF SEL C
SEL OFF SEL D
OFF SEL SEL E
6/15/1995 5-123


Test
On JcAIR 429E:

Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST screen --> (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
pulses at about 1 transmission every 2 sec. Of
particular importance, however, is that the channel A
(suppression) pulse is about 30 s long during ATCRBS
bracket the squitter transmission. The squitter
transmission is a DF11 reply about 72 s long.
6/15/1995 5-124


Discrete ADLP.
Strap
Test On JcAIR 429E:
JcAIR 429E RX screen ------> 350 01 600001 11

operating.
On test panel: 350 01 64A201 11

Set POWER switch to OFF |<---diagnostic code A2
Set DATALINK switch to ADLP.
Be sure DATALINK SELECT switch is Note: The diagnostic A2 identifies an inactive ADLP
set to A/B. bus. This test verifies that the ADLP enable discrete is
Set POWER switch to ON. functional. The 4 reflects bit 27 in the data word which
is also set indicating an ADLP bus failure.
JcAIR 429E RX screen ------>
On test panel: 350 01 600001 11

Set POWER switch to OFF. |<---diagnostic code 00
Set DATALINK switch to NO ADLP.
JcAIR 429E RX screen ------>
also not tested.
6/15/1995 5-125


Discrete
Test On JcAIR 429E:

CODE= ALT= [ ]
On test panel: 031 01 756691 11

Set the POWER switch to ON |<----Ident bit
Set the EXT STBY switch to OPR
Press and release the REMOTE IDENT Note: The 9 should appear in the data field only while
switch. the switch is being pressed. This, together with the ID
On JcAIR 429E: display on the ATC-601, verifies that the REMOTE
Notice RX screen ----->: IDENTdiscrete input is functional.

Notice the ID display. ID should (lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=ID5263 ALT= 32,800 FT [1344]
display for about 18 seconds.
|<----ID display
On JcAIR 429E: 031 01 156691 00

Set the label 031 TX word:
On JcAIR 429E RX and on ATC-601 You should see the same displays as immediately
screens: above. If the test failed using the REMOTE IDENT
On JcAIR 429E: 031 01 956681 00

Set the label 031 TX word:
6/15/1995 5-126


AIR/GND: AIR
On JcAIR 429E:

CODE= ALT= [ ]
----------> ***** TEST RUNNING *****
On JcAIR 429E: 031 01 F56681 11

203 01 640001 11
RX screen shows: ---------> 350 01 600001 11
In the next few steps, watch the JcAIR

429E RX screen carefully.
On the test panel: After a few seconds, notice that the ATC-601 screen
Press and hold the SELF TEST does not change The JcAIR 429E RX display may go
pushbutton for about 1 sec. blank.
6/15/1995 5-127


bearing on UUT operation, however. If On the JcAIR 429E notice that the SM changes to 10
the lamp does not light, check the test and then back to 11.You should try to be especially
panel. watchful of the 350 data word and try to catch any
diagnostic codes that may be displayed during the self-
test sequence.
OFF.
ON.
for about 1 s.
On the test panel: Notice the self-test displays as described above

Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to reappear.
ON.
for about 1 s.
assurance that the unit is operational. However, this test does not satisfy the requirements of a Final
Performance Test which must be performed after any repair operation.
6/15/1995 5-128
5.4.5.11.1 JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver, Operating Instructions
This paragraph provides instructions that may be helpful If you are familiar with the JcAIR 429E:
in operating the JcAIR 429E Transmitter / Receiver. It is Set the TX 1 output to: 031 01 156681 00; this
intended for those who may be unfamiliar with its produces an ATC code: 5236.
operation and may need some help. Set the TX 2 output to: 203 01 640000 11; this
produces an altitude: 32,800 ft.
These are the TX hex values used most often in the
procedures of Table 5-13.
Setup and Operating Instructions if you are unfamiliar with the operation of the JcAir 429E:
During the course of this procedure, do not turn power off to the JcAIR 429E. All entered data is lost.
Preliminary setup
Set: TX Parity to ODD
TX Speed to LO
RX Speed to LO
Display to Hex
TX label and word setup for this procedure
1. When screen shows: 0 RX LABELS, press TX/RX

2. Screen shows: 0 TX LABELS
3. Press up arrow key
4. Screen shows: TX 1 INACTIVE
5. Press EDIT/DEL
6. Screen shows a blinking cursor on an otherwise blank screen
7. Enter 031
8. Press ENT
9. Screen shows: 031 BCN ATC CODE
10. Press LAB/DAT
11. Screen shows: 031 00 000000 00
12. Press EDIT/DEL
14. Enter 6-digit Hex code as desired or 156681
15. Press ENT
16. Screen shows: 031 01 956681 00 (The parity bit causes the change from 1 to 9 in the first digit)
17. Press TX/RX until screen shows 1 TX LABELS
18. Press up arrow until screen shows TX 2 INACTIVE
19. Press EDIT/DEL
21. Enter 203
22. Press ENT
23. Screen shows: 203 ALTITUDE
24. Press LAB/DAT
25. Screen shows: 203 00 000000 00
26. Press EDIT/DEL
28. Enter E40000
29. Press ENT
30. Screen shows: 203 01 E40000 11
6/15/1995 5-129
RX labels setup for this procedure:
Note: The procedures below may not be needed depending on the software version of the JcAIR 429E being used. The objective
of the test is to capture (trap) ARINC 429 labels 031, 203, and 350 words. Consult the JcAIR 429E Operators Manual for detailed
instructions if needed.
1. If the JcAIR 429E is not already on, turn POWER switch to ON

2. If necessary, press TX/RX until screen shows: 0 RX LABELS
3. Press TRAP
5. Enter 031
6. Press ENT
7. Screen shows: 031 SDI? _ (blinking cursor)
8. Enter 01
9. Press ENT
10. Screen shows: 0 RX LABELS
Note: This screen tends to blink slightly indicating that the display is being updated. If data is being received, the left digit will
increment (quite rapidly) to a maximum of 255 indicating the number of words that have been captured.
11. Press TRAP until screen again shows a blinking cursor

12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 but enter 203 at step 5. (At step 10, the display will show:
1 RX LABELS)
13. Repeat steps 3 through 11 but enter 350 at step 5. (At step 10, the display will show:
2 RX LABELS)
14. Press ENT twice.
To change altitude:
1. Press TX/RX until the screen shows: 2 TX LABELS (The 2 is an integer indicating the number of TX labels that are entered)
2. Press the up arrow key until the screen shows: 203 ALTITUDE
3. Press LAB/DAT until the screen shows: 203 01 E40000 11 (The six-digit hex code will be the most recently entered code)
4. Press EDIT/DEL
6. Enter the necessary hex value for the desired altitude or E41BB1 (33,654 ft) (see note 2 under step 1.4 below)
7. Press ENT
8. Screen shows: 203 01 641BB1 11
This entry will cause the ATC-601 to show 33,700 FT..
6/15/1995 5-130
To change ATC code:
1. Press TX/RX until the screen shows: 2 TX LABELS (The 2 is an integer indicating the number of TX labels that are entered)
2. Press the up arrow key until the screen shows: 031 BCN ATC CODE
3. Press LAB/DAT
4. Screen shows: 031 BCN ATC CODE
4. Press EDIT/DEL
6. Enter the necessary hex value for the desired ATC code or 5263
7. Press ENT
8. TX screen shows: 031 01 0E5C01 00
9. RX screen shows: 031 01 0E5C01 00
This entry will cause the ATC-601 to show CODE=6352
Note: You can set the JcAIR DISPLAY switch to Eng to show the 4-digit code. The ATC-601 CODE and JcAIR 429E Eng code
displays should always agree.
10. Reset the TX 031 and 203 words to the Initial Setup
To view captured data:
1. Press TX/RX until the screen shows: 3 RX LABELS

2. Press up arrow to select the desired word label/title:
031 BCN ATC CODE
203 ALTITUDE
350 MAINT DATA 1
3. Press LAB/DAT
4. Screen shows the selected word/data (only one at a time):
031 01 156681 00
203 01 640000 11
350 01 000001 11
To select a different word:
5. Press LAB/DAT
6. Press up arrow or down arrow to select one word label/title as shown in 2. above:
7. Press LAB/DAT to view the data
8. Screen shows the selected word data as in 4 above.
6/15/1995 5-131
5.5 MAINTENANCE DIAGNOSTIC

DATA RETRIEVAL AND ANALYSIS
Memory space consists of 256 bytes of
5.5.1 Introduction NVRAM. The general maintenance data
buffers use 14 bytes and the remainder is
This paragraph provides detailed information used for diagnostic data storage. Each
related to the diagnostic data stored in the diagnostic occurrence uses 10 bytes. Thus,
TDR-94/94D transponder. It is intended to there is space for 24 diagnostic occurrences.
support the procedures found in table 5-6. If more than 24 occurrences are detected, the
The stored data consists of fault and most recent is retained as follows:
maintenance data which is stored in
nonvolatile memory. Memory space, for this In -002 units, the most recent occurrence is
purpose, is allocated according to table 5-14. overwritten. That is, occurrences 1 through
Notice that there are two categories of data: 23 are retained while the 24th occurrence is
general maintenance and diagnostic data. overwritten when a new occurrence is
detected.
Table 5-14 shows structure of the diagnostic In -003 units, the oldest occurrence is
data. overwritten.
Table 5-14. Maintenance and Diagnostic Data Memory Structure
GENERAL MAINTENANCE DATA BUFFERS
DATA DESCRIPTION BYTES USED
Pointer to next diagnostic code location 2
Power-on cycle counter 2
Total diagnostic counter 1
Total power-on timer (minutes) 1
Power-on timer (hours) 2
Last POC diagnostic counter 1
Current POC timer 1
Last maintenance date 4
DIAGNOSTIC DATA BUFFERS
Time from last power on 1
Diagnostic code 1
(not used) 1
Transmitter temperature (degrees Celsius) 1
Current power-on cycle count buffer 2
Air/ground state at time of diagnostic 1
Time at end of power-on cycle 1
Altitude at time of diagnostic 1
Altitude at time of diagnostic 1
5/5/1993 5-132
5.5.2 General Diagnostic Formats Note 1: Label structure:
Maintenance diagnostic data is provided on Bit: 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

the ARINC 429 output buses only. The Value: 1 2 4 1 2 4 1 2
maintenance data is provided on a label 351 Label 277: 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
data word when requested by an ARINC 429 Label 351: 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
label 277 data word at any of the ARINC 429 See also paragraph 5.7.4.8
input ports. Unless a total download is
requested, the output is based on a one- Note 2: Test type definition:
response for one-request basis. In all cases,
no data is provided unless the Air/ground BIT 31 BIT 30 DEFINITION
discrete is at a logic 0; that is, the airplane is 0 0 Software rev status, request
on the ground. No stored diagnostic data is or response
provided on any of the CSDB buses. This 0 1 RAM memory output, re
procedure uses the Atlantic Instruments, quest or response;
DataTrac 400 DataTrac 400H, DataTrac 200 requires 4-digit address code
Databus Readers, or the JcAIR 429E Trans- for specific data
mitter/Receiver for data request and receive. 1 0 Last maintenance date, load
For the sake of brevity, in these procedures command *
the term "bus reader" should be understood 1 1 Detailed diagnostic data,
to apply to either of these instruments. If request or response.
you have or prefer an equivalent instrument, Requires 2-digit hex code(**)
feel free to use it. Some procedural for specific data
adaptation may be required. Control ports A, * Users are CAUTIONED not to use this
B, or C can be used. code. This code will destroy some of the
The general format of the maintenance re- stored diagnostic data. It is intended for use
quest and response data is as follows: only after bench repair. See paragraph
5.5.11.
BIT NO. BIT DESIGNATION
1 - 8 MSB - LSB LABEL (see note 1) ** Hex code listing:
9 Hex fault code B0 Hex Requested data
10 Hex fault code B1 01 Contents of total power-on cycle coun-
11 Hex fault code B2 ter buffer
12 Hex fault code B3 02 Contents of total fault counter buffer
13 Hex fault code B4 03 Contents of total power-on timer
14 Hex fault code B5 (hours) buffer
15 Hex fault code B6 04 Contents of total power-on timer
16 Hex fault code B7 (minutes) buffer
17 Hex fault code B8 05 Contents of last power-on cycle fault
18 Hex fault code B9 counter buffer
19 Hex fault code B10 06 Not defined
20 Hex fault code B11 07 Contents of last maintenance date
21 Hex fault code B12 buffer
22 Hex fault code B13 08-0F Not defined
23 Hex fault code B14 10 Download of the diagnostic codes
24 Hex fault code B15 detected during the most recent
25 Hex fault code B16 power-on cycle (if any- see below)
26 Hex fault code B17 11-1X Download of the diagnostic codes de-
27 Hex fault code B18 tected during preceding power-on cy-
28 Hex fault code B19 cles, where 11 is the next to the most
29 PAD recent and 1X is the request code that
30 Test type (see note 2) produces a 00EOF (End Of File) re-
31 Test type (see note 2) sponse.
32 Parity
5/5/1993 5-133
5.5.3 Software Revision Status (SRS) 5.5.3.1 SRS Word Definition

Reporting
Upon receipt of a label 277 request for
The software revision status is of diagnostic data, with bits 31 and 30 set to 00,
questionable value for field use. It is the TDR-94D responds with a label 351 word
presented here so that if a need or purpose with the following structure:
develops it can be accessed.
1: 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
2: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| | | | \ | | / \ | | / \ | | / | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | \ | | / \ | | /
| \ / \__BCD month \ BCD day / \ BCD yr /
| \__SSM bits, 11 implies a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
Description: Set the bus reader XMT for a label 277 data
Bit 32: Parity bit: This bit is set to a 1 when word as follows:
the total of the other 31 bits set to 1 is 0 or
an even number. DataTrac:
Bits 31 and 30: SSM bits: 11 implies a ON--------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 11-----User Data--- SSM Par msec
request for diagnostic data. 277 00 60 00 00 FD 11 1 0100
Bits 29 - 25: BCD month: Bit 29 gives the JcAIR 429E:
tens value; 0 or 1. Bits 28 -25 give the units 277 00 600000 11
value; 0 - 9.
Bits 24 - 17: BCD day: Bits 24 - 21 give the It is important that the SM (SSM) is set to 11.
tens value; 0 - 3. Bits 17 - 20 give the units The SDI is set automatically when data is
value; 0 - 9. entered into the 5th and 6th digits of the data
Bits 16 - 9: BCD year: Bits 16 - 13 give the field. These are the only XMT digits that will be
tens value; 8,9,0. Bits 12 - 9 give the units manually changed in this procedure.
value; 0 - 9.
Response example:
5.5.3.2 SRS Data Request
DataTrac:
----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Note: The AIR/GND switch, in the test LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par Tmin
351 10 09 12 90 97 11 1 0200
panel, must be in the GND position and
TEST INHIBIT must be off. That is, pin P2- JcAIR 429E:
38 must be open. 351 10 091290 11
This indicates that the SRS of this unit is:

9 December 1990.
It is important to set the bus reader to the
proper display format for easy data
interpretation.
5/5/1993 5-134
5.5.4 Memory Examination Request 5.5.4.1 MERR, General Word Definition

and Response (MERR)
The memory examination request word label 277
This paragraph is provided for information is defined as follows:
purposes only. Memory allocation, within the
memory blocks, is controlled dynamically by
the operating software and therefore is
difficult predict. Data necessary for
maintenance can be obtained more easily by
the procedures in the rest of this paragraph.
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \ / | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad | || || || || |
| | \<-------------- 00000H to 0FFFFH --------------> /
| | (memory locations)
| \__SSM, 11 implies a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
The response word label 351 is defined as follows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<-Pad->/ \<--Data in requested location------>/
| \__SSM, 11 implies memory examination request
\__Parity
5/5/1993 5-135
5.5.5 Total Power-on Cycle Count 5.5.5.1 TPOCC General Word Definition
(TPOCC) Buffer
The total power-on cycle counter data request
Each time the TDR-94/94D is turned on, the word label 277 is defined as follows:
TPOCC buffer is incremented. Therefore,
this buffer contains the number of times the
unit has experienced a power application.
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<------------Pad-------------> / \<----01H--->/
| \__SSM, 11 implies a diagnostic data request
\__Parity
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \10,000S/ \1,000S / \ 100S / \ 10S / \units /
| \__SSM, 11 implies response to a diagnostic data request
\__Parity
5.5.5.2 TPOCC Buffer Examination
Setup bus reader XMT screens as follows:

The reader should respond with a label 351 word
DataTrac: similar to this:
ON------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec DataTrac:
277 01 00 00 00 FD 11 1 0100
ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
JcAIR 429E: 351 10 00 30 56 97 11 1 0200
277 01 800001 11
JcAIR 429E:
351 10 003056 11
This indicates that the UUT has undergone 3,056

power-on cycles.
5/5/1993 5-136
5.5.6 Total Fault Counter (TFC) Buffer 5.5.6.1 TFC General Word Definition
Each time a diagnostic condition is The TFC buffer data request word label 277 is
recognized, the TFC buffer is incremented. defined as follows:
Therefore, this buffer contains the number
diagnostic conditions the unit has
experienced.
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<------------Pad--- -------->/ \<---02H--->/
\__Parity
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \10,000S/ \1,000S / \ 100S / \ 10S / \units /
| \__SSM, 11 implies response to a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
5.5.6.2 TFC Buffer Examination
Setup bus reader XMT screens as follows: The reader should respond with a label 351 word
similar to this:
DataTrac:
ON------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz DataTrac:
277 10 80 00 02 FD 11 1 0100 ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
351 10 60 01 02 97 11 1 0200
JcAIR 429E:
277 10 800002 11 JcAIR 429E:
351 10 600102 11
This indicates that the UUT has experienced 102

diagnostic conditions.
5/5/1993 5-137
5.5.7 Total Power-on Timer (Hours) 5.5.7.1 TPOTH General Word Definition
(TPOTH) Buffer
The total TPOTH buffer data request word label
Two data buffers are used to record the total 277 is defined as follows:
time the unit is in operation; an hours buffer
and a minutes buffer. As the unit is
operating, the minutes counter is
continuously incremented. The hours buffer
is incremented each time the minutes counter
overflows.
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<--------Pad------------> / \<----03H--->/
\__Parity
The response word label 351 is defined as

follows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \10,000S/ \1,000S / \ 100S / \ 10S / \units /
\__Parity
5.5.7.2 TPOTH Buffer Examination
similar to this:
DataTrac:
277 11 60 00 03 FD 11 1 0100 ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
351 11 E0 03 57 97 11 1 0200
JcAIR 429E:
277 11 600003 11 JcAIR 429E:
351 11 E00357 11
This example shows that the TPTOH buffer

contains the value 357.
5/5/1993 5-138
5.5.8 Total Power-on Timer (Minutes) 5.5.8.1 TPOTM General Word Definition
(TPOTM) Buffer
The total TPOTM buffer data request word label
The TPOTM buffer is incremented each 277 is defined as follows:
minute that the unit has power applied.
Overflow of this buffer causes the TPOTH
buffer to be incremented.
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<--------Pad------------> / \<---04H--->/
\__Parity

follows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \not used/ \not used/ \not used/ \ 10S / \units /
\__Parity
5.5.8.2 TPOTM Buffer Examination
similar to this:
DataTrac:
277 00 E0 00 04 FD 11 1 0100 ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
351 11 60 00 27 97 11 1 0200
JcAIR 429E:
277 00 E00004 11 JcAIR 429E:
351 11 600027 11
This indicates that the unit TPTOM buffer

contains the number 27.
5/5/1993 5-139
5.5.9 Last Power-on Cycle (LPOC) Fault 5.5.9.1 LPOC General Word Definition
Counter Buffer
The last LPOC fault counter buffer data request
This buffer contains the number of diagnostic word label 277 is defined as follows:
conditions detected during the most recent
power-on cycle.
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<--------Pad------------> / \<---05H--->/
\__Parity

follows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \not used/ \not used/ \ 100s / \ 10s / \units /
| \__SSM, 11 implies response to request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
5.5.9.2 LPOC Buffer Examination
similar to this:
DataTrac:
277 01 60 00 05 FD 11 1 0100 ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
351 11 E0 00 07 97 11 0200
JcAIR 429E:
277 01 600005 11 JcAIR 429E:
351 11 E00007 11
This indicates that during the most recent power-

on cycle 7 diagnostic conditions were detected.
5/5/1993 5-140
5.5.10 Last Maintenance Date (LMD) upon whether the date was properly entered.
Buffer (Examination)
5.5.10.1 LMD General Word Definition
This buffer should contains the most recent
maintenance date. Whether or not this date The LMD buffer data request word label 277 is
accurately reflects the date on which the unit defined as follows:
was most recently repaired or tested depends
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<--------Pad------------> / \<---07H--->/
\__Parity

follows:
1: 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
13 12 11 10 9
2: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 21 8 4 2 1
| | | | \ | | / \ | | / \ | | / | | || | | | |
| | | | | | | \ | |/ \ | | /
| \ / \__BCD month \ BCD day / \ BCD yr /
| \__SSM bits, 11 implies response to a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
5.5.10.2 LMD Buffer Examination This indicates that the last maintenance date for
this unit was October 6, 1991.
Setup bus reader XMT screens as follows: You need to recognize that the 7, here, includes
the SSM bits which account for a value of 6 (4 +
DataTrac: 2). Thus 7 - 6 = 1 which means that bit 29 is a
ON------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec 1. This sets the month at 10; October.
277 11 E0 00 07 FD 11 1 0100
JcAIR 429E: 5.5.11 Last Maintenance Date (LMD) Buffer

277 11 E00007 11 (Update)
The reader should respond with a label 351 A method for updating the LMD buffer is not
word similar to this: included in this manual. The LMD buffer should
be changed only after a repair action, unit
DataTrac: modification, or detailed test procedure has been
ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec performed.
351 01 70 06 91 97 11 1 0200
JcAIR 429E:
351 01 700691 11
5/5/1993 5-141
5.5.12 Last Power-on Cycle Faults The first transmission is the contents of the
(LPOCF) Data Download current Total Power-on Cycle count buffer (as in
5.5.5 above). This is followed, in 5-second
This process allows for retrieval of all the intervals, with a transmission of each
diagnostics detected during the most recent of the diagnostic codes encountered during the
power-on cycle. This can be seen as an most recent power-on cycle (self-test). The
extension to step 5.5.5. In that step we sequence is automatic therefore you should be
learned the number of faults detected during prepared to write down the data as it appears.
the most recent power-on cycle. In this The final label 351 word is likely to be a word
sequence we will learn what those diagnostic similar to 07FFE which does not translate into a
codes are. In this sequence you must watch meaningful diagnostic code.
the label 351 word carefully. The UUT may
transmit several words, each with a different 5.5.12.1 LPOCF General Word Definition
diagnostic code, at 5-second intervals.
The LPOCF data request word label 277 is
defined as follows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<--------Pad------------> / \<---10H--->/
\__Parity
The first response label 351 word is defined The second and subsequent response label 351
in paragraph 5.5.5. word(s) are defined as follows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \not used/ \not used/ \not used/ \ Hex fault code /
| \__11 implies response to detailed diagnostic data request
\__Parity
5.5.12.2 LPOCF Data Download
similar to this:
DataTrac:
277 00 E0 00 10 FD 11 1 0100 ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
351 11 E0 00 B3 97 11 1 0200
JcAIR 429E:
277 00 E00010 11 JcAIR 429E:
351 11 E000B3 11
This example indicates that this unit You may likely encounter a diagnostic code B3 on
experienced a diagnostic code B3 at the last the bench. This diagnostic is interpreted as
power on cycle. One of the 351 label words "TCAS bus inactive".
may indicate an FF label which. This code is
not defined and so you can ignore it.
5/5/1993 5-142
5.5.13 Continue Flight Fault (CFF) Data can begin here with 11H. The UUT responds by
Download sending each stored code for a 5-second period.
Continue incrementing the hex data until the
This paragraph can be seen as an extension UUT sends an end of file data field = 00EOFH.
of the previous paragraph 5.5.12. In that This is displayed on the DataTrac and JcAIR
paragraph only those diagnostics detected 429E as 000EOF. Remember, you only need to
during the most recent power-on cycle are change digits 5 and 6 in the data fields of both
revealed. In this paragraph, 5.5.12, all of the the DataTrac and JcAIR readers. The SDI and
diagnostics stored in NVRAM and detected parity bits will change automatically.
during preceding power-on cycles are
examined. 5.5.13.2 CFF General Procedures
5.5.13.1 CFF General Word Definition The diagnostic conditions detected during the
preceding 16 (maximum) power-on cycles can be
The data format is the same as in paragraph reviewed by interrogating the UUT with a label
5.5.12 except that the hex data in the label 277 data word, with SSM set to 10 and the data
277 interrogation word is incremented from in the bit field, bits 9 through 16 set to 1X as
10H to 1XH. Of course, if you have already follows (assuming no. 1 being the most recent):
examined the 10H, in paragraph 5.5.12, you
Buffer 277 Word DataTrac 200/400/400H, 277 Word Setup JcAIR 429E, 277 word
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SM Par msec
1 10H 277 00 E0 00 10 FD 11 1 0100 277 00 E00010 11
2 11H 277 01 60 00 11 FD 11 1 0100 277 01 600011 11
3 12H 277 10 60 00 12 FD 11 1 0100 277 10 600012 11
4 13H 277 11 E0 00 13 FD 11 1 0100 277 11 E00013 11
5 14H 277 00 60 00 14 FD 11 1 0100 277 00 600014 11
6 15H 277 01 E0 00 15 FD 11 1 0100 277 01 E00015 11
7 16H 277 10 E0 00 16 FD 11 1 0100 277 10 E00016 11
8 17H 277 11 60 00 17 FD 11 1 0100 277 11 600017 11
9 18H 277 00 60 00 18 FD 11 1 0100 277 00 600018 11
10 19H 277 01 E0 00 19 FD 11 1 0100 277 01 E00019 11
11 1AH 277 10 E0 00 1A FD 11 1 0100 277 10 E0001A 11
12 1BH 277 11 60 00 1B FD 11 1 0100 277 11 60001B 11
13 1CH 277 00 E0 00 1C FD 11 1 0100 277 00 E0001C 11
14 1DH 277 01 60 00 1D FD 11 1 0100 277 01 60001D 11
15 1EH 277 10 60 00 1E FD 11 1 0100 277 10 60001E 11
16 1FH 277 11 E0 00 1F FD 11 1 0100 277 11 E0001F 11
Any of the above can produce a response:
DataTrac:
ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
351 11 E0 30 57 97 11 1 0200
351 11 E0 0E 0F 97 11 1 0200
JcAIR 429E:
351 11 E03057 00
351 11 E00E0F 00
The UUT should respond with at least two which may be a relatively large number
label 351 data words. The first is the depending on the length of time the unit has
contents of the Total Power-on Counter buffer been in service.
5/5/1993 5-143
Special note for -002 units: intended for use with a data storage device
In -002 units, only the internal diagnostic which is capable of capturing and storing
conditions resulting in a failure-warn data transmitted in rapid sequence. The
condition and improper mode S address DataTrac 400/400H is capable of this function.
diagnostic conditions are stored. After downloading the data, it can then be
further downloaded, using procedures and
The mode S address diagnostic can easily software supplied with the DataTrac 400/400H,
occur when the unit is turned on with all onto a PC for detailed analysis and permanent
address lines open or shorted to ground. storage. The DataTrac 200 is capable of
Consequently you may frequently notice a capturing the data but lacks the means of
0000FF hex code as the second 351 word. It transferring it for external storage and
is also possible that in some units you may interpretation. A manual analysis is seen as
encounter a Total Power-on Timer (Hours) inefficiently laborious and time consuming and
buffer with an unrealistically large number. therefore is not recommended. However, if this
Early units were not properly cleared at is not seen as prohibitive, refer to paragraph
production. In these cases, of course, the 5.5.14 for the Slow Fault Data Download.
data is of no value.
5.5.14.1 FF General Word Definition
5.5.14 Fast Fault (FF) Data Download
The FF data request word label 277 is defined as
The feature used in this paragraph is follows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<--------Pad------------> / \<---50H--->/
\__Parity
5.5.14.2 FF Data Download The UUT then transmits a break indicator using
Description the same format as described in paragraph 5.5.7
(power-on timer (hours)), except the data is set to
When the 277 label word as described in 00FFFF.
paragraph 5.5.14.1 is sent to the UUT, it
responds as follows: Following this the UUT transmits the nine (9)
fault data bytes for the last recorded diagnostic
a. Power-on cycle counter buffer as described in the following sequence and formats:
in paragraph 5.5.5 above.
b. Total fault counter buffer as described in g. Current Power-on Cycle count buffer as
paragraph 5.5.6 above. described in 5.5.5 above.
c. Total power-on timer (hours) buffer as h. Diagnostic code as described in paragraph
described in paragraph 5.5.7 above. 5.5.9 above.
d. Total power-on timer (minutes) buffer as i. Time from last power-on using the following
described in paragraph 5.5.8 above. format:
e. Last power-on cycle fault counter buffer as
described in paragraph 5.5.9 above.
f. Last maintenance date buffer as described
in paragraph 5.5.10 above.
5/5/1993 5-144
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \not used/ \not used/ \ 1 Hr / \10 min / \ 1 min /
\__Parity
j. Transmitter temperature at time of

diagnostic using the following format:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \not used/ \not used/ \ 100s / \ 10s / \ units /
\__Parity
k. Air/ground state at time the diagnostic

was detected, using the following format:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | FAH = in air /
| | Pad \not used/ \not used/ \not used/ \ FDH = on ground /
\__Parity
l. Time at end of power-on cycle as described

in transmission i. above.
m. Altitude at time of diagnostic using the

following format:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \10,000s / \1000s / \ 100s / \ 10s / \ units /
\__Parity
5/5/1993 5-145
5.5.14.3 FF Data Download Equipment 5.5.15.1 SF General Word Definition
This feature is intended for those with access Same as 5.5.13.1 except hex data is set to 51H.
to an automated means of requesting,
capturing, and analyzing the data. Such 5.5.15.2 SF Data Download Procedure
facilities are at least partially available from
sources other than Collins and you are Use the following chart, reproduced in a quantity
encouraged to acquire and use them. For required, to record the data as it appears on your
example: databus reader. Set the bus reader for the
Atlantic Instruments supplies hardware proper display format for direct interpretation of
and software, operating with the DataTrac the data as described in the preceding
400/400H, for automatically capturing and paragraphs.
downloading the data onto a PC.
Avionica Inc., 3830, SW 130th Ave., Miami
FL 33175, supplies a laptop computer
equipped with appropriate hardware and
software to download, store, and display
diagnostic data from a number of Collins
units including the TDR-94/94D Mode S
Transponder as well as the TTR-920 TCAS
Transmitter/Receiver.
5.5.15 Slow Fault (SF) Data Download
This data download feature is basically the

same as that described in paragraph 5.5.13
except that the hex field in the data request
word is set to 51H (instead of 50H). This will
cause the UUT to transmit the same data as
described in paragraph 5.5.13 except that it
is transmitted one data file at a time at 5
seconds intervals.
5/5/1993 5-146
******* Duplicate this sheet as required *******
Date: _______________ UUT Type: _____( ) TDR-94: Part No: 622-9352-

UUT Type: _____( ) TDR-94D: Part No: 622-9210-
UUT Serno: _____________
Customer: _________________________________________
Data taken by: ____________________________________ (Your name)
TDR-94/94D Diagnostic Data Record
Diagnostic Code Interpretation
Power-on Cycle Counter: _________ _______________________

Total Fault Counter: _________ _______________________
Total Power-on Timer (Hrs): _________ _______________________
Total Power-on Timer (Min): _________ _______________________
Last Power-on Fault Counter: _________ _______________________
Existing Last Maintenance Date: _________ _______________________
New Last Maintenance Date: * _________ _______________________
Break: ___ 0FFFFF
Current Power-on Cycle Count: _________ _______________________
Diagnostic Code: _________ _______________________
Time From Last Power-on: _________ _______________________
Xmitter Temp at Diag: _________ _______________________
Air/Gnd State at Diag: _________ _______________________
Time at end of Power-on Cycle: _________ _______________________
Altitude at Diag: _________ _______________________
* To be changed only after repair, modification, or detailed (bench) test.
Power-on cycle diagnostics (1 = most recent):
1:___________, 2:___________, 3:_____________, 4:____________, 5:____________,

6:___________, 7:____________, 8:____________, 9:___________, 10:___________,
11:__________, 12:___________, 13:___________, 14:____________, 15:___________,
16:____________, 17:___________, 19:___________, 20:___________, 21:____________,
22:___________, 23:____________, 24:____________
Comments:
______________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
5/5/1993 5-147
5.6 NUMBER SYSTEM CONVERSION If you have one of these, use it. Otherwise,
AND DATA WORD DESCRIPTIONS this paragraph describes a relatively simple
method of converting between the
This paragraph provides detailed descriptions Hexadecimal and Octal numbering systems.
of the various data formats used in the TDR- This is useful for Mode S transponder testing
94/94D. These formats use a variety of because the data systems used in the mode s
numbering systems including binary, octal, transponder use all three systems. For
and hexadecimal. Paragraph 5.6.1 provides a example, the mode s address is typically as-
procedure for conversion between these signed as an eight-digit octal number. This
numbering systems. If you are familiar with octal number is translated into a binary
a conversion process, you should feel free to number for address strapping at installation.
use that process. During testing, quite often this address is
displayed as a six-digit hexadecimal number.
5.6.1 Octal-to-Binary-to-Hexadecimal,
and Back Use the following listing to convert your
hexadecimal or octal number to its binary
There are many relatively inexpensive hand- equivalent.
held calculators with number conversion
capability available.
Hex-to-Binary Conversion Octal-to-Binary Conversion
Hex Binary Hex Binary Octal Binary

0 0000 8 1000 0 000
1 0001 9 1001 1 001
2 0010 A 1010 2 010
3 0011 B 1011 3 011
4 0100 C 1100 4 100
5 0101 D 1101 5 101
6 0110 E 1110 6 110
7 0111 F 1111 7 111
Convert from the six-digit hexadecimal num- digit from the listing above in the center
ber to an eight-digit octal number as follows: (Bin) line. Then use the lower bit values to
Enter the hex number on the top (Hex) line convert those binary bits, three bits at a
of the following chart. Then enter the time, into the equivalent octal number and
equivalent binary values for each hex enter those numbers on the lower (Oct) line.
Hex:
Bit Val: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bin:
Bit Val: 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1
Oct:
5/5/1993 5-148
Example: Suppose the test set shows a hex hexadecimal listing above) in spaces below
code 3AC421. Enter this code on the top line. each hex digit. Then translate each three-
Then write the equivalent four digit binary digit grouping of binary numbers into the
values (from the equivalent octal number.
Hex: 3 A C 4 2 1
Bit Val: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Binary: 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
Bit Val: 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1
Oct: 1 6 5 4 2 0 4 1
To convert from octal to hex, reverse the personal preference but the form chosen here
above process by entering the octal number is labeled BIN19L. This paragraph shows
into the spaces on the lower line. Convert you how to decode the diagnostic information
each octal digit into its equivalent binary from this displayed word.
value. Then convert each four-digit grouping
into its equivalent hex value as shown in the Refer to the screen representation below.
Hex-to-Binary conversion listing above-left. This shows the label 350 word from bits 29
Write these numbers into the spaces on the through 11 as it appears on the DataTrac
top line. 400/400H display set for a BIN19L display.
(The actual screen will show other words and
The binary digits, read from left to right, their labels but this discussion focuses only
correspond to the mode s addressing switches on the label 350 word.)
on the test panel. That is, the far left digit
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
corresponds to switch and rear connector pin Lbl SDI 29--Binary Data--11 SSM Par msec
P1-33, the next P1-34, etc, to the far right 350 01 1000010110011000000 11 1 0200
which is P1-56. The switch set to the OFF Of course, you can also select the hex display
position corresponds to a 0; the switch set to mode for a direct display of the diagnostic
SEL corresponds to a 1. The suggested panel code and avoid the conversion process.
layout shown in figure 5-3 shows the mode s
switches labeled according to the octal digits -----------------RCV 1----------12.5 KHz
that each controls. This makes the octal code 350 01 70 B3 01 17 11 1 0200
easy to read from the switch positions by ||<---diagnostic code
adding the binary value of those switches in This display can be reproduced as follows:
each 3-switch group set to SEL. You must
avoid, however, the combination with all a. With the ATC-601 set for ATCRBS RE-
switches up or all switches down. These two PLY, set the test panel POWER switch to
combinations are not allowed in the mode s OFF.
addressing scheme and will produce a tran- b. On the test panel, set the TCAS/NO
sponder diagnostic code FF in TDR-94/94D TCAS switch to TCAS.
units with CPN ending in -002. c. On the DataTrac 400/400H, press RCV
and then press ENT. (This clears the
5.6.2 Diagnostic Word, ARINC 429 label display and prepares the analyzer to
350, Definition and Decoding Procedure receive new data.)
d. On the test panel, set the POWER switch
5.6.2.1 On DataTrac 400/400H to ON.
e. After a few seconds, the XFEED OUT
The diagnostic codes listed in table 5-2 are lamp lights, the ATC-601 REPLY lamp
available for viewing on the ARINC 429 label lights, and the data is displayed on the
350 diagnostic word. The DataTrac 400 is DataTrac 400/400H RCV 1 screen.
capable of displaying this word in a variety of
binary and hexadecimal forms. The form
that is selected is largely a matter of
5/5/1993 5-149
Note: If the 350 word does not appear on the Bit DEFINITION Bit DEFINITION
DataTrac 400/400H screen initially, press
RCV (until the cursor is at the left of HOLD), 11 Xpdr failure 16 Serial control port c
then press the down arrow (or up arrow) key failure
to scroll the data words until the 350 word
appears. Bits 17 through 24 are the eight 12 RAM failure 25 Serial altitude port a
data bits that define the 2-digit hexadecimal failure
diagnostic code as follows:
13 ROM failure 26 Serial altitude port b
Diagnostic digit: failure
MSB LSB
Bit: 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 14 Port b failure 27 Serial ADLP bus fail-
Bin value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 ure
Example: 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Diag: |< B >| |< 3 >| 15 Port a failure 28 Serial TCAS bus fail-
ure *
Interpretation:TCAS bus inactive (see table
5-2) The defined failure condition exists when a
logic 1 appears in the corresponding bit loca-
The conversion process involves translating tion.
each of these four-bit groupings into the
equivalent hexadecimal value using the * Notice in the screen example above, bit 28
binary to hex conversion list in paragraph is also set to 1.
5.6.1 above.
Incidentally, in the label 350 diagnostic word,
Bits 11 through 16, and 25 through 28 bit 29 is defined as a PAD.
identify specific failure conditions. These are
defined below. 5.6.2.2 On DataTrac 200
The DataTrac 200 displays the diagnostic

code in the HEX RCV field in the form of 5
hex digits as follows:
Hex: MSB 4 3 2 LSB
Data bit: 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Bit Val: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 *
* bit 10 is not included in the display
In the test procedures, a TCAS Bus failure appears on the DataTrac 200 as a Hex code
diagnostic is induced producing a diagnostic 45980. This is produced as follows:
code B3. This
5/5/1993 5-150
Hex bit: MSB 4 3 2 LSB
Data bit: 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Bit Val: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 *
Hex value: 4 5 9 8 0
Binary: 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit Val: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Hex value: B 3
Thus, to properly interpret a diagnostic code There is an easier way to interpret the
as displayed on the DataTrac 200, you must diagnostic code and that is to select the 32--
first translate that code into its binary form, Hex Data--1 display format. This will give
extending from bit 11 through 29. Then you a display:
translate the two four-bit groupings, 18
through 21 for the LSB, and 22 through 25 -----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
for the MSB, into the hex diagnostic code. 350 01 68 B3 01 17 11 1 0200
||<---diagnostic code
Then refer to table 5-2 for the defined diag-
nostic. In this format you can read the diagnostic
It is important to remember that bits 11 code directly from the second pair of hex
through 16, and 25 through 28, define digits (from the left).
specific failure conditions as described in the
previous paragraph for the DataTrac 400. Suppose the DataTrac 200 shows a HEX DA-
TA field 47A80. You would interpret this
code as follows:
Hex bit: MSB 4 3 2 LSB
Data bit: 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Bit Val: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 *
Hex value: 4 7 A 8 0
Binary: 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit Val: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Hex value: F 5
Thus a DataTrac 200, HEX DATA field display first byte (first 8 bits which forms byte 0) of
of 47A80 is a diagnostic code F5, which is the data word. The label is described in
shown on table 5-2 as Port Selects Changed. paragraph 5.6.5 below.
5.6.3 Transponder Control Word Defini- The data word with label 031 is the only con-
tions trol word used by the TDR-94/94D. Label
031 is the standard ATCRBS control word.
This paragraph describes the various control Word label 016 has been redefined for ad-
words used by the TDR-94/94D mode s tran- dressing the TCAS displays. Word labels
sponder. 013 and 015 are TCAS related words. Labels
016 and 015 are described here only for
5.6.3.1 ARINC 429, Label 031, 015, and informational purposes. The TDR-94/94D
016, Control Words will accept word labels 013, 015, and 016
In ARINC 429, the label is formed by the
5/5/1993 5-151
and pass them through unchanged to the Label 015:

TCAS computer. The data field, bits 9
Bit No. Definition
through 32, are described as follows:
9 SDI Code (see note 1)
Label 031: 10 SDI Code (see note 1)
11 Altitude limit A 100
Bit No. Definition 12 Altitude limit A 200
9 SDI Code (see note 1) 13 Altitude limit A 400
10 SDI Code (see note 1) 14 Altitude limit A 800
11 Alt Reporting, On/Off (1=on) 15 Altitude limit A 1600
12 Pad 16 Altitude limit A 3200
13 Ident, On/Off (1=on) 17 Altitude limit A 6400
14 Alt Port Selected, (1=B) 18 Altitude limit B 100
15 Pad 19 Altitude limit B 200
18 Mode a, code D1 22 Altitude limit B 1600
21 Mode a, code C1 25 spare
24 Mode a, code B1 28 spare
25 Mode a, code B2 29 spare
26 Mode a, code B4 30 SSM (see note 4)
27 Mode a, code A1 31 SSM (see note 4)
28 Mode a, code A2 32 Parity
29 Mode a, code A4
30 SSM (see note 4) Note 1: See paragraph 5.6.4.1 below
31 SSM (see note 4)
32 Parity Note 2: The display control bits control the TCAS
display as follows. This information is supplied by a
Label 016: TCAS control and is passed through the transponder
unchanged.
Bit No. Definition
BIT
9 SDI Code (see note 1) 14 13 Definition
10 SDI Code (see note 1)
11 Alt Reporting, On/Off (1=on) 0 0 Primary and traffic display
12 SPI (0=ident off) 0 1 Primary display only
13 Display control (see note 2) 1 0 TCAS traffic display only
14 Display control (see note 2) 1 1 No control function possible
15 Sens level 0 (see note 3)
16 Sens level 1 (see note 3) Note 3: Sensitivity level is TCAS control information
17 Sens level 2 (see note 3) that is provided via an uplink message from a ground-
18 4096, code D1 based controller. Bit combination definitions are as
19 4096, code D2 follows:
20 4096, code D4
21 4096, code C1 BIT
22 4096, code C2 17 16 15 Definition
23 4096, code C4 0 0 0 SL 0 (Automatic)
24 4096, code B1 0 0 1 SL 1 (STBY)
25 4096, code B2 0 1 0 SL 2 (TA only)
26 4096, code B4 0 1 1 SL 3
27 4096, code A1 1 0 0 SL 4
28 4096, code A2 1 0 1 SL 5
29 4096, code A4 1 1 0 SL 6
30 SSM (see note 4) 1 1 1 SL 7
31 SSM (see note 4)
32 Parity
5/5/1993 5-152
Note 4: SSM code definitions are as follows: The first eight bits form the first byte and
contain the word label:
BIT Definitions
31 30 Label 031 Label 016/015/013
Byte 0 is the label byte:
0 0 Normal operation Normal operation
0 1 No computed data No computed data Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 Functional test Functional test Logic: 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 Not used Failure warning Hex: | 1 | | E |
Label 013:
Byte 1 is the status byte:
Bit No. Definition
9 SDI Code (see note 1) Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
10 SDI Code (see note 1) Def: | | | | | | |< --|<--SI(*)
11 Flight level (0=relative, 1= absolute) | | | | | |<--Test (1= on)
12 Altitude select (see note 2) | | | | |<--ATC Ident (1=on)
13 Altitude select (see note 2) | | | |<--Alt reporting (1=on)
14 spare
| | |<--Mode (1 = standby)
15 spare
| |<--Pad
16 spare
17 spare |<--Code valid (1 = valid)
18 User defined
19 User defined * For Source identifier definition, refer to
20 User defined paragraph 5.6.4.2 below.
21 User defined
22 0.5, TCAS range
23 1.0, TCAS range
Bytes 2 and 3 convey the ATC code:
24 2.0, TCAS range
25 4.0, TCAS range Byte 2:
26 8.0, TCAS range
27 16.0, TCAS range Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
28 32.0, TCAS range Value: - 4 2 1 - 4 2 1
29 64.0, TCAS range
Def: Pd | | | Pd | | |
30 SSM (see note 4 above)
31 S2SM (see note 4 above)
< ATC C codes > < ATC D codes >
32 Parity
Byte 3:
Note 1: See paragraph 5.6.4.1 below
Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Note 2: TCAS Altitude selects: Value: - 4 2 1 - 4 2 1
Def: Pd | | | Pd | | |
BIT
< ATC A codes > < ATC B codes >
13 12 Definition
Byte 4:
0 0 Normal (-A to +A)
0 1 Above (-A to +B) Bytes 4 and 5 convey the Gillham code altitude
1 0 Below (-B to +A) information:
1 1 Unrestricted
Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5.6.3.2 CSDB, Label 1E, Control Word Value: - 4 2 1 - 4 2 1
Def: Pd | | | Pd | | |
The TDR-94/94D uses CSDB word label 1E < ALT C codes > < Alt D codes >
for CSDB control. All CSDB words consist of Byte 5:
6 bytes, with each bytes consisting of 8 bits.
These bytes are typically identified as bytes 0 Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value: - 4 2 1 - 4 2 1
through 5. Byte 0 is the label byte, byte 1 is
Def: Pd | | | Pd | | |
known as the status byte, and bytes 2 < ALT A codes > < Alt B codes >
through 5 transmit the object data. The
bytes are described as follows: Refer to paragraph 5.7 for additional Gillham
altitude code information.
6/15/1995 5-153
5.6.3.3 CSDB, Label A0, Altitude Word Bytes 4 and 5 convey barometric altitude:
The TDR-94/94D uses CSDB word label A0 Byte 4: part 1 of barometric alt data:
for CSDB altitude data; both pressure and
barometric. As in all other CSDB words, Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
word label A0 consists of six 8-bit bytes, Bin wt: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
identified as bytes 0 through 5. Byte 0 is the Alt wt: | | | |<16 | | | |<1
label byte; byte 1 is the status byte; bytes 2 | | |<32 | | |<2
| |<64 | |<4
and 3 transmit the pressure altitude
|<128 |<8
information; bytes 4 and 5 transmit the
barometric altitude information. The Byte 5: part 2 of barometric alt data:
detailed structure is as follows:
Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 0 is the label byte: Bin wt: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Alt wt: | | | |<4096 | | | |<-256
Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | | |<8192 | | |<512
Logic: 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 | |<16384 | |<1024
Hex: | A | | 0 | |< -32768 |<2048
Byte 1 is the status byte: The bit pattern for any altitude within the
range -8191 to +57343 feet, pressure or
Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 barometric, is encoded using twos
Def: | | | | | | |<- |<--SI(*) complement arithmetic with a 24576 foot
| | | | | |<--Test (1 = on)
offset. Use the following conversion methods
| | | | |<-- 1 = xside baro
as you wish:
| | | |<--Strut sw (1 = on gnd)
| | |<-- Rsvd for preselect (**)
| |<--Baro alt valid (1 = valid) 1. Select the altitude to be encoded.
|<--Pres alt valid (1 = valid) 2. Subtract 24576 from that quantity.
3. If the result is negative, add 32768. *
* For Source identifier definition, refer to 4. Convert the result to binary using the
paragraph 5.6.4.2 below. altitude bit weights shown above.
** Bit 5 of byte 1 is bit 1 of a two-bit matrix * If you use a calculator to do the decimal to
for a altitude preselect function. Bit 2 is in binary conversion, you may not need to add
the same location of data word A1. this quantity. If it uses 2s complement
arithmetic for the conversion, you can ignore
Bytes 2 and 3 convey pressure altitude: the addition.
Byte 2: part 1 of pressure alt data: To decode a 16-bit binary number into a
decimal quantity:
Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1. Select the binary quantity.
Bin wt: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 2. Convert the binary number into decimal
Alt wt: | | | |<16 | | | |<1 using the altitude bit weights shown above.
| | |<32 | | |<2 3. If the MSB (bit 7 of bytes 3/5) is = 1,
| |<64 | |<4 subtract 8192. If it is = 0, add 24576. **
|<128 |<8
4. The result is the equivalent decimal
quantity.
Byte 3: part 2 of pressure alt data:
** If you use a calculator to do the binary-to-
Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bin wt: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 decimal conversion, you may not need to
Alt wt: | | | |<4096 | | | |<-256 subtract the 8192 in step 3. But you must
| | |<8192 | | |<512 add the 24576. (The 8192 is the difference
| |<16384 | |<1024 between the 32768 2s complement sign factor
|< -32768 |<2048 and the 24576 offset.)
6/15/1995 5-154
5.6.4 SDI/SI Code Definitions There are three important points here:
5.6.4.1 ARINC 429, SDI Definition 1. Notice that the MSB is on the right, de-
fined by the lower ordered bits. This is re-
In ARINC 429, bits 8 and 9, of all word la- versed from that of the data field where the
bels, form the SDI code. The code definitions MSB is defined by the higher ordered bits.
depend on the label as follows:
2. Notice also that the most significant bit
BITS DEFINITION FOR LABELS: (MSB) is defined by only two bits. This
9 8 203/204 031/350/371 means that the MSB can have a value no
0 0 All-call Not used
0 1 Side 1 Side 1
greater than 3 (2 + 1). This also means that
1 0 Side 2 Side 2 the numerically largest octal code possible is
1 1 Not used Not used 377 which is displayed, bits 0 through 7, as
11111111.
BITS DEFINITION FOR LABEL:
9 8 013
0 0 both left and right, RA/TA, bus #1 and #2
3. Notice also that the bit values are re-
0 1 left, RA/TA, bus #1 versed from the values in the data fields. In
1 0 right, RA/TA, bus #2 the data fields, the values increase as you
1 1 not defined move from right to left. Here they values
decrease in value, moving from right to left.
5.6.4.2 CSDB, SI Definition
5.6.5.2 CSDB Hexadecimal Label
In CSDB, bits 0 and 1 of byte 1 form the Definition
source identifier and are defined as follows:
In CSDB the label of the word is a two digit
BITS DEFINITION FOR LABELS:
1 0 1E/1F/A0/F3 hexadecimal number and is defined in the
0 0 Not used first 8-bits, byte 0, of the CSDB
0 1 Side 1 transmission. The bits are defined as follows:
1 0 Side 2
1 1 Not used
Label digit: MSB LSB
5.6.5 Octal Label Definitions
Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
In ARINC 429, the label is expressed as an
octal number. The equivalent in CSDB is
Example: 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
expressed as a hexadecimal number.
Interp: |------1-------| |------E-------|
5.6.5.1 ARINC 429, Octal Label Definition
Bits 0 through 7 form the octal label and are

defined as follows:
Label digit: LSB 2 MSB
Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit value: 1 2 4 1 2 4 1 2
Example: 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
Interp: |<--5-->| |<--1-->| |-0-|
6/15/1995 5-154.1
This page is intentionally left blank.
6/15/1995 5-154.2
5.7 GILLHAM CODE DESCRIPTION

with ENCODING AND DECODING
INSTRUCTIONS
This paragraph contains a description of the Table 5-15 shows the encoding matrix for both
Gillham (ARINC 572) altitude encoding the 500-foot increments as well as the 100-foot
scheme. The paragraph also includes increments. Following the table are the
instructions for encoding and decoding. This encoding and decoding instructions.
can be helpful if you encounter an altitude
discrepancy during a test or fault isolation
procedure that is caused by a faulty digitizer or
broken wire in the altitude bus.
Table 5-15. Gillham Altitude, ARINC 572, Encoding Scheme
|<--- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- A4, B1, B2, B4 ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---- ---- --->|
D2,D4, A1,A2 0000 0001 0011 0010 0110 0111 0101 0100 1100 1101 1111 1110 1010 1011 1001 1000
0000 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
0001 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
0011 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
0010 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
0110 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
0111 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80
0101 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
0100 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112
1100 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143
1101 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 144
1111 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 171 173 174 175
1110 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176
1010 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207
1011 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208
1001 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239
1000 255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240
256 segments, at 500 -ft intervals, from -1000 ft to 127,000 ft.
100-ft bits 100-ft value if 500-ft segment is:
C1 C2 C4 odd even
__ __ __ _______ _______
0 0 1 7 (+ 200) 8 (- 200)
0 1 1 6 (+ 100) 9 (- 100)
0 1 0 5 (00) 0 (00)
1 1 0 4 (- 100) 1 (+ 100)
1 0 0 3 (- 200) 2 (+ 200)
It is important to note that this scheme has no provision for C1, C2, and C4 bit patterns 000, 111, or 101.
5/5/1993 5-155
5.7.1 Gillham Code Decoding Instructions
This paragraph provides a method of into the following measured bits row. If any of the
translating a Gillham code pattern into bits are missing or not connected (and this is likely for
altitude. bits D2, and D4.) just enter a 1 for that bit. (A
measured 1 means it is not active.)
1. Determine the encoded bits and write them
Bit names: A
___ 1
A
___2
A
___4
B
___1
B
___2
B
___4
C
___1
C
___2
C
___4
D
___1
* D
___2
* D
___4
Measured bits: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ _1_ ___ ___
Inverted logic: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ _0_ ___ ___
2. Invert each of the bits and write that 8. Multiply that segment number by 500 and then
pattern into the inverted logic row. subtract 1000. The result is the altitude to the
nearest 500 feet.
3. From the inverted logic row, determine the
encoded bit pattern for bits A4, B1, B2, B4. 9. From the inverted logic row, determine the encoded
bit pattern for bits C1, C2 and C4 .
4. Compare that pattern to the listing of
patterns on Table 5-15 for A4, B1, B2, B4 and 10. If C1 and C4 are both 0 then you are finished.
note the column where you found the match. The result of step 8. is the final result. If C1 and C4
are not both 0 then proceed.
5. From the inverted logic row, determine the
encoded bit pattern for bits D2, D4, A1, A2. 11. Find the sequence for C1, C2 and C4 in the lower
part of Table 5-15. Note that row.
6. Compare that pattern to the listing of
patterns in the left column of Table 5-15 and 12. Depending on whether the segment number from
note the row where you found the match. step 7. above was odd or even, add or subtract either
100 or 200 to or from the 500-ft altitude. The result is
7. Read the segment number from the point the altitude to the nearest 100 feet.
at which your marked column and row
intersect.
Example: Suppose you measure the following logic levels on the test panel (1 = high or open, and
0 = low)
Test Points: A
___ 1
A
___2
A
___4
B
___1
B
___2
B
___4
C
___1
C
___2
C
___4
D
___1
* D
___2
* D
___4
Measured: 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
Invert logic: 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
Column data: 1100 C1, C2, and C4 (001) to the listing, we find that it
Row data: 0101 corresponds to the first entry. This declares that the
Referring to the matrix in Table 5-15 above, hundred foot value is the nearest 800 (or 200 feet less
this identifies segment 104. than the rounded 500-ft level). Thus the measured bit
Multiply segment by 500 and subtract 1000: pattern yields an altitude of 50 800 feet.
104 x 500 - 1000 = 51 000.
* D1 and D2 are not connected on the test panel. For
The C1, C2, and C4 bits determine the 100-ft purposes of this illustration, assume an open to be a
altitude offset from the rounded 500-ft value. logic 1. You will notice in Table 5-15 that D1 is not
Because the identified segment is an even used, and D2 is not active at altitudes below 60 000
number, use the data under the even column. feet.
Comparing the inverted logic bit pattern for
6/15/1995 5-156
5.7.2 Gillham Code, Encoding

Instructions b. Read the logic pattern for D2, D4, A1, A2 from
the left column of the segment row and enter it in
This paragraph will describe a process to the spaces below.
determine the code needed for a particular
altitude: 6. If the absolute value of the saved difference from 3.
above is less than 50, use the third pattern for C1, C2,
1. Select the desired altitude. and C4 (010). If the value of the saved difference from
3. above is 50 or more, round it to the nearest 100.
2. Add 1000 to that number. This must be either 100 or 200 and either more or less
than the 500-ft value.
3. Round that number to the nearest multiple
of 500. (Save the difference thus dropped; it 7. If the 500-ft segment number is an even number
will be needed to determine the 100-foot bit use the even column to determine the 100-ft bit pat-
pattern in step 6. below.) tern. (This means that the altitude rounded to the
nearest 500-ft must be in the form of XX000.)
4. Divide the rounded number by 500. This
becomes the 500-ft segment number for the 8. If the 500-ft segment number is an odd number
matrix in Table 5-15 above. use the odd column to determine the 100-ft bit pat-
tern. (This means that the altitude rounded to the
5. Locate the segment number in the table nearest 500-ft must be in the form of XX500.
and:
a. Read the logic pattern for A4, B1, B2, B4
from the top of the column and enter it in
the spaces below.
Bit pattern entry:
Altitude: A1 A2 A4 B1 B2 B4 C1 C2 C4 D2 D4
_______ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Example:
Determine the bit pattern for an altitude of 11 b. Read the D2, D4, A1, A2 bit pattern from the left
800 feet. column of the same row. 0001. Then enter each bit
into the appropriate space below.
1. Add 1000: 12 800. 5. The saved value from step 3. is -200.
2. Round to nearest multiple of 500: 13 000, 6. The segment number 26 is an even number,
and save difference: -200 ( less). therefore the C1, C2, C4 bit pattern is read from the
3. Divide 13 000 by 500: 26. top entry: 001. You can, of course, also read this on
4. Locate segment number 26 on the matrix the basis of the hundreths digit value which in this
above and: case is an 8.
a. Read the A4, B1, B2, B4 bit pattern from the
top of the column: 0111. Then enter each bit
into the appropriate space below.
Bit pattern entry:
Altitude: A1 A2 A4 B1 B2 B4 C1 C2 C4 D2 D4
_11 800__ _0_ _1_ _0_ _1_ _1_ _1_ _0_ _0_ _1_ _0_ _0_
6/15/1995 5-157
5.8 ACCEPTANCE TEST, TEST PANEL version. Figure 5-4 is a schematic diagram of the
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS abbreviated test panel.
5.8.1 GENERAL Figure 5-5 is a schematic diagram for the enhanced

version of test panel. Table 5-16 is a list of the
This paragraph provides the instructions and material required for the enhanced version. Table
material listing necessary for assembly of the ATP 5-17 is a similar listing for the abbreviated version.
test panels listed in table 5-1. Several test Table 5-18 is a listing of the manufacturers and
equipment suppliers offer a product item(s) suppliers for the various items needed to assemble
equivalent to these specifications. If you wish, you the panels. Equivalent parts may be obtained from
should feel free to purchase such an item. other sources. Paragraph 5.8.2 and figures 5-5
Otherwise, it can be locally fabricated using the through 5-8 describe the control interconnect
data supplied in this paragraph. cables. You may select one or more of these cables,
depending on the type of control you plan to use.
If you fabricated your fixture according to These cables are required for both test panel
instructions supplied an earlier edition of this versions. However, you will notice that the cable
manual, you will find modification instructions in for the CTL-92/92A can be different, depending on
paragraph 5.8.3 below. This edition, and all the test panel version you intend to use. The
subsequent editions that introduce changes to the abbreviated version has no provision for Gillham
Acceptance Test Test Panel will give modification code switching and a number of other functions.
instructions in paragraph 5.8.3. Thus, these connections are not required in the
cable if you are using that version test panel.
Figure 5-2 is the test setup diagram showing how
the various items are interconnected. Figure 5-3
is a suggested panel layout for the enhanced
Table 5-16. Enhanced Version of Test Panel, Parts List
ITEM REF DES QTY MANUFACTURER COLLINS PART

NUMBER
NAME PN
Toggle switch, S1, S5, S7, S8, 48 C & K Components, Inc 7107SYZWQE 266-5321-150
SP, on/off S10, S11, S17-
S57, S59
Toggle switch, S9 1
SPDT, on/on
Toggle switch, S2, S3 2 7201SYZQE 266-5321-200

DPDT, on/on
Momentary S4, S6 2 8121SHZGE 266-5404-010

switch, SP, push-
on
5/5/1993 5-158
Table 5-16. Enhanced Version of Test Panel, Parts List (contd)

NUMBER
NAME PN
Wafer, switch, 2- S13 1 Grayhill Inc. 44A3001204NF Not available from

pole, 4-psn Collins
Wafer switch, 5- S58 1 44A3004202NF

pole, 2 -psn

pole, 4 -psn

pole, 4 -psn
Lamp holder 6 Chicago Miniature LH73/1 included in 262-

Lamp, Inc. 2828-0X0
Lamp len, red LDS 2-3 2 LC12YN2 262-2828-010
Lamp lens, yellow LDS 1,4-6 4 LC12RN2 262-2828-030
Lamp, 28 V DS1-6 6 GE Co. 385 262-2171-010
Fuse holder XF1 1 Bussman Div. HKP-H, or FHN-20G Not available from
Collins
Fuse, 5A SB F1 1 F02G250V5AS
Banana jack, blk TP1,3,5 2 E.F.Johnson Co. 360-0241-000
Banana jack, yel TP2,4,6 3 360-0245-000
Phono plug, 1/4" J2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 8 Switchcraft Inc. M641/12-1 358-0014-000
Phono jack To mate with: AR PJ-055B Not available from

J2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 Collins
See figure 5-9
BNC to TNC Needed to 2 M/A-COM Omni 3182-2320-00 Not available from

adapter adapt ATC- Spectra, Inc. Collins
601 rf cable to
antenna
connectors
RF load (also Needed to 1 3101-6100-00

shown on table 5-1 terminate
unused rf
antenna
connection.
50-pin D-submin, 1 ITT Cannon DDMF-50S-A176 371-0182-000

conn (socket)
50-pin D-submin, See figures 5- AR DDM50P-C37-A176 371-0118-000

conn (plug) 6, 5-7, 5-8
5/5/1993 5-159
Table 5-16. Enhanced Version of Test Panel, Parts List (contd)

NUMBER
NAME PN
TDR-94D 1 Collins General 628-8660-001

installation kit Aviation Division
MMT-150 1 622-9672-003
Mounting Tray
CTL-92/92A See figure 5-6 1 359-0305-590, or

mating connector 371-6110-000
RTU-870A/T See figure 5-7 1 359-0601-010

mating connector
TTC-920G mating See figure 5-8 1 of J1: J1: 359-4068-030

connectors each MD24266R76B24S7 J2: 359-4118-240
J2:
MS24266R16B24SB
Res, film, 100k, R1-11 11 MS RN65D1003F 705-7192-000

1%, 1/4W
Res, film, 825, R12-22 11 RN65D8250F 705-7092-000

1%, 1/2W
Grommet, 1-in, id 1 Atlantic India Rubber 2277 201-0012-000

Co.
Chassis, Or use a 19 1 Bud Industries, Inc. AC 424 021-0347-050

8 x 12-in , box rack mounting
panel
Switch knobs For wafer 5 any with 1/4-inch shaft N/A

switches dia and setscrew
locking
Data bus reader See figure 5-9 AR

cables
Chassis, bottom Optional 1 BPA 1519 Not available from

panel Collins
5/5/1993 5-160
Table 5-17. Abbreviated Version of Test Panel, Parts List

NUMBER
NAME PN

601 rf cable to
antenna
connectors
RF load (also Needed to 1 3101-6100-00

shown on table 5-1 terminate
unused rf
antenna
connection.
50-pin D-submin, 1 ITT Cannon DDMF-50S-A176 371-0182-000

conn (socket)
50-pin D-submin, See figures 5- AR DDM50P-C37-A176 371-0118-000

conn (plug) 6, 5-7, 5-8
TDR-94D 1 Collins General 628-8660-001

installation kit Aviation Division
MMT-150 1 622-9672-003
Mounting Tray
CTL-92/92A See figure 5-6 1 359-0305-590, or

mating connector 371-6110-000
RTU-870A/T See figure 5-7 1 359-0601-010

mating connector
TTC-920G mating See figure 5-8 1 of J1: J1: 359-4068-030

connectors each MD24266R76B24S7 J2: 359-4118-240
J2:
MS24266R16B24SB
Chassis Note: The size of chassis for the abbreviated version of the test panel is optional. The primary
limitation is that it must be large enough to accomodate the connectors and other parts. Use of a 50-
pin D-type connector can also be seen as optional. If you plan to use only one type of control, such as
the CTL-92/92A, you may want to connect the cable directly to the test panel as a pendant cable.
Cable grommet, For pendant 1 Atlantic India 2283 201-0002-006

1/2-in. id cable exit if
used.
5/5/1993 5-161
Table 5-14. Equipment and Component Manufacturers and Suppliers
SUPPLIER ADDRESS PRODUCT
Collins General Aviation Division 400 Collins Road TDR-94D Installation kit, MMT-150
Cedar Rapids IA 52498 Mounting Tray, CTL-92/92A mating
connector, RTU-870A/T mating
connector, TTC-920G mating connector
IFR Systems, Inc. 10200, West York Street ATC-601 Ramp Test Set
Wichita, KS 67215
Atlantic Instruments, Inc. P.O. Box 021466 DataTrac 200/400/400H Databus

Melbourne, FL 32902 Analyzers
JcAIR 400 Industrial Parkway, Test panel and 429E ARINC 429 TX/RX
Industrial Airport, KS 66031 Databus Analyzer
Avionics Specialist, Inc. 3833 Premier Ave. Test panel

Memphis, TN 38118
M/A-COM Omni Spctra, Inc. 21 Continental Blvd Rf load and BNC-to-TNC adapter
Merrimac, NH 03054-9979
C & K Components, Inc. 15-T Riverdale Ave. Toggle switches

Newton, lMA 02158
(617) 964-6400
Grayhill Inc. 561 Hillgrove, P.O.Box 10373 Wafer switches

LaGrange IL 60525
(708) 354-1040
Chicago Miniature Lamp, Inc. 1080-T Johnson Dr. Indicator lamp holders and lens
Buffalo Grove, IL 60089
(908) 459-3400
Bussman Div., Cooper Industries P.O. Box 14460 Fuses and fuse holder
St. Louis, MO 63178
(314) 394-2877
GE Co., Miniature Lamp Dept. Nela Park Light bulb

Cleveland OH 44112
(216) 266-2121
E.F. Johnson Co. Minneapolis, MN 55459-0089 Banana jacks
ITT Cannon, Corp. 1851-T E. Deer Ave. Connectors

Santa Ana, CA 92705
(714) 557-4700
Bud Industries, Inc. P.O. Box 431, 4605 E. 355th St. Chassis
Willoughby, OH 44094
(216) 946-3200
Atlantic India Rubber Co. 317 W. Doublas St. Rubber grommet

Goshen, IN 46256
Switchcraft Inc. 5555-T N. Elston Ave. Phono plug and jack

Chicago, IL 60630
(312) 792-2700
5/5/1993 5-162
Acceptance Test, Test Panel

Panel Layout Diagram
Figure 5-3
5/5/1993 5-163
Acceptance Test, Abbreviated Test Panel

Schematic Diagram
Figure 5-4
6/15/1995 5-164
Acceptance Test, Enhanced Test Panel

Schematic Diagram
Figure 5-5 (Sheet 1 of 3)
6/15/1995 5-165

Schematic Diagram
Figure 5-5 (Sheet 2)
6/15/1995 5-166

Schematic Diagram
6/15/1995 5-167
Test Panel Mating Connector, D-submin, 50-pin, plug CTL-92/92A Control, Mating Connector P1
DDM50P-C37-A176, CPN: 371-0118-000 MS3126 E20-41SY, CPN 359-0305-590, or
MS 3116E20,41SY, CPN: 371-6110-000
Signal Name/Description From To Wire Size or Type

Pin No. Pin No.
28 V dc, primary power no. 1 (+) 1 G 22 AWG
28 V dc, primary power no. 2 (+) 18 t 22 AWG
Primary power, ground (-) 17 s 22 AWG
Primary power, ground (-) 50 P 22 AWG
CTL data out, 1B 8 S 26 AWG, STP
CTL data out, 1A 41 R 26 AWG, STP
CTL data in, 1B 31 U 26 AWG, STP
CTL data in, 1A 10 V 26 AWG, STP
Ident input 4 b 26 AWG
Self-test (discrete input/output) 6 E 26 AWG (this wire was not included in the
original version of this cable)
The remaining connections are not required when using the Abbreviated Version of Test Panel
No. 1 transponder in stby 20 W 26 AWG (this wire was not included in the
original version of this cable)
No. 2 transponder in stby 10 X 26 AWG
No. 1 transponder on/off 11 B 26 AWG
No. 2 transponder on/off 27 C 26 AWG
No. 1 sw 28 V dc out 28 k 26 AWG
No. 2 sw 28 V dc out 43 j 26 AWG

CTL-92/92A Control Interconnect Cable Assembly Diagram and Wire List
5/5/1993 5-168
Test Panel Mating Connector, D-submin, 50-pin, plug CTL-92/92A Control, Mating Connector P1
DDM50P-C37-A176, CPN: 371-0118-000 MS3126 E20-41SY, CPN 359-0305-590, or
MS 3116E20,41SY, CPN: 371-6110-000

Pin No. Pin No.
Alt code, A1 (input) 12 c 26 AWG
Alt code, A2 (input) 13 e 26 AWG
Alt code, A4 (input) 14 d 26 AWG
Alt code, B1 (input) 28 i 26 AWG
Alt code, B2 (input) 29 h 26 AWG
Alt code, B4 (input) 30 f 26 AWG
Alt code, C1 (input) 45 J 26 AWG
Alt code, C2 (input) 46 H 26 AWG
Alt code, C4 (input) 47 F 26 AWG
Alt code, D4 (input) 48 p 26 AWG
Alt code, common 5 g 26 AWG

CTL-92/92A Control Interconnect Cable Assembly Diagram and Wire List

RTU-870A Control Interconnect Cable Assembly Diagram and Wire List
6/15/1995 5-169
Test Panel Mating Connector, D-submin, 50-pin, plug RTU-870A/T Radio Tuning Unit, Mating Connector P1
DDM50P-C37-A176, CPN: 371-0118-000 MS27473T20F-2S, CPN 359-0601-010,
Strain relief: MS27506F20-2, CPN: 359-0637-070

Pin No. Pin No.
28 V dc, primary power no. 1 (+) 1 1 22 AWG
28 V dc, primary power no. 2 (+) 18 7 22 AWG
Primary power, ground (-) 17 3 22 AWG
Primary power, ground (-) 50 3 22 AWG
RTU data out, 1B (ARINC 429 data from 26 45 26 AWG, STP

RTU to XPDR)
RTU data out, 1A (ARINC 429 data from 25 44 26 AWG, STP

RTU to XPDR)
RTU data in, 1B (ARINC 429 data input to 31 29 26 AWG, STP

RTU from XPDR)
RTU data in, 1A (ARINC 429 data input to 10 28 26 AWG, STP

RTU from XPDR)
Ident input 4 11 26 AWG

RTU-870A Control Interconnect Cable Assembly Diagram and Wire List

TTC-920G Control Interconnect Cable Assembly Diagram and Wire List
5/5/1993 5-170
Test Panel Mating Connector, D-submin, 50-pin, plug TTC-920G Transponder/TCAS Control, Mating Connector1
DDM50P-C37-A176, CPN: 371-0118-000 P1: MD24266R76B24S7, CPN: 359-4068-030
P2: MS24266R16B24S8, CPN: 359-4095-700

Pin No. Pin No.
115 V ac, 400 Hz, primary power1 (high) Source J1-3 22 AWG
(external source) High J2-3*
115 V ac, 400 Hz, primary power (low) Source J1-4 22 AWG
(external source) Low J2-4*
Primary power, ground (-) 17 J1-6 22 AWG

J2-6*
Air ground (input) (strap for normal 17 J1-11* 26 AWG

operation) J2-11*
Primary power, ground (-) 50 J1-8 22 AWG

J2-8*
ARINC 429, data out, 1B (TTC-920G 25 J1-22 26 AWG, STP

output to XPDR)
ARINC 429, data out, 1A (TTC-920G 26 J1-23 26 AWG, STP

output to XPDR)
Air ground (input) 17* J1-11* 26 AWG

J2-11*
Monitor lamp power (+28 V dc) 1* J1-18* 26 AWG
Monitor lamp power (+28 V dc) 1* J1-18* 26 AWG
Lighting power (+28 V dc) 18* J2-1* 26 AWG
Standby/on 20* J1-7 26 AWG
Fault Monitor (XPDR output) 12* J1-20* 26 AWG

J2-20*
* These wires were not shown in the original cable wiring list.

TTC-920G Control Interconnect Cable Assembly Diagram and Wire List
5/5/1993 5-171
5.8.2Miscellaneous Cables
In the lower section of sheet 1, the BNC-to-
Figure 5-9 shows the addtional cables needed single phono jack cables are needed for the
for the Acceptance Test. The tip jack cables RX function of the DataTrac 400, and 400H.
shown in the upper section of sheet 1 are For DataTrac 400 operation you can
needed for dc power input to the DataTrac substitute two of the lower cable for the
200 or 400. If you operate from ac power or upper and then use a separate TX port. For
battery power only you do not need these. the DataTrac 400H you must use the upper
The DataTrac 400H and JcAIR 429E, as well cable because it has only one TX port and
as some DataTrac 200, have their own ac-to- therefore you must use that port for both the
dc power converter/battery recharge facility. control and altitude functions.
Sheet 2 of this figure shows the cables

needed for the DataTrac 200 and the JcAIR
429E, respectively.
Acceptance Test, Bus Reader to Test Panel Interconnecting Cables

Figure 5-9 (sheet 1 of 2)
In assembling the BNC-to-phono plug cables, lines. In assembling the phono plug-to-tip
be sure to connect the bus A wires between jack cables, be sure the A wire is connected to
the BNC center and the proper phono plug the jack identified as HI. In all cases, do not
contact. In assembling the phono plug-to- use the the phono plug common as a signal
phono plug cables, be sure to connect similar carrying contact.
contacts; i.e., do not reverse the A and B
5/5/1993 5-172
Acceptance Test, Bus Reader to Test Panel Interconnect Cables

Figure 5-9 (sheet 2)
5/5/1993 5-173
5.8.1Acceptance Test Panel Modification S16 also controls the select discretes P2-41
Record. (AS0) and P2-42 (AS1) (see 2. above). Data
supplied on the ALTERNATE DIGITAL
5.8.1.1Modification 1. ALTITUDE SOURCE is switched to port B;
either ARINC or CSDB.
At modification 1 the following changes are 4. Existing altitude input jack J4 is
introduced. relabeled as PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE
SOURCE. Switch S16 controls the
1. An additional SPDT switch, S56, is added connection of this input to the appropriate
with connection to UUT pin P1-28. This UUT port A (either ARINC or CSDB).
function is labeled AUTO ALT. When this 5. Switch S57, REPORTING ALT SEL,
function is enabled (EN, ground applied to PA/PB, is added. This switch controls the
P1-28), the unit automatically switches to the discrete P2-48 which selects the altitude port
non-selected altitude port for valid reporting used for altitude reporting (Modes C and S).
altitude data if the altitude data at the When P2-48 is grounded, port B data is used
selected source is interrupted or invalid. for altitude reporting. When open port A
2. Existing switch, S17, with connection to data is used.
UUT pin P2-14 is redefined. This switch 6. TCAS IN and TCAS OUT input jacks, J6
previously functioned as the ALT INPUT and J7, are added to allow monitoring of the
PORT SEL and switched the altitude input to TCAS data.
either port A or port B. In -003 units, 7. DATALINK IN and DATALINK OUT
altitude data is required at both ports jacks, J8 and J9, are added to allow airborne
simultaneously therefore this switching datalink bus monitoring. Users should see
function is changed (see 3. below). The new this addition as optional at this time because
function, SOURCE SELECT, CTL/SEL, the airborne datalink function has not been
functions with the existing altitude source industry defined and therefore is not fully
select pins P2-41 and P2-42 as follows: implemented. It is presented here primarily
so that builders of this test panel can allow
SS* AS0 AS1 Altitude Type Selected for the eventual addition of this function if
and when it is required. Part of this change
1 0 0 ARINC 429 on ARINC ports A and B
1 0 1 CSDB on CSDB ports A and B
also includes the addition of switch S58.
1 1 0 ARINC 575 on ARINC ports A and B This switch supplies a ground to P2-60 to
1 1 1 ARINC 572 (Gillham) on the Gillham enable/select the airborne datalink function.
parallel port 8. That portion of S12 which supplies the
0 0 0 Port A altitude on the selected control ground to pins P2-56, -57, and -58 has been
bus (either ARINC 429 or CSDB) and
port B altitude type ARINC 429 on
changed slightly. The common was
ARINC port B. connected to ground. It should instead be
0 0 1 Port A altitude on the selected control connected to P2-52 which is available at
bus (either ARINC 429 or CSBB) and switch S16.
port B altitude type CSDB on CSDB
9. The common for the Gillham code
port B.
0 1 0 Port A altitude on the selected control switches should be connected to P1-12.
bus (either ARINC 429 or CSDB) and 10. The XFEED IN and OUT lamps, DS3
port B altitude type ARINC 575 on and DS4, and switch S3 position labeling
ARINC port B. was reversed on the 6 January 1992 issue of
0 1 1 Port A altitude on the selected control
the test panel schematic diagram. No wiring
bus (either ARINC 429 or CSDB) and
port B altitude type Gillham on the changes are needed.
Gillham parallel port. 11. Check the panel layout, figure 5-3
* CTL = active low (ground on P2-48) and carefully. You will find a few minor label
SEL = open. changes.
3. ALTERNATE DIGITAL ALTITUDE
SOURCE input jack J5 is added and existing
switch S16 is expanded to allow two altitude
sources to be connected simultaneously. S16
allows selection of the appropriate input port
depending on the type of data being supplied.
5/5/1993 5-174
5.9 FLIGHTLINE TEST, TEST PANEL airplane harness control head mating
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS connector and the control head. In the case
of the CTL-92T, you should be aware that the
5.9.1 Introduction ATC control data originates in the CTL-
92/92A as CSDB data. This is supplied to
This paragraph provides the instructions and the CTL-92T where it is converted to ARINC
material listing necessary to assemble the 429 data, TCAS data is added, and the
Flightline Test Panel shown in figure 5-10. A composite data is then supplied to the
number of test equipment suppliers may offer transponder and subsequently to the TCAS.
a product item equivalent these Therefore, the communication between the
specifications. If so, you should feel free to CTL-92T and the CTL-92/92A is in CSDB,
purchase such an item. Otherwise, it can be while the communication between the CTL-
locally fabricated using the data in this 92T and the transponder/TCAS is in ARINC
paragraph. 429.
5.9.2 Flightline Test Panel Assembly Figure 5-11 is the suggested panel layout of
and Use the components; banana jacks, switches,
indicator lamps, etc. If you decide to
This test panel allows access to all input and fabricate your own panel and wish to retain
output signals to and from the applicable the overall panel versatility, be aware that
control; CTL-92 ATC Control, CTL-92A ATC the overlays are intended to be selectable.
Control, CTL-92T ATC and TCAS Control, The design allows the overlay to rest on top
TTC-920G Transponder-TCAS Control, RTU- of the panel and therefore must fit the
870A Radio Tuning Unit, and RTU-870T component placement rather closely. Figure
Radio Tuning Unit (TCAS). Using this test 13 through 19 is a series of diagrams
panel on the flightline, with a dvm and a showing the various overlays; each applicable
bus reader, can help to isolate a problem to to a given control type. With suitable size
either the control or the transponder unit adjustment, figure 5-11 can be used as a
and thus increase the probability of correctly template. The overlays must (then) also be
removing the faulty unit in a multi-unit size adjusted.
system. It is intended that a ramp tester be
used for ATC ground station simulation. Four D-type connectors are located on the
edge of the panel; two on each side. These
The test panel consists of a panel with connectors mate with the cable connectors.
several test points for individual signal The 25-pin connectors carry only the digital
testing and phono jacks and switching for data lines using shielded wiring while the 50-
data bus monitoring and data word injection. pin connectors carry all other input/output
When using the panel, you will select the functions. You may choose to use only a
proper interconnecting cables and test panel single connector to carry all i/o.
overlay, depending on the control present in
the installation. The respective overlay Figure 5-12 is the schematic diagram of the
reflects the test point and other i/o signal test panel. Use this diagram as the guide for
identification peculiar to that control. The wiring the panel. Table 5-19 is a list of the
numbers or letters under each test point are parts needed to assemble the test panel. See
the connector pin numbers of the ATC control paragraph 5.8 for a listing of suppliers.
involved. Figures 5-20 through 5-25 show the cables
and wiring. Select the cables needed
Figure 5-10 is the test setup diagram depending on which of the various controls;
showing the test panel connected between the CTL-92, CTL-92A, CTL-92T Controls, RTU-
870A, or RTU-870T Radio Tuning Units,
TTC-920G Transponder/TCAS Control, or
Gables 429 control.
5/5/1993 5-175
Flightline Test Setup Diagram

Figure 5-10
5/5/1993 5-176
Flightline Test Panel, Panel Layout Diagram

Figure 5-11
5/5/1993 5-177
Flightline Test Panel,

Schematic Diagram
5/5/1993 5-178

Schematic Diagram
5/5/1993 5-179

Schematic Diagram
5/5/1993 5-180

Schematic Diagram
5/5/1993 5-181

Schematic Diagram
5/5/1993 5-182
Table 5-19. Flightline Test Panel Parts List

NUMBER
NAME PN
Lamp Holder DS1,2,5,6, 2 Chicago Miniature LH73/1 included in 262-2828-

Lamp, Inc. 0X0 CPN
Lamp lens, red LDS5,6 2 GE Co. LC12RN2 262-2828-030
Lamp lens, yellow LDS1,2 2 LC12YN2
Lamp, 28 V DS1-2 2 385 262-2171-010
Lamp, assy, 115 DS3-4 2 LeeCraft, SnapLite 262-2852-050

V
Toggle switch S3-S10 8 C&K 7101SYZQE 266-5321-150

DPDT, on/on Components, Inc.
Momentary S1,S2 2 8121SHZGE 266-5404-010

switch, SP, Push-
on
Stereo Phono J3-J10 8 Switchcraft Inc. PJ-055B Not available from

jack, 1/4-inch Collins
Banana jack, 1/4" TP1-45 45 E.F. Johnson Co. blk: 108-0903-001 blk: 360-0241-000
yel: 108-0907-001 yel: 358-0245-000
(other colors are optional)
50-pin D-submin, J1A, J2A 2 ITT Cannon DDMF-50S-A176 371-0182-000

conn (socket)
25-pin D-submin, J1B, J2B 2 DDMF-25S-A176 371-0166-000

conn (socket)
Chassis 1 Bud Industries, AC 424 021-0347-050

Inc.
Chassis, bottom 1 BPA-1519 Not available from
panel Collins

601 rf cable to
antenna cable
connector for
direction-
connection
method only.
Control head Locally fabricated See figures 5-19

cables through 5-24
Bus reader Locally fabricated See figure 5-9

cables
Tip jack test As required Not available from

leads for use with Collins
dvm
5/5/1993 5-183

Panel Overlay for CTL-92/92A
Figure 5-13
5/5/1993 5-184

Panel Overlay for CTL-92T
Figure 5-14
5/5/1993 5-185

Panel Overlay for RTU-870A/T Testing
Figure 5-15
5/5/1993 5-186

Panel Overlay for TTC-920G Testing
Figure 5-16
5/5/1993 5-187
Cable B: Connector information: Cable A: Connector information:

J1: KPT2E20-41PYDV, CPN: 371-8625-440 P1: MS3126E20-41SY, CPN 359-0305-590, or
P1A: DD 50P C37, CPN 371-0118-000; MS3116E20,41SY, CPN 371-6110-000
Hood: CPN 371-0187-000 P2A: DD 50P C37, CPN 371-0118-000;
P1B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000 Hood: CPN 371-0187-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000 P2B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000
Signal name From To To From From To Wire size/type (both cables)

/ description J1 P1-A P1-B P2-A P2-B P1
Data bus 1A (from XPDR) V 1 1 V Shielded, twisted pair
Data bus 1B (from XPDR) U 14 14 U Shielded, twisted pair
Shield for U/V T 25 25 T Shield
Data bus 2A (from XPDR) a 2 2 a Shielded, twisted pair
Data bus 2B (from XPDR) Z 15 15 Z Shielded, twisted pair
Shield for a/Z Y 12 12 Y Shield
Data bus 1A (to XPDR) S 3 3 S Shielded, twisted pair
Data bus 1B (to XPDR) R 16 16 R Shielded, twisted pair
Shield for S/R P 24 24 P Shield
Data bus 2A (to XPDR) N 4 4 N Shielded, twisted pair
Data bus 2B (to XPDR) M 17 17 M Shielded, twisted pair
Shield for N/M L 11 11 L Shield
28 V dc pwr no. 1 (+) t 1 1 t 22 AWG
28 V dc pwr no. 2 (+) G 3 3 G 22 AWG
Dc pwr gnd s 50 50 s 22 AWG
Dc pwr gnd s 17 17 s 22 AWG
Chassis gnd D 33 33 D 22 AWG
5 V lighting, hi A 7 7 A 26 AWG
28 V lighting, hi r 40 40 r 26 AWG
Lighting common q 39 39 q 26 AWG
CTL-92/92A Control, Flightline Test Cables, Assembly Diagram and Wire List
5/5/1993 5-188
CTL-92/92A Cable B (contd) CTL-92/92A Cable A (contd)
Signal name From To To From From To Wire size/type

Dimming bus n 6 6 n 26 AWG
Self-test discrete, input/output E 38 38 E 26 AWG
Ident discrete input b 5 5 b 26 AWG
Remote tuning select, discrete K 21 21 K 26 AWG

input
No. 1 XPDR in stby, discrete W 42 42 W 26 AWG

output
No. 2 XPDR in stby, discrete X 10 10 X 26 AWG

output
28 V dc, sw output, no. 1 k 28 28 k 26 AWG
28 V dc, sw output, no. 2 j 43 43 j 26 AWG
Dual select (CTL -002 only) m 8 8 m 26 AWG
No. 1 XPDR off, discrete output B 11 11 B 26 AWG
No. 2 XPDR off, discrete output C 27 27 C 26 AWG
Alt code A1 c 29 29 c 26 AWG
Alt code A2 e 30 30 e 26 AWG
Alt code A4 d 45 45 d 26 AWG
Alt code B1 i 46 46 i 26 AWG
Alt code B2 h 14 14 h 26 AWG
Alt code B4 f 15 15 f 26 AWG
Alt code C1 J 31 31 H 26 AWG
Alt code C2 H 32 32 H 26 AWG
Alt code C4 F 47 47 F 26 AWG
Alt code D4 p 4 4 p 26 AWG
Alt code common g 37 37 g 26 AWG
CTL-92/92A Control, Flightline Test Cables, Assembly Diagram and Wire List
5/5/1993 5-189

J1: 27508E20B2PA, CPN 859-0004-010 P1: KJ6F20BSA, CPN: 350-0601-020
P1A: DD 50P C37, CPN 371-0118-000; Strain relief: MS27506F20-2, CPN 359-0637-070
P1B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000 Hood: CPN 371-0187-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000 P2B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000

CSDB data in, 1A (from CTL) 23 1 1 23 Shielded twisted pair
CSDB data in, 1B (from CTL) 22 14 14 22 Shielded twisted pair
Shield for 23/22 25 25 Shield for 23/22
ARINC 429 in, 1A (from ARINC 15 2 2 15 Shielded twisted pair

CTL)
ARINC 429 in, 1B (from ARINC 14 15 15 14 Shielded twisted pair

CTL)
CSDB data out, 1A (to CTL) 16 3 3 16 Shielded twisted pair
CSDB data out, 1B (to CTL) 17 16 16 17 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429 out, 1A (to ARINC 8 4 4 8 Shielded twisted pair

CTL)
ARINC 429 out, 1B (to ARINC 9 17 17 9 Shielded twisted pair

CTL)
ARINC 429 in, 1A (from XPDR) 11 5 5 11 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429 in, 1B (from XPDR) 10 18 18 10 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429 in, 2A (from XPDR) 13 6 6 13 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429 in, 2B (from XPDR) 12 19 19 12 Shielded twisted pair
CTL-92T Control, Flightline Test Cables, Assembly Diagram and Wire List
5/5/1993 5-190
CTL-92T Cable B (contd) CTL-92T Cable A (contd)

ARINC 429 out, 1A (to XPDR) 5 7 7 5 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429 out, 1B (to XPDR) 4 20 20 4 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429 out, 2A (to XPDR) 6 8 8 13 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429 out, 2B (to XPDR) 7 21 21 12 Shielded twisted pair
28 V dc pwr input no. 1 (+) 1 1 1 1 22 AWG
Pwr gnd 59 50 50 59 22 AWG
Pwr gnd 60 20 20 60 22 AWG
Pwr gnd 32 17 17 32 22 AWG
Self-test input 46 38 38 46 26 AWG
Ident input 21 5 5 21 26 AWG
28 V lighting input, hi 48 40 40 48 26 AWG
5 V lighting input, hi 50 7 7 50 26 AWG
Lighting common 62 39 39 62 26 AWG
Strap no. 1 53 8 8 53 26 AWG
Strap no. 2 49 21 21 49 26 AWG
Strap no. 3 52 9 9 52 26 AWG
Strap no. 4 51 22 22 51 26 AWG
Strap no. 5 47 23 23 47 26 AWG
Strap no. 6 24 24 24 24 26 AWG
Strap common 27 41 41 27 26 AWG
ATC no. 1 select, input 19 42 42 19 26 AWG
ATC no. 2 select, input 18 10 10 18 26 AWG
28 V switched output 25 11 11 25 26 AWG
5/5/1993 5-191
CTL-92T Cable B (contd) CTL-92T Cable A (contd)

Reply lamp output (+) 33 28 28 33 26 AWG
Reply lamp output (-) 41 43 43 41 26 AWG
Altitude reporting input 20 44 44 20 26 AWG
ATC code A1 44 29 29 44 26 AWG
ATC code A2 26 30 30 26 26 AWG
ATC code A4 45 45 45 45 26 AWG
ATC code B1 56 46 46 56 26 AWG
ATC code B2 55 14 14 55 26 AWG
ATC code B4 57 15 15 57 26 AWG
ATC code C1 39 31 31 39 26 AWG
ATC code C2 42 32 32 42 26 AWG
ATC code C4 54 47 47 54 26 AWG
ATC code D1 61 48 48 61 26 AWG
ATC code D2 37 49 49 37 26 AWG
ATC code D4 63 4 4 63 26 AWG
ATC code common 64 37 37 64 26 AWG
5/5/1993 5-192

J1: MS27508E20F-2P, CPN: 359-0667-280 P1: MS27493T20f-2S, CPN 359-0601-020
P1B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000 Hood: CPN 371-0187-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000 P2B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000

ARINC 429, Data Input, A, A 28 1 1 28 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429, Data Input, A, B 29 14 14 29 Shielded twisted pair
Shield 30 25 25 30 Shield
ARINC 429, Data Input, B, A 31 2 2 31 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429, Data Input, B, B 32 15 15 32 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429, Data Input, C, A 34 5 5 34 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429, Data Input, C, B 35 18 18 5 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429, Data Output, A, A 44 4 4 44 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429, Data Output, A, B 45 17 17 45 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429, Data Output, B, A 47 7 7 47 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429, Data Output, B, B 48 20 20 48 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429, Data Output, C, A 50 8 8 50 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429, Data Output, C, B 51 21 21 51 Shielded twisted pair
28 V dc pwr input, No. 1 (+) 1 1 1 1 22 AWG
28 V dc pwr input, No. 2 (+) 7 3 3 7 22 AWG
RTU-870A/T Radio Tuning Unit, Flightline Test Cables, Assembly Diagram and Wire List
5/5/1993 5-193
RTU-870A/T Cable B (contd) RTU-870A/T Cable A (contd)

Power ground 3 50 50 3 22 AWG
Ground (connect to P1-A 50) 17 17 22 AWG
Strap common 53 23 23 53 22 AWG
(common - connect to P1-A 23) 13 13 22 AWG (connect to J1-A 23)
(common - connect to P1-A 23) 37 37 22 AWG (connect to J1-A 23)
115 V ac lighting, hi 5 36 36 5 26 AWG
Lighting common 4 16 16 4 26 AWG
Dimming input (+28 V dc) 8 6 6 8 26 AWG
Dim common 10 39 39 10 26 AWG
Remote ident input 11 5 5 11 26 AWG
Cross-side RTU disable 63 8 8 63 26 AWG
Reversionary data display enable 39 21 21 39 26 AWG
MB sense enable 61 9 9 61 26 AWG
ATC 1 select 13 22 22 13 26 AWG
RTU side 2 select 64 23 23 64 26 AWG
Remote tune enable 12 24 24 12 26 AWG
RTU on/off 9 25 25 9 26 AWG
L Eng data no. 1, A 37 42 42 37 Shielded twisted pair
L Eng data no. 1, B 38 10 10 38 Shielded twisted pair
Shield for 37/38 40 2 2 40 Shield for 37/38
R Eng data no. 2, A 41 11 11 41 Shielded twisted pair
R Eng data no. 2, B 42 27 27 42 Shielded twisted pair
Shield for 41/42 43 19 19 43 Shield for 41/42
RTU test mode enable 60 28 28 60 26 AWG
5/5/1993 5-194
RTU-870A/T Cable B (contd) RTU-870A/T Cable A (contd)

Nav radio test inhibit 58 43 43 58 26 AWG
MLS no. 1 select 16 44 44 16 26 AWG
MLS no. 2 select 62 12 12 62 26 AWG
DME no. 2 deselect 59 29 29 59 26 AWG
ADF no. 2 deselect 57 30 30 57 26 AWG
UHF no. 1 select 17 45 45 17 26 AWG
UHF no. 2 select 18 46 46 18 26 AWG
TACAN no. 1 select 19 14 14 37 26 AWG
TACAN no. 2 select 20 15 15 20 26 AWG
TCAS on board select 21 31 31 21 26 AWG
ADF TC-X select 23 32 32 23 26 AWG
Inv TACAN inhibit select 24 47 47 24 26 AWG
Comm extended freq select 54 48 48 54 26 AWG
Nav extended freq select 55 49 49 55 26 AWG
ADF extended freq select 56 4 4 56 26 AWG
5/5/1993 5-195

J1: MIL-C-26500, CPN 359-4118-240 P1: MD24266R76B24S7, CPN 359-4068-030
J2: MIL-C-26500, CPN 359-4118-250 P2: MS24266R16B24S8, CPN 359-4095-700
P1B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000 Hood: CPN 371-0187-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000 P2B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000

/ description J1/J2 P1-A P1-B P2-A P2-B P1/P2
ARINC 429 to XPDR no. 1, 2A J1-22 7 7 P1-22 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429 to XPDR no. 1, 2B J1-23 20 20 P1-23 Shielded twisted pair
Shield for J1-22/23 22 22 Shield for P1-22/23
ARINC 429 to XPDR no. 2, 2A J2-22 8 8 P2-22 Shielded twisted pair
ARINC 429 to XPDR no. 2, 2B J2-23 21 21 P2-22 Shielded twisted pair
Shield for J2-22/23 9 9 Shield for P2-22/23
115 V ac pwr no. 1, Hi J1-3 34 34 P1-3 22 AWG
115 V ac pwr no. 1, Lo J1-4 18 18 P1-4 22 AWG
115 V ac pwr no. 2, Hi J2-3 36 36 P2-3 22 AWG
115 V ac pwr no. 2, Lo J2-4 16 16 P2-4 22 AWG
Self-test input J1-9 38 38 P1-9 26 AWG
Monitor lamp test input J1-21 5 5 P1-21 26 AWG
28 V lighting, Hi J2-1 40 40 P2-1 26 AWG
28 V lighting, Lo J2-2 39 39 P2-2 26 AWG
5 V lighting, Hi J1-1 7 7 P2-1 26 AWG
5 V lighting, Lo J1-2 6 6 P1-2 26 AWG
Antenna select, no. 1 J1-5 8 8 P1-5 26 AWG
Antenna transfer common J2-10 21 21 P2-10 26 AWG
Antenna select, no. 2 J2-5 9 9 P2-5 26 AWG
TTC-920G TCAS/Transponder Control, Flightline Test Cables, Assembly Diagram and Wire List
5/5/1993 5-196
TTC-920G Cable B (contd) TTC-920G Cable A (contd)

/ description J1/J2 P1-A P1-B P2-A P2-B P1/P2
Air/gnd no. 1, input J1-24 22 22 P1-24 26 AWG
Air/gnd no. 1, output J1-15 23 23 P1-15 26 AWG
Air/gnd no. 2, input J2-24 24 24 P2-24 26 AWG
Monitor lamp pwr, input 12/28 V J1-18 26 26 P1-18 26 AWG
Signal common, no. 1 J1-6 41 41 P1-6 26 AWG
Signal common, no. 2 J2-6 13 13 P2-6 26 AWG
XPDR fail warn, no. 1 J1-12 42 42 P1-12 26 AWG
XPDR fail warn, no. 2 J2-12 11 11 P2-12 26 AWG
XPDR fail warn output J1-10 10 10 P2-10 26 AWG
XPDR in stby, no. 1 J1-7 27 27 P1-7 26 AWG
XPDR in stby, no. 2 J2-7 28 28 P2-7 26 AWG
Alternate AD select, no. 1 J1-16 43 43 P1-16 26 AWG
Alternate AD select, no. 2 J2-16 44 44 P2-16 26 AWG
Chassis gnd, no. 1 J1-8 4 4 P1-8 26 AWG
Chassis gnd, no. 2 J2-8 37 37 P2-8 26 AWG
XPDR fail, discrete no. 1 J1-20 45 45 P1-20 26 AWG
XPDR fail, discrete no. 2 J2-20 46 46 P2-20 26 AWG
TTC-920G TCAS/Transponder Control, Flightline Test Cables, Assembly Diagram and Wire List
5/5/1993 5-197

TDR94 94D Instruction Book

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TDR94 94D Instruction Book

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Collins TDR-94/94D

Collins General Aviation Division

TO: HOLDERS OF THE TDR-94/94D ATC/MODE S TRANSPONDER SYSTEM INSTRUCTION

7TH EDITION HIGHLIGHTS

This publication includes:

General Information 523-0775653

Collins General Aviation Division

INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS

The material in this publication is subject to change. Before attempt-

SOFTWARE COPYRIGHT NOTICE

Copyright, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995

All software resident in this equipment is protected by copyright.

We welcome your comments concerning this publication. Although every effort

Send your comments to: Publications Department MS 106-124

RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

1 1-11 Aug 15/00 Rockwell Collins

2 1-2 Nov 22/02 Rockwell Collins

INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS

Temporary Revision 2 RTR-1/RTR-2

1.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.4 RELATED PUBLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.5 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

1.6 RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

NOTICE: This section replaces fifth edition dated 5 May 1993.

RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF

REV / REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV / REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

0/1 4 Apr 89 None

0/2 4 Apr 90 None

0/3 29 Apr 91 None

0/4 6 Jan 92 None

0/5 5 May 93 See Table 1-6

0/6 15 Jun 95 See Table 1-6

1.1 INTRODUCTION Comm/Nav/Pulse System Installation Manual for

1.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT

The TDR-94/94D is an integral part of the Air

1.4 RELATED PUBLICATIONS

Table 1-5 lists publications related to TDR-94/94D

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered.

COLLINS DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER

TDR-94 Mode A, C, and S ATC Transponder 622-9352-003

MMT-150 Mounting Tray for TDR-94/94D 622-9672-003

FOR INSTALLATIONS USING CSDB TUNING

FOR INSTALLATIONS USING ARINC 429 TUNING

ALTERNATE MODELS AVAILABLE

TDR-94D Same as TDR-94 except with diversity capability 622-9210-003

237Z-1 Similar to ANT-42 except uses dc coupling to radiating element. 522-2632-001

TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S Transponder System

TEMPORARY REVISION NO. 02

Subject: Elementary Surveillance (Flight ID) Installation Guidelines

Temporary Revision 2 Page 1 of 1

Table 1-2. Equipment Specifications.

FAA TSO-C112, class 2A

RTCA D0-181, D0-144

Software DO-178A, level 2

Deutsche Bundespost A44652010

FAA DO-160B, refer to table 1-3 for additional information

Height 84.6 mm (3.33 in)

Width 124.5 mm (4.90 in)

Length 317.5 mm (12.50 in)

Weight 3.6 kg (8.5 lb)

Power requirements 27.5 2.5 V dc at 28 watts nominal, 30 watts maximum

Frequency 1090 MHz, 1 MHz